WO2015110923A2 - Methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia usng a btk inhibitor - Google Patents

Methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia usng a btk inhibitor Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015110923A2
WO2015110923A2 PCT/IB2015/000645 IB2015000645W WO2015110923A2 WO 2015110923 A2 WO2015110923 A2 WO 2015110923A2 IB 2015000645 W IB2015000645 W IB 2015000645W WO 2015110923 A2 WO2015110923 A2 WO 2015110923A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
formula
group
cll
btk inhibitor
cell
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/IB2015/000645
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2015110923A3 (en
Inventor
Ahmed HAMDY
Wayne Rothbaum
Raquel IZUMI
Brian Lannutti
Todd Covey
Roger ULRICH
Dave Johnson
Tjeerd Barf
Allard Kaptein
Original Assignee
Acerta Pharma B.V.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Acerta Pharma B.V. filed Critical Acerta Pharma B.V.
Priority to US15/112,968 priority Critical patent/US10272083B2/en
Priority to TW104115801A priority patent/TW201609099A/en
Priority to PCT/IB2015/002140 priority patent/WO2016116777A1/en
Priority to ARP150101938A priority patent/AR100892A1/en
Priority to TW104120764A priority patent/TW201628620A/en
Publication of WO2015110923A2 publication Critical patent/WO2015110923A2/en
Publication of WO2015110923A3 publication Critical patent/WO2015110923A3/en
Priority to US16/298,094 priority patent/US11090302B2/en
Priority to US17/370,778 priority patent/US11771696B2/en

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/519Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim ortho- or peri-condensed with heterocyclic rings
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/395Antibodies; Immunoglobulins; Immune serum, e.g. antilymphocytic serum
    • A61K39/39533Antibodies; Immunoglobulins; Immune serum, e.g. antilymphocytic serum against materials from animals
    • A61K39/3955Antibodies; Immunoglobulins; Immune serum, e.g. antilymphocytic serum against materials from animals against proteinaceous materials, e.g. enzymes, hormones, lymphokines
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K45/00Medicinal preparations containing active ingredients not provided for in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A61K45/06Mixtures of active ingredients without chemical characterisation, e.g. antiphlogistics and cardiaca
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/02Antineoplastic agents specific for leukemia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/04Antineoplastic agents specific for metastasis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/18Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans
    • C07K16/28Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants
    • C07K16/2887Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants against CD20

Definitions

  • BTK Bruton's tyrosine kinase
  • Bruton's Tyrosine Kinase (BTK or Btk) is a TEC family non-receptor protein kinase expressed in B cells and myeloid cells.
  • BTK B cell receptor
  • FCER1 FCER1
  • BTK inhibitors have thus been developed as potential therapies, as described in O. J. D'Cruz and F. M. Uckun,
  • B cell chronic lymphocytic leukemia is one of the most prevalent B cell malignancies in adults. CLL is characterized by an expansion of monoclonal mature B cells. CLL patients who relapsed after standard treatments generally experience poor outcomes.
  • SLL Small lymphocytic leukemia
  • CLL (and SLL) cells rapidly accumulate and are resistant to apoptosis in vivo, but are known to die rapidly in vitro. M. Buchner, et al, Blood 2010, 115, 4497-506.
  • One cause of this effect is from nonmalignant accessory cells in the tumor micro environment, such as stromal cell contact mediated cell survival.
  • Stromal cells in the bone marrow and lymph nodes are known to have an antiapoptotic and protective effect on CLL cells, protecting them from both
  • chemotherapeutic and spontaneous apoptosis R. E. Mudry, et al, Blood 2000, 96, 1926-32.
  • the chemokine SDFla (CXCL12) directs homing of CLL cells towards protective niches.
  • Existing drugs that target the BCR pathway in B cell malignancies can lead to some lymphocytosis, i.e. lymphocyte egress from nodal compartments, through disruption of CXCR4-SDFla signaling and other adhesion factors in bone marrow and the resulting mobilization of cells.
  • the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
  • BTK Bruton's tyrosine kinase
  • the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
  • BTK Bruton's tyrosine kinase
  • BTK inhibitor is administered once daily at a dose selected from the group consisting of 100 mg, 175 mg, 250 mg, and 400 mg.
  • the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
  • BTK Bruton's tyrosine kinase
  • the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
  • BTK Bruton's tyrosine kinase
  • the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
  • BTK Bruton's tyrosine kinase
  • the CLL is selected from the group consisting of IgVH mutation negative CLL, ZAP-70 positive CLL, ZAP-70 methylated at CpG3 CLL, CD38 positive CLL, CLL with a 17pl3.1 (17p) deletion, CLL with a 1 lq22.3 (1 lq) deletion, CLL in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, CLL in a human presently suffering from platelet-mediated thrombosis, CLL in a human previously suffering from platelet-mediated thrombosis, or combinations thereof.
  • the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anti-CD20 antibody selected from the group consisting of rituximab, obinutuzumab, ofatumumab, veltuzumab, tositumomab, ibritumomab, and fragments, derivatives, conjugates
  • the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
  • BTK Bruton's tyrosine kinase
  • the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
  • BTK Bruton's tyrosine kinase
  • an anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient is selected from the group consisting of acenocoumarol, anagrelide, anagrelide hydrochloride, abciximab, aloxiprin, antithrombin, apixaban, argatroban, aspirin, aspirin with extended-release dipyridamole, beraprost, betrixaban, bivalirudin, carbasalate calcium, cilostazol, clopidogrel, clopidogrel bisulfate, cloricromen, dabigatran etexilate, darexaban, dalteparin, dalteparin sodium, defibrotide, dicumarol, diphenadione, dipyridamole, ditazole, des
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lympho
  • NHL non-Hod
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lympho
  • NHL non-Hod
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lympho
  • NHL non-Hod
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lympho
  • NHL non-Hod
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is non- Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), wherein the NHL is selected from the group consisting of indolent NHL and aggressive NHL.
  • NHL Hodgkin's lymphoma
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), wherein the DLBCL is selected from the group consisting of activated B-cell like diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL-ABC) and germinal center B-cell like diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL-GCB).
  • DLBCL diffuse large B cell lymphoma
  • the DLBCL is selected from the
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), wherein the MCL is selected from the group consisting of mantle zone MCL, nodular MCL, diffuse MCL, and blastoid MCL.
  • MCL mantle cell lymphoma
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), wherein the B-ALL is selected from the group consisting of early pre-B cell B-ALL, pre-B cell B-ALL, and mature B cell B-ALL.
  • B-ALL B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is Burkitt's lymphoma, wherein the Burkitt's lymphoma is selected from the group consisting of sporadic Burkitt's lymphoma, endemic Burkitt's lymphoma, and human immunodeficiency virus-associated Burkitt's lymphoma.
  • the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is multiple myeloma, wherein the multiple myeloma is selected from the group consisting of hyperdiploid multiple myeloma and non-hyperdiploid multiple myeloma.
  • the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is myelofibrosis, wherein the myelofibrosis is selected from the group consisting of primary myelofibrosis, myelofibrosis secondary to polycythemia vera, and myelofibrosis secondary to essential thrombocythaemia.
  • a BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lympho
  • NHL non-Hod
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lympho
  • NHL non-Hod
  • the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lympho
  • NHL non-Hod
  • FIG. 1 illustrates in vivo potency of Formula (II) (labeled "BTK inhibitor”) and ibrutinib.
  • BCR is stimulated with IgM and the expression of activation markers CD69 and CD 86 are monitored by flow cytometry to determine ECso's.
  • the results show that Formula (II) is more potent at inhibiting expression of activation makers than ibrutinib.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates the results of the clinical study of Formula (II) (labeled "BTK inhibitor") in CLL, which are shown in comparison to the results reported for ibrutinib in Figure 1A of J.C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 32-42.
  • the results show that the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) causes a much smaller relative increase and much faster decrease in absolute lymphocyte count (ALC) relative to the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib.
  • ALC absolute lymphocyte count
  • SPD product of greatest diameters
  • FIG. 3 shows overall response data shown by SPD of enlarged lymph nodes in CLL patients as a function of dose of the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II).
  • FIG. 4 shows a comparison of progression-free survival (PFS) in CLL patients treated with the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib or the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II).
  • the ibrutinib data is taken from J.C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 32-42.
  • CLL patients treated with Formula (II) for at least 8 days are included.
  • FIG. 5 shows a comparison of number of patients at risk in CLL patients treated with the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib or the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II). CLL patients treated with Formula (II) for at least 8 days are included.
  • FIG. 6 shows a comparison of progression-free survival (PFS) in CLL patients exhibiting the 17p deletion and treated with the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib or the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II).
  • PFS progression-free survival
  • FIG. 7 shows a comparison of number of patients at risk in CLL patients exhibiting the 17p deletion and treated with the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib or the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II).
  • the ibrutinib data is taken from J.C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 32-42.
  • CLL patients treated with Formula (II) for at least 8 days are included.
  • FIG. 8 shows improved BTK target occupancy of Formula (II) at lower dosage versus ibrutinib in relapsed/refractory CLL patients.
  • FIG. 9 shows the % change in myeloid-derived suppressor cell (MDSC) (monocytic) level over 28 days versus % ALC change at Cycle 1, day 28 (C1D28) with trendlines.
  • MDSC myeloid-derived suppressor cell
  • FIG. 10 shows the % change in MDSC (monocytic) level over 28 days versus % ALC change at Cycle 2, day 28 (C2D28) with trendlines.
  • FIG. 11 shows the % change in natural killer (NK) cell level over 28 days versus % ALC change at Cycle 1, day 28 (C2D28) with trendlines.
  • FIG. 12 shows the % change in NK cell level over 28 days versus % ALC change at Cycle 2, day 28 (C2D28) with trendlines.
  • FIG. 13 compares the % change in MDSC (monocytic) level and % change in NK cell level over 28 days versus % ALC change with the % change in level of CD4 + T cells, CD8 + T cells, CD4 + /CD8 + T cell ratio, NK-T cells, PD-1 + CD4 + T cells, and PD-1 + CD8 + T cells, also versus % ALC change, at Cycle 1 day 28 (C1D28). Trendlines are shown for % change in MDSC (monocytic) level and % change in NK cell level.
  • FIG. 14 compares the % change in MDSC (monocytic) level and % change in NK cell level over 28 days versus % ALC change with the % change in level of CD4 + T cells, CD8 + T cells, CD4 + /CD8 + T cell ratio, NK-T cells, PD-1 + CD4 + T cells, and PD-1 + CD8 + T cells, also versus % ALC change, at Cycle 2 day 28 (C2D28). Trendlines are shown for % change in MDSC (monocytic) level and % change in NK cell level.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates representative photomicrographs and comparison of maximal thrombus size in laser injured arterioles of VWF HAl mutant mice infused with human platelets in the absence or presence of various BTK inhibitors. Representative photomicrographs are given as a comparison of maximal thrombus size in laser-injured arterioles (1 ⁇ concentrations shown).
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a quantitative comparison obtained by in vivo analysis of early thrombus dynamics in a humanized mouse laser injury model using three BTK inhibitors at a concentration of 1 ⁇ .
  • FIG. 17 illustrates the effect of the tested BTK inhibitors on thrombus formation.
  • MCL bleeding events were observed with 560 mg QD and 63% CLL bleeding events were observed with 420 mg QD, where bleeding event is defined as subdural hematoma, ecchymoses, GI bleeding, or hematuria.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates the effect of the concentration of the tested BTK inhibitors on thrombus formation.
  • GPVI platelet collagen receptor glycoprotein VI
  • FIG. 20 illustrates the results of GPVI platelet aggregation studies of Formula (II) and ibrutinib.
  • FIG. 21 shows in vitro analysis of antibody-dependent NK cell-mediated INF- ⁇ release with BTK inhibitors.
  • FIG. 22 shows in vitro analysis of antibody-dependent NK cell-mediated degranulation with BTK inhibitors.
  • FIG. 23 shows that ibrutinib antagonizes antibody-dependent NK cell-mediated cytotoxicity in primary CLL cells.
  • FIG. 24 shows a summary of the results given in FIG. 24 at the highest concentration of rituximab ("Ab”) (10 ⁇ g/mL).
  • FIG. 25 shows that ibrutinib antagonizes antibody-dependent NK cell-mediated cytotoxicity, as in FIG. 23, using the Raji cell line.
  • FIG. 26 shows the effects of BTK inhibition on generalized NK cell mediated cytotoxicity.
  • FIG. 27 shows that Formula (II) has no adverse effect on T helper 17 (Thl7) cells, which are a subset of T helper cells that produce interleukin 17 (IL17), while ibrutinib strongly inhibits Thl7 cells.
  • FIG. 28 shows that Formula (II) has no effect on regulatory T cell (Treg) development, while ibrutinib strongly increases Treg development.
  • SEQ ID NO: 1 is the heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody rituximab.
  • SEQ ID NO:2 is the light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody rituximab.
  • SEQ ID NO:3 is the heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody obinutuzumab.
  • SEQ ID NO:4 is the light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody obinutuzumab.
  • SEQ ID NO: 5 is the variable heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ofatumumab.
  • SEQ ID NO: 6 is the variable light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ofatumumab.
  • SEQ ID NO:7 is the Fab fragment heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ofatumumab.
  • SEQ ID NO: 8 is the Fab fragment light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ofatumumab.
  • SEQ ID NO:9 is the heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody veltuzumab.
  • SEQ ID NO: 10 is the light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody veltuzumab.
  • SEQ ID NO: 11 is the heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody tositumomab.
  • SEQ ID NO: 12 is the light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody tositumomab.
  • SEQ ID NO: 13 is the heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ibritumomab.
  • SEQ ID NO: 14 is the light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ibritumomab.
  • co-administration encompass administration of two or more active pharmaceutical ingredients to a subject so that both agents and/or their metabolites are present in the subject at the same time.
  • Coadministration includes simultaneous administration in separate compositions, administration at different times in separate compositions, or administration in a composition in which two or more agents are present.
  • in vivo refers to an event that takes place in a subject's body.
  • in vitro refers to an event that takes places outside of a subject's body.
  • in vitro assays encompass cell-based assays in which cells alive or dead are employed and may also encompass a cell-free assay in which no intact cells are employed.
  • IC 50 refers to the half maximal inhibitory concentration, i.e. inhibition of 50% of the desired activity.
  • EC 50 refers to the drug concentration at which one-half the maximum response is achieved.
  • an effective amount refers to that amount of an active pharmaceutical ingredient or combination of active pharmaceutical ingredients as described herein that is sufficient to effect the intended application including, but not limited to, disease treatment.
  • a therapeutically effective amount may vary depending upon the intended application (in vitro or in vivo), or the subject and disease condition being treated (e.g., the weight, age and gender of the subject), the severity of the disease condition, the manner of administration, and other factors which can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the term also applies to a dose that will induce a particular response in target cells, (e.g., the reduction of platelet adhesion and/or cell migration).
  • the specific dose will vary depending on the particular compounds chosen, the dosing regimen to be followed, whether the compound is administered in combination with other compounds, timing of administration, the tissue to which it is administered, and the physical delivery system in which the compound is carried.
  • a prophylactic effect includes delaying or eliminating the appearance of a disease or condition, delaying or eliminating the onset of symptoms of a disease or condition, slowing, halting, or reversing the progression of a disease or condition, or any combination thereof.
  • QD means quaque die, once a day, or once daily.
  • BID bis in die, twice a day, or twice daily.
  • TID means bis in die, twice a day, or twice daily.
  • TID means ter in die, three times a day, or three times daily.
  • QID means quater in die, four times a day, or four times daily.
  • salts refers to salts derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter ions known in the art.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts can be formed with inorganic acids and organic acids.
  • Inorganic acids from which salts can be derived include, for example, hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid and phosphoric acid.
  • Organic acids from which salts can be derived include, for example, acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, /?-toluenesulfonic acid and salicylic acid.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts can be formed with inorganic and organic bases.
  • Inorganic bases from which salts can be derived include, for example, sodium, potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium, magnesium, iron, zinc, copper, manganese and aluminum.
  • Organic bases from which salts can be derived include, for example, primary, secondary, and tertiary amines, substituted amines including naturally occurring substituted amines, cyclic amines and basic ion exchange resins. Specific examples include isopropylamine,
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salt is chosen from ammonium, potassium, sodium, calcium, and magnesium salts.
  • cocrystal refers to a molecular complex derived from a number of cocrystal formers known in the art. Unlike a salt, a cocrystal typically does not involve proton transfer between the cocrystal and the drug, and instead involves intermolecular interactions, such as hydrogen bonding, aromatic ring stacking, or dispersive forces, between the cocrystal former and the drug in the crystal structure.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” or “pharmaceutically acceptable excipient” is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic, and absorption delaying agents.
  • the use of such media and agents for active pharmaceutical ingredients is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active pharmaceutical ingredient, its use in the therapeutic compositions of the invention is contemplated. Supplementary active ingredients can also be incorporated into the described compositions.
  • Prodrug is intended to describe a substance that may be converted under
  • prodrug refers to a precursor of a biologically active compound that is pharmaceutically acceptable.
  • a prodrug may be inactive when administered to a subject, but is converted in vivo to an active pharmaceutical ingredient, for example, by hydrolysis.
  • the prodrug compound often offers the advantages of solubility, tissue compatibility or delayed release in a mammalian organism (see, e.g., H. Bundgaard, Design of Prodrugs, Elsevier, Amsterdam (1985)).
  • prodrug is also intended to include any covalently bonded carriers, which release the active pharmaceutical ingredient in vivo when administered to a subject.
  • Prodrugs of an active pharmaceutical ingredient may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the active pharmaceutical ingredient in such a way that the modifications are cleaved, either in routine manipulation or in vivo, to yield the active pharmaceutical ingredient.
  • Prodrugs include, for example, compounds wherein a hydroxy, amino or mercapto group is bonded to any group that, when the prodrug of the active
  • prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetates, formates and benzoate derivatives of an alcohol, various ester derivatives of a carboxylic acid, or acetamide, formamide and benzamide derivatives of an amine functional group in the active pharmaceutical ingredient.
  • ranges are used herein to describe, for example, physical or chemical properties such as molecular weight or chemical formulae, all combinations and subcombinations of ranges and specific embodiments therein are intended to be included.
  • Use of the term "about" when referring to a number or a numerical range means that the number or numerical range referred to is an approximation within experimental variability (or within statistical experimental error), and thus the number or numerical range may vary from, for example, between 1% and 15% of the stated number or numerical range.
  • Alkyl refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain radical consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms, containing no unsaturation, having from one to ten carbon atoms (e.g., Ci-Cio alkyl).
  • a numerical range such as “1 to 10” refers to each integer in the given range - e.g., "1 to 10 carbon atoms” means that the alkyl group may consist of 1 carbon atom, 2 carbon atoms, 3 carbon atoms, etc., up to and including 10 carbon atoms, although the definition is also intended to cover the occurrence of the term "alkyl" where no numerical range is specifically designated.
  • Typical alkyl groups include, but are in no way limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl isobutyl, tertiary butyl, pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, septyl, octyl, nonyl and decyl.
  • the alkyl moiety may be attached to the rest of the molecule by a single bond, such as for example, methyl (Me), ethyl (Et), n-propyl (Pr), 1-methylethyl (isopropyl), n-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylethyl (t-butyl) and 3-methylhexyl.
  • an alkyl group is optionally substituted by one or more of substituents which are independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -OR a , -SR a , - OC(0)-R a , -N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)R a , -C(0)OR a , -OC(0)N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)N(R a ) 2 , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , - N(R a )C(0)R a , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , - N(R a )C(0)R
  • Alkylaryl refers to an -(alkyl)aryl radical where aryl and alkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for aryl and alkyl respectively.
  • Alkylhetaryl refers to an -(alkyl)hetaryl radical where hetaryl and alkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for aryl and alkyl respectively.
  • Alkylheterocycloalkyl refers to an -(alkyl) heterocycyl radical where alkyl and heterocycloalkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for heterocycloalkyl and alkyl respectively.
  • alkene refers to a group consisting of at least two carbon atoms and at least one carbon-carbon double bond
  • an "alkyne” moiety refers to a group consisting of at least two carbon atoms and at least one carbon-carbon triple bond.
  • the alkyl moiety, whether saturated or unsaturated, may be branched, straight chain, or cyclic.
  • alkenyl refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain radical group consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms, containing at least one double bond, and having from two to ten carbon atoms (i.e., C 2 -Cio alkenyl).
  • a numerical range such as “2 to 10” refers to each integer in the given range - e.g., "2 to 10 carbon atoms” means that the alkenyl group may consist of 2 carbon atoms, 3 carbon atoms, etc., up to and including 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkenyl moiety may be attached to the rest of the molecule by a single bond, such as for example, ethenyl (i.e., vinyl), prop-l-enyl (i.e., allyl), but-l-enyl, pent-l-enyl and penta-1,4- dienyl.
  • an alkenyl group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which are independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -OR a , -SR a , -OC(0)-R a , - N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)R a , -C(0)OR a , -OC(0)N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)N(R a ) 2 , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , -N(R a )C(0)R a , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , -N(R a )C(0)R
  • heterocycloalkylalkyl heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
  • alkenyl-cycloalkyl refers to an -(alkenyl)cycloalkyl radical where alkenyl and cycloalkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for alkenyl and cycloalkyl respectively.
  • Alkynyl refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain radical group consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms, containing at least one triple bond, having from two to ten carbon atoms (i.e. C 2 -Cio alkynyl). Whenever it appears herein, a numerical range such as “2 to 10" refers to each integer in the given range - e.g., "2 to 10 carbon atoms” means that the alkynyl group may consist of 2 carbon atoms, 3 carbon atoms, etc., up to and including 10 carbon atoms.
  • alkynyl may be attached to the rest of the molecule by a single bond, for example, ethynyl, propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl and hexynyl. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the
  • an alkynyl group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -OR a , -SR a , -OC(0)-R a , -N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)R a , -C(0)OR a , -OC(0)N(R a ) 2 , - C(0)N(R a ) 2 , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , -N(R a )C(0)R a , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , -N(R a )C(0)
  • Alkynyl-cycloalkyl refers to an -(alkynyl)cycloalkyl radical where alkynyl and cycloalkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for alkynyl and cycloalkyl respectively.
  • Cyano refers to a -CN radical.
  • Cycloalkyl refers to a monocyclic or polycyclic radical that contains only carbon and hydrogen, and may be saturated, or partially unsaturated. Cycloalkyl groups include groups having from 3 to 10 ring atoms (i.e. C 2 -Cio cycloalkyl). Whenever it appears herein, a numerical range such as “3 to 10" refers to each integer in the given range - e.g., "3 to 10 carbon atoms” means that the cycloalkyl group may consist of 3 carbon atoms, etc., up to and including 10 carbon atoms. Illustrative examples of cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to the following moieties: cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexyl,
  • a cycloalkyl group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifiuoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -OR a , -SR a , -OC(0)-R a , -N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)R a , -C(0)OR a , -OC(0)N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)N(R a )
  • R a is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl,
  • heterocycloalkylalkyl heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
  • Cycloalkyl-alkenyl refers to a -(cycloalkyl)alkenyl radical where cycloalkyl and alkenyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for cycloalkyl and alkenyl, respectively.
  • Cycloalkyl-heterocycloalkyl refers to a -(cycloalkyl)heterocycloalkyl radical where cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for cycloalkyl and
  • Cycloalkyl-heteroaryl refers to a -(cycloalkyl)heteroaryl radical where cycloalkyl and heteroaryl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for cycloalkyl and heteroaryl, respectively.
  • alkoxy refers to the group -O-alkyl, including from 1 to 8 carbon atoms of a straight, branched, cyclic configuration and combinations thereof attached to the parent structure through an oxygen. Examples include, but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, cyclopropyloxy and cyclohexyloxy. "Lower alkoxy” refers to alkoxy groups containing one to six carbons.
  • substituted alkoxy refers to alkoxy wherein the alkyl constituent is substituted (i.e., -0-(substituted alkyl)).
  • the alkyl moiety of an alkoxy group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifiuoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -OR a , -SR a , -OC(0)-R a , -N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)R a , -C(0)OR a , -OC(0)N(R a ) 2 , - C(0)N(
  • a Ci-C 6 alkoxycarbonyl group is an alkoxy group having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms attached through its oxygen to a carbonyl linker.
  • “Lower alkoxycarbonyl” refers to an
  • alkoxycarbonyl group wherein the alkoxy group is a lower alkoxy group.
  • substituted alkoxycarbonyl refers to the group (substituted alkyl)-O-C(O)- wherein the group is attached to the parent structure through the carbonyl functionality.
  • the alkyl moiety of an alkoxycarbonyl group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -OR a , -SR a , - OC(0)-R a , -N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)R a , -C(0)OR a , -OC(0)N(R a )
  • Acyl refers to the groups (alkyl)-C(O)-, (aryl)-C(O)-, (heteroaryl)-C(O)-,
  • heteroalkyl C(O)- and (heterocycloalkyl)-C(O)-, wherein the group is attached to the parent structure through the carbonyl functionality.
  • R radical is heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl, the hetero ring or chain atoms contribute to the total number of chain or ring atoms.
  • the alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl moiety of the acyl group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which are independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, - OR a , -SR a , -OC(0)-R a , -N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)R a , -C(0)OR a , -OC(0)N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)N(R a ) 2 , - N(R a )C(0)OR a , -N(R a )C(0)R a , -N(R a )C(0)OR a
  • R of an acyloxy group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifiuoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -OR a , -SR a , - OC(0)-R a , -N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)R a , -C(0)OR a , -OC(0)N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)N(R a ) 2 , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , - N(R a )C(0)R a , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , - N(R a
  • Amino refers to a -N(R a ) 2 radical group, where each R a is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification.
  • R a is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification.
  • R a is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroaryl
  • -N(R a ) 2 is intended to include, but is not limited to, 1-pyrrolidinyl and 4-morpholinyl.
  • an amino group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano,
  • R a is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl,
  • substituted amino also refers to N-oxides of the groups -NHR d , and NR d R d each as described above. N-oxides can be prepared by treatment of the corresponding amino group with, for example, hydrogen peroxide or m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid.
  • Amide or “amido” refers to a chemical moiety with formula -C(0)N(R) 2 or
  • R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl (bonded through a ring carbon) and heteroalicyclic (bonded through a ring carbon), each of which moiety may itself be optionally substituted.
  • the R 2 of -N(R) 2 of the amide may optionally be taken together with the nitrogen to which it is attached to form a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7- membered ring.
  • an amido group is optionally substituted independently by one or more of the substituents as described herein for alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl.
  • An amide may be an amino acid or a peptide molecule attached to a compound of Formula (I), thereby forming a prodrug.
  • the procedures and specific groups to make such amides are known to those of skill in the art and can readily be found in seminal sources such as T. H. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3 rd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York (1999).
  • Aromatic or "aryl” or “Ar” refers to an aromatic radical with six to ten ring atoms ⁇ e.g., C 6 -Cio aromatic or C 6 -Cio aryl) which has at least one ring having a conjugated pi electron system which is carbocyclic ⁇ e.g., phenyl, fluorenyl, and naphthyl).
  • Bivalent radicals formed from substituted benzene derivatives and having the free valences at ring atoms are named as substituted phenylene radicals.
  • Bivalent radicals derived from univalent poly cyclic hydrocarbon radicals whose names end in "-yl” by removal of one hydrogen atom from the carbon atom with the free valence are named by adding "-idene” to the name of the corresponding univalent radical, e.g., a naphthyl group with two points of attachment is termed naphthylidene.
  • a numerical range such as “6 to 10” refers to each integer in the given range; e.g., "6 to 10 ring atoms” means that the aryl group may consist of 6 ring atoms, 7 ring atoms, etc., up to and including 10 ring atoms.
  • an aryl moiety is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which are independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -OR a , -SR a , -OC(0)-R a , -N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)R a , -C(0)OR a , -OC(0)N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)N(R a ) 2 , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , -OC(0)N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)N(R a ) 2 , -N(R a )C(0)OR a ,
  • R a is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or
  • alkyl refers to an (aryl)alkyl-radical where aryl and alkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for aryl and alkyl respectively.
  • Ester refers to a chemical radical of formula -COOR, where R is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl (bonded through a ring carbon) and heteroalicyclic (bonded through a ring carbon).
  • R is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl (bonded through a ring carbon) and heteroalicyclic (bonded through a ring carbon).
  • an ester group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -OR a , -SR a , - OC(0)-R a , -N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)R a , -C(0)OR a , -OC(0)N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)N(R a ) 2 , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , - N(R a )C(0)R a , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , - N(R a )C(0)R
  • Fluoroalkyl refers to an alkyl radical, as defined above, that is substituted by one or more fluoro radicals, as defined above, for example, trifluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, 2,2,2- trifluoroethyl, l-fluoromethyl-2-fluoroethyl, and the like.
  • the alkyl part of the fluoroalkyl radical may be optionally substituted as defined above for an alkyl group.
  • Halo is intended to mean fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo.
  • haloalkyl haloalkenyl
  • haloalkynyl haloalkoxy
  • Heteroalkyl “heteroalkenyl,” and “heteroalkynyl” include optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl radicals and which have one or more skeletal chain atoms selected from an atom other than carbon, e.g., oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus or combinations thereof.
  • a numerical range may be given - e.g., C1-C4 heteroalkyl which refers to the chain length in total, which in this example is 4 atoms long.
  • a heteroalkyl group may be substituted with one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, nitro, oxo, thioxo, trimethylsilanyl, -OR a , -SR a , -OC(0)-R a , -N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)R a , -C(0)OR a , - OC(0)N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)N(R a ) 2 , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , -N(R a )C(0)R a , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , -N(R a )C(0)R a
  • R a is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
  • Heteroalkylaryl refers to an -(heteroalkyl)aryl radical where heteroalkyl and aryl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for heteroalkyl and aryl, respectively.
  • Heteroalkylheteroaryl refers to an -(heteroalkyl)heteroaryl radical where heteroalkyl and heteroaryl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for heteroalkyl and heteroaryl, respectively.
  • Heteroalkylheterocycloalkyl refers to an -(heteroalkyl)heterocycloalkyl radical where heteroalkyl and heterocycloalkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for heteroalkyl and
  • Heteroalkylcycloalkyl refers to an -(heteroalkyl)cycloalkyl radical where heteroalkyl and cycloalkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for heteroalkyl and cycloalkyl, respectively.
  • Heteroaryl or “heteroaromatic” or “HetAr” refers to a 5- to 18-membered aromatic radical (e.g., C5-C13 heteroaryl) that includes one or more ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, and which may be a monocyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic or tetracyclic ring system.
  • a numerical range such as “5 to 18” refers to each integer in the given range - e.g., "5 to 18 ring atoms” means that the heteroaryl group may consist of 5 ring atoms, 6 ring atoms, etc., up to and including 18 ring atoms.
  • Bivalent radicals derived from univalent heteroaryl radicals whose names end in "-yl” by removal of one hydrogen atom from the atom with the free valence are named by adding "-idene” to the name of the corresponding univalent radical - e.g., a pyridyl group with two points of attachment is a pyridylidene.
  • a N-containing "heteroaromatic” or “heteroaryl” moiety refers to an aromatic group in which at least one of the skeletal atoms of the ring is a nitrogen atom.
  • the polycyclic heteroaryl group may be fused or non-fused.
  • the heteroatom(s) in the heteroaryl radical are optionally oxidized.
  • heteroaryl may be attached to the rest of the molecule through any atom of the ring(s).
  • heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, azepinyl, acridinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzindolyl, 1,3-benzodioxolyl, benzofuranyl, benzooxazolyl, benzo[ ⁇ i]thiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, benzo[£][l,4]dioxepinyl, benzo[£][l,4]oxazinyl, 1 ,4-benzodioxanyl, benzonaphthofuranyl, benzoxazolyl, benzodioxolyl, benzodioxinyl, benzoxazolyl, benzopyranyl, benzopyranonyl, benzofuranyl, benzofuranon
  • a heteroaryl moiety is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which are independently: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, nitro, oxo, thioxo, trimethylsilanyl, -OR a , -SR a , -OC(O)- R a , -N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)R a , -C(0)OR a , -OC(0)N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)N(R a ) 2 , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , -N(R a )C(0)R a , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , -N(R a )C(0)
  • heterocycloalkylalkyl heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
  • Substituted heteroaryl also includes ring systems substituted with one or more oxide (-0-) substituents, such as, for example, pyridinyl N-oxides.
  • Heteroarylalkyl refers to a moiety having an aryl moiety, as described herein, connected to an alkylene moiety, as described herein, wherein the connection to the remainder of the molecule is through the alkylene group.
  • Heterocycloalkyl refers to a stable 3- to 18-membered non-aromatic ring radical that comprises two to twelve carbon atoms and from one to six heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Whenever it appears herein, a numerical range such as “3 to 18” refers to each integer in the given range - e.g., "3 to 18 ring atoms” means that the heterocycloalkyl group may consist of 3 ring atoms, 4 ring atoms, etc., up to and including 18 ring atoms.
  • the heterocycloalkyl radical is a monocyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic or tetracyclic ring system, which may include fused or bridged ring systems.
  • the heteroatoms in the heterocycloalkyl radical may be optionally oxidized.
  • One or more nitrogen atoms, if present, are optionally quaternized.
  • the heterocycloalkyl radical is partially or fully saturated.
  • the heterocycloalkyl may be attached to the rest of the molecule through any atom of the ring(s).
  • heterocycloalkyl radicals include, but are not limited to, dioxolanyl, thienyl[l,3]dithianyl, decahydroisoquinolyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, octahydroindolyl, octahydroisoindolyl, 2- oxopiperazinyl, 2-oxopiperidinyl, 2-oxopyrrolidinyl, oxazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, 4- piperidonyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, quinuclidinyl, thiazolidinyl, tetrahydrofuryl, trithianyl, tetrahydropyranyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiamorpholinyl, 1-oxox
  • a heterocycloalkyl moiety is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, nitro, oxo, thioxo, trimethylsilanyl, -OR a , -SR a , -OC(O)- R a , -N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)R a , -C(0)OR a , -OC(0)N(R a ) 2 , -C(0)N(R a ) 2 , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , -N(R a )C(0)R a , -N(R a )C(0)OR a , -N(R a
  • heterocycloalkylalkyl heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
  • Heterocycloalkyl also includes bicyclic ring systems wherein one non-aromatic ring, usually with 3 to 7 ring atoms, contains at least 2 carbon atoms in addition to 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen, as well as combinations comprising at least one of the foregoing heteroatoms; and the other ring, usually with 3 to 7 ring atoms, optionally contains 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen and is not aromatic.
  • Stepoisomers are isomers that differ only in the way the atoms are arranged in space - i.e., having a different stereochemical configuration.
  • Enantiomers are a pair of stereoisomers that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other.
  • a 1 : 1 mixture of a pair of enantiomers is a “racemic” mixture.
  • the term “( ⁇ )” is used to designate a racemic mixture where appropriate.
  • “Diastereoisomers” are stereoisomers that have at least two asymmetric atoms, but which are not mirror-images of each other. The absolute stereochemistry is specified according to the Cahn- Ingold-Prelog R-S system.
  • stereochemistry at each chiral carbon can be specified by either R or S.
  • Resolved compounds whose absolute configuration is unknown can be designated (+) or (-) depending on the direction (dextro- or levorotatory) which they rotate plane polarized light at the wavelength of the sodium D line.
  • Certain of the compounds described herein contain one or more asymmetric centers and can thus give rise to enantiomers, diastereomers, and other stereoisomeric forms that can be defined, in terms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)- or (S)-.
  • the present chemical entities, pharmaceutical compositions and methods are meant to include all such possible isomers, including racemic mixtures, optically pure forms and intermediate mixtures.
  • Optically active (R)- and (5)-isomers can be prepared using chiral synthons or chiral reagents, or resolved using conventional techniques.
  • the compounds described herein contain olefmic double bonds or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that the compounds include both E and Z geometric isomers.
  • Enantiomeric purity refers to the relative amounts, expressed as a percentage, of the presence of a specific enantiomer relative to the other enantiomer. For example, if a compound, which may potentially have an (R)- or an (5)-isomeric configuration, is present as a racemic mixture, the enantiomeric purity is about 50% with respect to either the (R)- or (iS)-isomer. If that compound has one isomeric form predominant over the other, for example, 80%) (S)- and 20%> (R)-, the enantiomeric purity of the compound with respect to the (5)-isomeric form is 80%.
  • the enantiomeric purity of a compound can be determined in a number of ways known in the art, including but not limited to chromatography using a chiral support,
  • nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy using chiral shift reagents which include but are not limited to lanthanide containing chiral complexes or the Pirkle alcohol, or derivatization of a compounds using a chiral compound such as Mosher's acid followed by chromatography or nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy.
  • Moiety refers to a specific segment or functional group of a molecule. Chemical moieties are often recognized chemical entities embedded in or appended to a molecule.
  • 'Nitro refers to the -N0 2 radical.
  • Oxa refers to the -O- radical.
  • Teautomers are structurally distinct isomers that interconvert by tautomerization.
  • Tautomerization is a form of isomerization and includes prototropic or proton-shift tautomerization, which is considered a subset of acid-base chemistry.
  • tautomerization e.g. in solution
  • keto-enol tautomerization A specific example of keto-enol tautomerization is the interconversion of pentane-2,4-dione and 4- hydroxypent-3-en-2-one tautomers.
  • phenol-keto tautomerization A specific example of phenol-keto tautomerization is the interconversion of pyridin-4-ol and pyridin-4(lH)-one tautomers.
  • an enantiomerically enriched preparation of the (S)- enantiomer means a preparation of the compound having greater than 50% by weight of the (S)- enantiomer relative to the (i?)-enantiomer, such as at least 75% by weight, such as at least 80% by weight.
  • the enrichment can be significantly greater than 80% by weight, providing a "substantially enantiomerically enriched,” “substantially enantiomerically pure,” or a “substantially non-racemic” preparation, which refers to preparations of compositions which have at least 85% by weight of one enantiomer relative to the other enantiomer, such as at least 90%) by weight, and such as at least 95% by weight.
  • the enrichment can be significantly greater than 80% by weight, providing a "substantially diastereomerically enriched" or
  • substantially diastereomerically pure preparation refers to preparations of compositions which have at least 85% by weight of one diastereomer relative to other diastereomers, such as at least 90%) by weight, and such as at least 95% by weight.
  • the enantiomerically enriched composition has a higher potency with respect to therapeutic utility per unit mass than does the racemic mixture of that composition.
  • Enantiomers can be isolated from mixtures by methods known to those skilled in the art, including chiral high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) and the formation and crystallization of chiral salts; or preferred enantiomers can be prepared by asymmetric syntheses.
  • a "leaving group or atom” is any group or atom that will, under selected reaction conditions, cleave from the starting material, thus promoting reaction at a specified site.
  • Examples of such groups include halogen atoms and mesyloxy, p- nitrobenzensulphonyloxy and tosyloxy groups.
  • Protecting group is intended to mean a group that selectively blocks one or more reactive sites in a multifunctional compound such that a chemical reaction can be carried out selectively on another unprotected reactive site and the group can then be readily removed after the selective reaction is complete.
  • a variety of protecting groups are disclosed, for example, in T. H. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3 rd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York (1999).
  • Solvate refers to a compound in physical association with one or more molecules of a pharmaceutically acceptable solvent.
  • Substituted means that the referenced group may have attached one or more additional moieties individually and independently selected from, for example, acyl, alkyl, alkylaryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, aryl, carbohydrate, carbonate, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, mercapto, alkylthio, arylthio, cyano, halo, carbonyl, ester,
  • thiocarbonyl isocyanato, thiocyanato, isothiocyanato, nitro, oxo, perhaloalkyl, perfluoroalkyl, phosphate, silyl, sulfmyl, sulfonyl, sulfonamidyl, sulfoxyl, sulfonate, urea, and amino, including mono- and di-substituted amino groups, and protected derivatives thereof.
  • the substituents themselves may be substituted, for example, a cycloalkyl substituent may itself have a halide substituent at one or more of its ring carbons.
  • Sulfanyl refers to groups that include -S-(optionally substituted alkyl), -S -(optionally substituted aryl), -S-(optionally substituted heteroaryl) and -S -(optionally substituted
  • Sulfmyl refers to groups that include -S(0)-H, -S(0)-(optionally substituted alkyl), -S(0)-(optionally substituted amino), -S(0)-(optionally substituted aryl), -S(0)-(optionally substituted heteroaryl) and -S(0)-(optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl).
  • Sulfonyl refers to groups that include -S(0 2 )-H, -S(0 2 )-(optionally substituted alkyl), -S(0 2 )-(optionally substituted amino), -S(0 2 )-(optionally substituted aryl), -S(0 2 )-(optionally substituted heteroaryl), and -S(0 2 )-(optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl).
  • a sulfonamido group is optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described for alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, respectively.
  • a sulfonate group is optionally substituted on R by one or more of the substituents described for alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, respectively.
  • Compounds of the invention also include crystalline and amorphous forms of those compounds, including, for example, polymorphs, pseudopolymorphs, solvates, hydrates, unsolvated polymorphs (including anhydrates), conformational polymorphs, and amorphous forms of the compounds, as well as mixtures thereof.
  • Crystalstalline form and polymorph are intended to include all crystalline and amorphous forms of the compound, including, for example, polymorphs, pseudopolymorphs, solvates, hydrates, unsolvated polymorphs (including anhydrates), conformational polymorphs, and amorphous forms, as well as mixtures thereof, unless a particular crystalline or amorphous form is referred to.
  • Compounds of the invention also include antibodies.
  • the terms “antibody” and its plural form “antibodies” refer to whole immunoglobulins and any antigen-binding fragment ("antigen-binding portion") or single chains thereof.
  • An “antibody” further refers to a glycoprotein comprising at least two heavy (H) chains and two light (L) chains inter-connected by disulfide bonds, or an antigen-binding portion thereof.
  • Each heavy chain is comprised of a heavy chain variable region (abbreviated herein as V H ) and a heavy chain constant region.
  • the heavy chain constant region is comprised of three domains, CHI, CH2 and CH3.
  • Each light chain is comprised of a light chain variable region (abbreviated herein as V L ) and a light chain constant region.
  • the light chain constant region is comprised of one domain, C L .
  • the V H and V L regions of an antibody may be further subdivided into regions of hypervariability, which are referred to as complementarity determining regions (CDR) or hypervariable regions (HVR), and which can be interspersed with regions that are more conserved, termed framework regions (FR).
  • CDR complementarity determining regions
  • HVR hypervariable regions
  • FR framework regions
  • Each V H and V L is composed of three CDRs and four FRs, arranged from amino-terminus to carboxy-terminus in the following order: FR1, CDR1, FR2, CDR2, FR3, CDR3, FR4.
  • variable regions of the heavy and light chains contain a binding domain that interacts with an antigen epitope or epitopes.
  • the constant regions of the antibodies may mediate the binding of the immunoglobulin to host tissues or factors, including various cells of the immune system (e.g., effector cells) and the first component (Clq) of the classical complement system.
  • the terms "monoclonal antibody,” “mAb,” “monoclonal antibody composition,” or their plural forms refer to a preparation of antibody molecules of single molecular composition.
  • a monoclonal antibody composition displays a single binding specificity and affinity for a particular epitope.
  • Monoclonal antibodies specific to CD20 can be made using knowledge and skill in the art of injecting test subjects with CD20 antigen and then isolating hybridomas expressing antibodies having the desired sequence or functional characteristics.
  • DNA encoding the monoclonal antibodies is readily isolated and sequenced using conventional procedures (e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of the monoclonal antibodies).
  • the hybridoma cells serve as a preferred source of such DNA.
  • the DNA may be placed into expression vectors, which are then transfected into host cells such as E. coli cells, simian COS cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulin protein, to obtain the synthesis of monoclonal antibodies in the recombinant host cells. Recombinant production of antibodies will be described in more detail below.
  • antigen-binding portion or "antigen-binding fragment” of an antibody (or simply “antibody portion”), as used herein, refers to one or more fragments of an antibody that retain the ability to specifically bind to an antigen such as CD20. It has been shown that the antigen-binding function of an antibody can be performed by fragments of a full-length antibody.
  • binding fragments encompassed within the term "antigen-binding portion" of an antibody include (i) a Fab fragment, a monovalent fragment consisting of the V L , V H , C L and CHI domains; (ii) a F(ab')2 fragment, a bivalent fragment comprising two Fab fragments linked by a disulfide bridge at the hinge region; (iii) a Fd fragment consisting of the V H and CHI domains; (iv) a Fv fragment consisting of the V L and V H domains of a single arm of an antibody, (v) a domain antibody (dAb) fragment (Ward et al, Nature, 1989, 341, 544-546), which may consist of a V H or a V L domain; and (vi) an isolated complementarity determining region (CDR).
  • a Fab fragment a monovalent fragment consisting of the V L , V H , C L and CHI domains
  • F(ab')2 fragment a bivalent fragment
  • the two domains of the Fv fragment, V L and V H are coded for by separate genes, they can be joined, using recombinant methods, by a synthetic linker that enables them to be made as a single protein chain in which the V L and V H regions pair to form monovalent molecules known as single chain Fv (scFv); see, for example, Bird et al, Science 1988, 242, 423-426; and Huston et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 1988, 85, 5879-5883).
  • scFv chain antibodies are also intended to be encompassed within the terms "antigen-binding portion" or "antigen-binding fragment” of an antibody. These antibody fragments are obtained using conventional techniques known to those with skill in the art, and the fragments are screened for utility in the same manner as are intact antibodies.
  • human antibody is intended to include antibodies having variable regions in which both the framework and CDR regions are derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences. Furthermore, if the antibody contains a constant region, the constant region also is derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences.
  • the human antibodies of the invention may include amino acid residues not encoded by human germline immunoglobulin sequences (e.g., mutations introduced by random or site-specific mutagenesis in vitro or by somatic mutation in vivo).
  • human antibody as used herein, is not intended to include antibodies in which CDR sequences derived from the germline of another mammalian species, such as a mouse, have been grafted onto human framework sequences.
  • human monoclonal antibody refers to antibodies displaying a single binding specificity which have variable regions in which both the framework and CDR regions are derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences.
  • the human monoclonal antibodies are produced by a hybridoma which includes a B cell obtained from a transgenic nonhuman animal, e.g., a transgenic mouse, having a genome comprising a human heavy chain transgene and a light chain transgene fused to an immortalized cell.
  • recombinant human antibody includes all human antibodies that are prepared, expressed, created or isolated by recombinant means, such as (a) antibodies isolated from an animal (e.g., a mouse) that is transgenic or transchromosomal for human immunoglobulin genes or a hybridoma prepared therefrom (described further below), (b) antibodies isolated from a host cell transformed to express the human antibody, e.g., from a transfectoma, (c) antibodies isolated from a recombinant, combinatorial human antibody library, and (d) antibodies prepared, expressed, created or isolated by any other means that involve splicing of human immunoglobulin gene sequences to other DNA sequences.
  • Such recombinant human antibodies have variable regions in which the framework and CDR regions are derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences.
  • such recombinant human antibodies can be subjected to in vitro mutagenesis (or, when an animal transgenic for human Ig sequences is used, in vivo somatic mutagenesis) and thus the amino acid sequences of the V H and V L regions of the recombinant antibodies are sequences that, while derived from and related to human germline V H and V L sequences, may not naturally exist within the human antibody germline repertoire in vivo.
  • isotype refers to the antibody class (e.g., IgM or IgGl) that is encoded by the heavy chain constant region genes.
  • an antibody recognizing an antigen and “an antibody specific for an antigen” are used interchangeably herein with the term “an antibody which binds specifically to an antigen.”
  • human antibody derivatives refers to any modified form of the human antibody, e.g., a conjugate of the antibody and another agent or antibody.
  • conjugate or “immunoconjugate” refers to an antibody, or a fragment thereof, conjugated to a therapeutic moiety, such as a bacterial toxin, a cytotoxic drug or a radionuclide-containing toxin.
  • Toxic moieties can be conjugated to antibodies of the invention using methods available in the art.
  • humanized antibody “humanized antibodies,” and “humanized” are intended to refer to antibodies in which CDR sequences derived from the germline of another mammalian species, such as a mouse, have been grafted onto human framework sequences. Additional framework region modifications may be made within the human framework sequences.
  • Humanized forms of non-human (for example, murine) antibodies are chimeric antibodies that contain minimal sequence derived from non-human immunoglobulin.
  • humanized antibodies are human immunoglobulins (recipient antibody) in which residues from a hypervariable region of the recipient are replaced by residues from a 15 hypervariable region of a non-human species (donor antibody) such as mouse, rat, rabbit or nonhuman primate having the desired specificity, affinity, and capacity.
  • donor antibody such as mouse, rat, rabbit or nonhuman primate having the desired specificity, affinity, and capacity.
  • Fv framework region (FR) residues of the human immunoglobulin are replaced by corresponding non-human residues.
  • humanized antibodies may comprise residues that are not found in the recipient antibody or in the donor antibody. These modifications are made to further refine antibody performance.
  • the humanized antibody will comprise substantially all of at least one, and typically two, variable domains, in which all or substantially all of the hypervariable loops correspond to those of a non-human immunoglobulin and all or substantially all of the FR regions are those of a human immunoglobulin sequence.
  • the humanized antibody optionally also will comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin constant region (Fc), typically that of a human immunoglobulin.
  • Fc immunoglobulin constant region
  • chimeric antibody is intended to refer to antibodies in which the variable region sequences are derived from one species and the constant region sequences are derived from another species, such as an antibody in which the variable region sequences are derived from a mouse antibody and the constant region sequences are derived from a human antibody.
  • a "diabody” is a small antibody fragment with two antigen-binding sites. The fragment comprises a heavy chain variable domain (V H ) connected to a light chain variable domain (V L ) in the same polypeptide chain (V H -V L or V L -V H ).
  • glycosylation refers to a modified derivative of an antibody.
  • aglycoslated antibody lacks glycosylation.
  • Glycosylation can be altered to, for example, increase the affinity of the antibody for antigen.
  • Such carbohydrate modifications can be accomplished by, for example, altering one or more sites of glycosylation within the antibody sequence.
  • one or more amino acid substitutions can be made that result in elimination of one or more variable region framework glycosylation sites to thereby eliminate glycosylation at that site.
  • Aglycosylation may increase the affinity of the antibody for antigen, as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,714,350 and 6,350,861.
  • an antibody can be made that has an altered type of glycosylation, such as a hypofucosylated antibody having reduced amounts of fucosyl residues or an antibody having increased bisecting GlcNac structures.
  • altered glycosylation patterns have been demonstrated to increase the ability of antibodies.
  • carbohydrate modifications can be accomplished by, for example, expressing the antibody in a host cell with altered glycosylation machinery. Cells with altered glycosylation machinery have been described in the art and can be used as host cells in which to express recombinant antibodies of the invention to thereby produce an antibody with altered glycosylation.
  • the cell lines Ms704, Ms705, and Ms709 lack the fucosyltransferase gene, FUT8 (alpha (1,6) fucosyltransferase), such that antibodies expressed in the Ms704, Ms705, and Ms709 cell lines lack fucose on their carbohydrates.
  • the Ms704, Ms705, and Ms709 FUT8-/- cell lines were created by the targeted disruption of the FUT8 gene in CHO/DG44 cells using two replacement vectors (see e.g. U.S. Patent Publication No. 2004/0110704 or Yamane-Ohnuki, et al., Biotechnol. Bioeng., 2004, 87, 614-622).
  • EP 1,176,195 describes a cell line with a functionally disrupted FUT8 gene, which encodes a fucosyl transferase, such that antibodies expressed in such a cell line exhibit hypofucosylation by reducing or eliminating the alpha 1,6 bond-related enzyme, and also describes cell lines which have a low enzyme activity for adding fucose to the N-acetylglucosamine that binds to the Fc region of the antibody or does not have the enzyme activity, for example the rat myeloma cell line YB2/0 (ATCC CRL 1662).
  • WO 99/54342 describes cell lines engineered to express glycoprotein-modifying glycosyl transferases (e.g., beta(l,4)-N-acetylglucosaminyltransferase III (GnTIII)) such that antibodies expressed in the engineered cell lines exhibit increased bisecting GlcNac structures which results in increased ADCC activity of the antibodies (see also Umana, et ah, Nat. Biotech. 1999, 17, 176-180).
  • glycoprotein-modifying glycosyl transferases e.g., beta(l,4)-N-acetylglucosaminyltransferase III (GnTIII)
  • the fucose residues of the antibody may be cleaved off using a fucosidase enzyme.
  • a fucosidase enzyme for example, the fucosidase alpha-L-fucosidase removes fucosyl residues from antibodies as described in Tarentino, et ah, Biochem. 1975, 14, 5516-5523.
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • Pegylation refers to a modified antibody, or a fragment thereof, that typically is reacted with polyethylene glycol (PEG), such as a reactive ester or aldehyde derivative of PEG, under conditions in which one or more PEG groups become attached to the antibody or antibody fragment.
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • Pegylation may, for example, increase the biological (e.g., serum) half life of the antibody.
  • the pegylation is carried out via an acylation reaction or an alkylation reaction with a reactive PEG molecule (or an analogous reactive water-soluble polymer).
  • polyethylene glycol is intended to encompass any of the forms of PEG that have been used to derivatize other proteins, such as mono (Ci-Cio) alkoxy- or aryloxy- poly ethylene glycol or polyethylene glycol-maleimide.
  • the antibody to be pegylated may be an aglycosylated antibody. Methods for pegylation are known in the art and can be applied to the antibodies of the invention. See, for example, European Patent Nos. EP 0154316 and EP
  • an antibody that "specifically binds to human CD20" is intended to refer to an antibody that binds to human CD20 with a K D of 1 x 10 7 M or less, more preferably 5 X 10 8 M or less, more preferably 1 x 10 8 M or less, more preferably 5 X 10 9 M or less.
  • radioisotope-labeled complex refers to both non-covalent and covalent attachment of a radioactive isotope, such as 90 Y, m In, or 131 I, to an antibody.
  • biosimilar means a biological product that is highly similar to a U.S.
  • a similar biological or “biosimilar” medicine is a biological medicine that is similar to another biological medicine that has already been authorized for use by the European
  • Biosimilar is also used synonymously by other national and regional regulatory agencies.
  • Biological products or biological medicines are medicines that are made by or derived from a biological source, such as a bacterium or yeast. They can consist of relatively small molecules such as human insulin or erythropoietin, or complex molecules such as monoclonal antibodies.
  • a biological source such as a bacterium or yeast.
  • They can consist of relatively small molecules such as human insulin or erythropoietin, or complex molecules such as monoclonal antibodies.
  • the reference anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is rituximab
  • an anti-CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to rituximab is a "biosimilar to" rituximab or is a "biosimilar thereof rituximab.
  • the BTK inhibitor is a compound of Formula (I):
  • X is CH, N, O or S
  • Y is C(R 6 ), N, O or S;
  • Z is CH, N or bond
  • A is CH or N
  • Bi is N or C(R 7 );
  • B 2 is N or C(R 8 );
  • B 3 is N or C(R 9 );
  • R 2 is H, (Ci_ 3 )alkyl or (C 3 _ 7 )cycloalkyl;
  • R 3 is H, (Ci_ 6 )alkyl or (C 3 _ 7 )cycloalkyl); or
  • R 2 and R 3 form, together with the N and C atom they are attached to, a (C 3 _ 7 )heterocycloalkyl optionally substituted with one or more fluorine, hydroxyl, (Ci_ 3 )alkyl, (Ci_ 3 )alkoxy or oxo;
  • R 4 is H or (Ci_ 3 )alkyl;
  • R 5 is H, halogen, cyano, (Ci_ 4 )alkyl, (Ci_ 3 )alkoxy, (C 3 _ 6 )cycloalkyl, any alkyl group of which is optionally substituted with one or more halogen; or R 5 is (C 6 -io)aryl or (C 2 _
  • Re is H or (Ci_ 3 )alkyl
  • R 5 and R 6 together may form a (C 3 _ 7 )cycloalkenyl or (C 2 _6)heterocycloalkenyl, each optionally substituted with (Ci_ 3 )alkyl or one or more halogens;
  • R 7 is H, halogen, CF 3 , (Ci_ 3 )alkyl or (Ci_ 3 )alkoxy;
  • Rg is H, halogen, CF 3 , (Ci_ 3 )alkyl or (Ci_ 3 )alkoxy; or
  • R9 is H, halogen, (Ci_ 3 )alkyl or (Ci_ 3 )alkoxy;
  • Rio is H, halogen, (Ci_ 3 )alkyl or (Ci_ 3 )alkoxy;
  • R11 is independently selected from the group consisting of (Ci_ 6 )alkyl, (C 2 _6)alkenyl and (C 2 _ 6)alkynyl, where each alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (Ci_ 4 )alkyl, (C 3 _ 7 )cycloalkyl, [(Ci_4)alkyl]amino, di[(Ci_4)alkyl]amino, (Ci_3)alkoxy, (C 3 _ 7 )cycloalkoxy, (Ce-io)aryl and (C 3 _ 7)heterocycloalkyl; or Rn is (Ci_ 3 )alkyl-C(0)-S-(Ci_ 3 )alkyl; or
  • Rii is (Ci_5)heteroaryl optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen or cyano;
  • Ri 2 and Ri 3 are independently selected from the group consisting of (C 2 _6)alkenyl or (C 2- 6 )alkynyl, both optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (Ci_4)alkyl, (C 3 _ 7 )cycloalkyl, [(Ci_4)alkyl]amino, di[(Ci_4)alkyl]amino, (Ci_ 3 )alkoxy, (C 3 _ 7 )cycloalkoxy, (C 6 _io)aryl and (C 3 _ 7 )heterocycloalkyl; or a (Ci_ 5 )heteroaryl optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen and cyano; and
  • Ri 4 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, (C 2 _6)alkenyl and (C 2- 6 )alkynyl, both optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (Ci_4)alkyl, (C 3 _ 7 )cycloalkyl, (Ci_4)alkylamino, di[(Ci_4)alkyl]amino, (Ci_ 3 )alkoxy, (C 3 _ 7 )cycloalkoxy, (C 6 -io)aryl, (Ci_5)heteroaryl and (C 3 _ 7 )heterocycloalkyl; with the proviso that:
  • X, Y, Z can simultaneously be a heteroatom
  • X, Y can not be O or S
  • B ls B 2 , B 3 , and B 4 are N;
  • (Ci_ 2 )alkyl means an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, being methyl or ethyl,
  • (Ci_ 3 )alkyl means a branched or unbranched alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms, being methyl, ethyl, propyl or isopropyl;
  • (Ci_4)alkyl means a branched or unbranched alkyl group having 1-4 carbon atoms, being methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, sec -butyl and tert-butyl, (Ci_ 3 )alkyl groups being preferred;
  • (Ci_5)alkyl means a branched or unbranched alkyl group having 1-5 carbon atoms, for example methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl and isopentyl, (Ci_4)alkyl groups being preferred.
  • (Ci_ 6 )Alkyl means a branched or unbranched alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, for example methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, tert-butyl, n- pentyl and n-hexyl.
  • (Ci_ 5 )alkyl groups are preferred, (Ci_4)alkyl being most preferred;
  • (Ci_ 2 )alkoxy means an alkoxy group having 1-2 carbon atoms, the alkyl moiety having the same meaning as previously defined;
  • (Ci_3)alkoxy means an alkoxy group having 1-3 carbon atoms, the alkyl moiety having the same meaning as previously defined. (Ci_ 2 )alkoxy groups are preferred;
  • (Ci_4)alkoxy means an alkoxy group having 1-4 carbon atoms, the alkyl moiety having the same meaning as previously defined.
  • (Ci_ 3 )alkoxy groups are preferred, (Ci_ 2 )alkoxy groups being most preferred;
  • (C 2 _4)alkenyl means a branched or unbranched alkenyl group having 2-4 carbon atoms, such as ethenyl, 2-propenyl, isobutenyl or 2-butenyl;
  • (C 2 _ 6 )alkenyl means a branched or unbranched alkenyl group having 2-6 carbon atoms, such as ethenyl, 2-butenyl, and n-pentenyl, (C 2 _4)alkenyl groups being most preferred;
  • (C 2 _4)alkynyl means a branched or unbranched alkynyl group having 2-4 carbon atoms, such as ethynyl, 2-propynyl or 2-butynyl;
  • (C 2 _ 6 )alkynyl means a branched or unbranched alkynyl group having 2-6 carbon atoms, such as ethynyl, propynyl, n-butynyl, n-pentynyl, isopentynyl, isohexynyl or n-hexynyl.
  • (C 2 _4)alkynyl groups are preferred;
  • (C 3 -6)cycloalkyl means a cycloalkyl group having 3-6 carbon atoms, being cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl;
  • (C 3 _ 7 )cycloalkyl means a cycloalkyl group having 3-7 carbon atoms, being cyclopropyl
  • (C 2 _6)heterocycloalkyl means a heterocycloalkyl group having 2-6 carbon atoms, preferably 3-5 carbon atoms, and one or two heteroatoms selected from N, O and/or S, which may be attached via a heteroatom if feasible, or a carbon atom; preferred heteroatoms are N or O; also preferred are piperidine, morpholine, pyrrolidine and piperazine; with the most preferred
  • heterocycloalkyl being pyrrolidine; the heterocycloalkyl group may be attached via a heteroatom if feasible;
  • (C 3 _ 7 )heterocycloalkyl means a heterocycloalkyl group having 3-7 carbon atoms, preferably 3-5 carbon atoms, and one or two heteroatoms selected from N, O and/or S. Preferred
  • heteroatoms are N or O; preferred (C 3 _ 7 ) heterocycloalkyl groups are azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, homopiperidinyl or morpholinyl; more preferred (C 3 _ 7 )heterocycloalkyl groups are piperidine, morpholine and pyrrolidine; and the heterocycloalkyl group may be attached via a heteroatom if feasible;
  • (C 3 _7)cycloalkoxy means a cycloalkyl group having 3-7 carbon atoms, with the same meaning as previously defined, attached via a ring carbon atom to an exocyclic oxygen atom;
  • (C 6 -io)aryl means an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6-10 carbon atoms, such as phenyl, naphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl or indenyl; the preferred (C 6 -io)aryl group is phenyl;
  • (Ci_5)heteroaryl means a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic group having 1-5 carbon atoms and 1-4 heteroatoms selected from N, O and/or S; the (Ci_s)heteroaryl may optionally be substituted; preferred (C jheteroaryl groups are tetrazolyl, imidazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, triazinyl, thienyl or furyl, a more preferred (Ci_5)heteroaryl is pyrimidyl;
  • (Ci_9)heteroaryl means a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic group having 1-9 carbon atoms and 1-4 heteroatoms selected from N, O and/or S; the (Ci_9)heteroaryl may optionally be substituted; preferred (Ci_9)heteroaryl groups are quinoline, isoquinoline and indole;
  • [(Ci_4)alkyl]amino means an amino group, monosubstituted with an alkyl group containing 1-4 carbon atoms having the same meaning as previously defined; preferred [(Ci_4)alkyl]amino group is methylamino;
  • di[(Ci_4)alkyl]amino means an amino group, disubstituted with alkyl group(s), each containing 1- 4 carbon atoms and having the same meaning as previously defined; preferred di[(Ci_ 4)alkyl] amino group is dimethylamino;
  • halogen means fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine
  • (Ci_3)alkyl-C(0)-S-(Ci_3)alkyl means an alkyl-carbonyl-thio-alkyl group, each of the alkyl
  • (C 3 _7)cycloalkenyl means a cycloalkenyl group having 3-7 carbon atoms, preferably 5-7 carbon atoms; preferred (C3_7)cycloalkenyl groups are cyclopentenyl or cyclohexenyl; cyclohexenyl groups are most preferred;
  • (C2_6)heterocycloalkenyl means a heterocycloalkenyl group having 2-6 carbon atoms, preferably 3-5 carbon atoms; and 1 heteroatom selected from N, O and/or S; preferred (C 2- 6)heterocycloalkenyl groups are oxycyclohexenyl and azacyclohexenyl group.
  • the attachment point is at the last group.
  • substituents are optionally substituted, this also includes the alkyl moiety of an alkoxy group.
  • a circle in a ring of Formula (I) indicates that the ring is aromatic.
  • the nitrogen if present in X or Y, may carry a hydrogen.
  • substituted means that one or more hydrogens on the designated atom/atoms is/are replaced with a selection from the indicated group, provided that the designated atom's normal valency under the existing circumstances is not exceeded, and that the substitution results in a stable compound. Combinations of substituents and/or variables are permissible only if such combinations result in stable compounds.
  • Stable compound or “stable structure” is defined as a compound or structure that is sufficiently robust to survive isolation to a useful degree of purity from a reaction mixture, and formulation into a drug product containing an efficacious active pharmaceutical ingredient.
  • Bi is C(R 7 ); B 2 is C(R 8 ); B 3 is C(R 9 ); B 4 is C(Rio); R 7 , R 9 , and R 10 are each H; and R 8 is hydrogen or methyl.
  • the ring containing X, Y and Z is selected from the group consisting of pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazyl, triazinyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl and isoxazolyl.
  • the ring containing X, Y and Z is selected from the group consisting of pyridyl, pyrimidyl and pyridazyl.
  • the ring containing X, Y and Z is selected from the group consisting of pyridyl and pyrimidyl.
  • the ring containing X, Y and Z is pyridyl.
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, fluorine, methyl, methoxy and trifluoromethyl.
  • R5 is hydrogen
  • R 2 and R 3 together form a heterocycloalkyl ring selected from the group consisting of azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, homopiperidinyl and morpholinyl, optionally substituted with one or more of fluoro, hydroxyl, (Ci_3)alkyl and (Ci_ 3 )alkoxy.
  • R 2 and R 3 together form a heterocycloalkyl ring selected from the group consisting of azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl and piperidinyl.
  • R 2 and R 3 together form a pyrrolidinyl ring.
  • Ri is independently selected from the group consisting of (Ci_ 6 )alkyl, (C 2 _6)alkenyl or (C 2 _ 6 )alkynyl, each optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (Ci_ 4 )alkyl, (C 3 _ 7 )cycloalkyl, [(Ci_ 4 )alkyl]amino, di[(Ci_ 4 )alkyl] amino, (Ci_ 3 )alkoxy, (C 3 _ 7 )cycloalkoxy, (C 6 -io)aryl and (C 3 _ 7 )heterocycloalkyl.
  • B ls B 2 , B 3 and B 4 are CH; X is N; Y and Z are CH; R is CH 3 ; A is N; R 2 , R 3 and R 4 are H; and Ri is CO-CH 3 .
  • Bi, B 2 , B 3 and B 4 are CH; X and Y are N; Z is CH; R is CH 3 ; A is N; R 2 , R 3 and R 4 are H; and Ri is CO-CH 3 .
  • B ls B 2 , B 3 and B 4 are CH; X and Y are N; Z is CH; R is CH 3 ; A is CH; R 2 and R 3 together form a piperidinyl ring; R4 is H; and Ri is CO-ethenyl.
  • B ls B 2 , B 3 and B 4 are CH; X, Y and Z are CH; R5 is H; A is CH; R 2 and R 3 together form a pyrrolidinyl ring; R4 is H; and Ri is CO-propynyl.
  • B ls B 2 , B 3 and B 4 are CH; X, Y and Z are CH; R 5 is CH 3 ; A is CH; R 2 and R 3 together form a piperidinyl ring; R 4 is H; and Ri is CO-propynyl.
  • B b B 2 , B 3 and B 4 are CH; X and Y are N; Z is CH; R is H; A is CH; R 2 and R 3 together form a morpholinyl ring; R4 is H; and Ri is CO-ethenyl.
  • B b B 2 , B 3 and B 4 are CH; X and Y are N; Z is CH; R is CH 3 ; A is CH; R 2 and R 3 together form a morpholinyl ring; R 4 is H; and Ri is CO-propynyl.
  • the BTK inhibitor is a compound of Formula (II):
  • the compound of Formula (II) is also known as (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide.
  • the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l -(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrazin- 1 -yl)-N- (pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof.
  • the preparation of this compound is described at Example 6 of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. US 2014/0155385 Al, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Briefly, the preparation of Formula (II) can be accomplished by the following procedure.
  • the invention provides pharmaceutical compositions for treating lymphoma and leukemia, including CLL and SLL.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are typically formulated to provide a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor, including the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, prodrug, solvate, hydrate or derivative thereof.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions contain a pharmaceutically acceptable salt and/or coordination complex thereof, and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients, carriers, including inert solid diluents and fillers, diluents, including sterile aqueous solution and various organic solvents, permeation enhancers, solubilizers and adjuvants.
  • other active ingredients in addition to a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) may be mixed into a preparation or both components may be formulated into separate preparations for use in combination separately or at the same time.
  • the concentration of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) provided in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention is less than, for example, 100%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 19%, 18%, 17%, 16%, 15%, 14%, 13%, 12%, 11%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, 0.1%, 0.09%, 0.08%, 0.07%, 0.06%, 0.05%, 0.04%, 0.03%, 0.02%, 0.01%, 0.009%, 0.008%, 0.007%, 0.006%, 0.005%, 0.004%, 0.003%, 0.002%, 0.001%, 0.0009%, 0.0008%, 0.0007%, 0.0006%, 0.0005%, 0.0004%, 0.0003%, 0.0002% or 0.0001% w/w, w/v or v/v.
  • the concentration of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) provided in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention is independently greater than 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 19.75%, 19.50%, 19.25% 19%, 18.75%, 18.50%, 18.25% 18%, 17.75%, 17.50%, 17.25% 17%, 16.75%, 16.50%, 16.25% 16%, 15.75%, 15.50%, 15.25% 15%, 14.75%, 14.50%, 14.25% 14%, 13.75%, 13.50%, 13.25% 13%, 12.75%, 12.50%, 12.25% 12%, 11.75%, 11.50%, 11.25% 11%, 10.75%, 10.50%, 10.25% 10%, 9.75%, 9.50%, 9.25% 9%, 8.75%, 8.50%, 8.25% 8%, 7.75%, 7.50%, 7.25% 7%, 6.75%, 6.50%, 6.25% 6%, 5.75%
  • the concentration of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is independently in the range from approximately 0.0001% to approximately 50%, approximately 0.001% to approximately 40%, approximately 0.01% to approximately 30%, approximately 0.02% to approximately 29%, approximately 0.03% to approximately 28%, approximately 0.04% to approximately 27%, approximately 0.05% to approximately 26%, approximately 0.06% to approximately 25%, approximately 0.07% to approximately 24%, approximately 0.08% to approximately 23%, approximately 0.09% to approximately 22%, approximately 0.1% to approximately 21%, approximately 0.2% to approximately 20%, approximately 0.3% to approximately 19%, approximately 0.4% to approximately 18%, approximately 0.5% to approximately 17%, approximately 0.6% to approximately 16%, approximately 0.7% to approximately 15%, approximately 0.8% to approximately 14%, approximately 0.9% to approximately 12% or approximately 1% to approximately 10% w/w, w/v or v/v.
  • the concentration of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is independently in the range from approximately 0.001% to approximately 10%, approximately 0.01% to approximately 5%, approximately 0.02% to approximately 4.5%, approximately 0.03% to approximately 4%, approximately 0.04% to approximately 3.5%, approximately 0.05% to approximately 3%, approximately 0.06% to approximately 2.5%, approximately 0.07% to approximately 2%, approximately 0.08% to approximately 1.5%, approximately 0.09% to approximately 1%, approximately 0.1% to approximately 0.9% w/w, w/v or v/v.
  • the amount of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is independently equal to or less than 10 g, 9.5 g, 9.0 g, 8.5 g, 8.0 g, 7.5 g, 7.0 g, 6.5 g, 6.0 g, 5.5 g, 5.0 g, 4.5 g, 4.0 g, 3.5 g, 3.0 g, 2.5 g, 2.0 g, 1.5 g, 1.0 g, 0.95 g, 0.9 g, 0.85 g, 0.8 g, 0.75 g, 0.7 g, 0.65 g, 0.6 g, 0.55 g, 0.5 g, 0.45 g, 0.4 g, 0.35 g, 0.3 g, 0.25 g, 0.2 g, 0.15 g, 0.1 g, 0.09 g, 0.08 g, 0.07 g, 0.06 g, 0.05 g, 0.04 g, 0.03 g, 0.02 g
  • the amount of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is independently more than 0.0001 g, 0.0002 g, 0.0003 g, 0.0004 g, 0.0005 g, 0.0006 g, 0.0007 g, 0.0008 g, 0.0009 g, 0.001 g, 0.0015 g, 0.002 g, 0.0025 g, 0.003 g, 0.0035 g, 0.004 g, 0.0045 g, 0.005 g, 0.0055 g, 0.006 g, 0.0065 g, 0.007 g, 0.0075 g, 0.008 g, 0.0085 g, 0.009 g, 0.0095 g, 0.01 g, 0.015 g, 0.02 g, 0.025 g, 0.03 g, 0.035 g, 0.04 g, 0.045 g, 0.05 g, 0.055 g, 0.06 g,
  • the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) are effective over a wide dosage range.
  • dosages independently ranging from 0.01 to 1000 mg, from 0.5 to 100 mg, from 1 to 50 mg per day, and from 5 to 40 mg per day are examples of dosages that may be used.
  • the exact dosage will depend upon the route of administration, the form in which the compound is administered, the gender and age of the subject to be treated, the body weight of the subject to be treated, and the preference and experience of the attending physician.
  • compositions for Oral Administration are provided.
  • the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for oral administration containing a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II), and a pharmaceutical excipient suitable for oral administration.
  • the invention provides a solid pharmaceutical composition for oral administration containing: (i) an effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II), in combination and (ii) a pharmaceutical excipient suitable for oral administration.
  • the composition further contains (iii) an effective amount of at least one additional active ingredient.
  • the pharmaceutical composition may be a liquid pharmaceutical composition suitable for oral consumption.
  • compositions of the invention suitable for oral administration can be presented as discrete dosage forms, such as capsules, cachets, or tablets, or liquids or aerosol sprays each containing a predetermined amount of an active ingredient as a powder or in granules, a solution, or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid, an oil-in-water emulsion, or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion.
  • dosage forms can be prepared by any of the methods of pharmacy, but all methods include the step of bringing the active ingredient(s) into association with the carrier, which constitutes one or more necessary ingredients.
  • compositions are prepared by uniformly and intimately admixing the active ingredient(s) with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product into the desired presentation.
  • a tablet can be prepared by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients.
  • Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as powder or granules, optionally mixed with an excipient such as, but not limited to, a binder, a lubricant, an inert diluent, and/or a surface active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • the invention further encompasses anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms since water can facilitate the degradation of some compounds.
  • water may be added (e.g., 5%) in the pharmaceutical arts as a means of simulating long-term storage in order to determine characteristics such as shelf-life or the stability of formulations over time.
  • Anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention can be prepared using anhydrous or low moisture containing ingredients and low moisture or low humidity conditions.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention which contain lactose can be made anhydrous if substantial contact with moisture and/or humidity during manufacturing, packaging, and/or storage is expected.
  • An anhydrous pharmaceutical composition may be prepared and stored such that its anhydrous nature is maintained.
  • anhydrous compositions may be packaged using materials known to prevent exposure to water such that they can be included in suitable formulary kits.
  • suitable packaging include, but are not limited to, hermetically sealed foils, plastic or the like, unit dose containers, blister packs, and strip packs.
  • the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) can be combined in an intimate admixture with a pharmaceutical carrier according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques.
  • the carrier can take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration.
  • any of the usual pharmaceutical media can be employed as carriers, such as, for example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, coloring agents, and the like in the case of oral liquid preparations (such as suspensions, solutions, and elixirs) or aerosols; or carriers such as starches, sugars, micro-crystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, and disintegrating agents can be used in the case of oral solid preparations, in some embodiments without employing the use of lactose.
  • suitable carriers include powders, capsules, and tablets, with the solid oral preparations. If desired, tablets can be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques.
  • Binders suitable for use in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, corn starch, potato starch, or other starches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), polyvinyl pyrrolidone, methyl cellulose, pre- gelatinized starch, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, and mixtures thereof.
  • natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), polyvinyl pyrrol
  • suitable fillers for use in the pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, talc, calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), microcrystalline cellulose, powdered cellulose, dextrates, kaolin, mannitol, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre-gelatinized starch, and mixtures thereof.
  • Disintegrants may be used in the compositions of the invention to provide tablets that disintegrate when exposed to an aqueous environment. Too much of a disintegrant may produce tablets which disintegrate in the bottle. Too little may be insufficient for disintegration to occur, thus altering the rate and extent of release of the active ingredients from the dosage form. Thus, a sufficient amount of disintegrant that is neither too little nor too much to detrimentally alter the release of the active ingredient(s) may be used to form the dosage forms of the compounds disclosed herein. The amount of disintegrant used may vary based upon the type of formulation and mode of administration, and may be readily discernible to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Disintegrants that can be used to form pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, agar-agar, alginic acid, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato or tapioca starch, other starches, pre-gelatinized starch, other starches, clays, other algins, other celluloses, gums or mixtures thereof.
  • Lubricants which can be used to form pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil, and soybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethylaureate, agar, or mixtures thereof.
  • Additional lubricants include, for example, a syloid silica gel, a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica, or mixtures thereof.
  • a lubricant can optionally be added, in an amount of less than about 1 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition.
  • the essential active ingredient therein may be combined with various sweetening or flavoring agents, coloring matter or dyes and, if so desired, emulsifying and/or suspending agents, together with such diluents as water, ethanol, propylene glycol, glycerin and various combinations thereof.
  • the tablets can be uncoated or coated by known techniques to delay disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period.
  • a time delay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate can be employed.
  • Formulations for oral use can also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent, for example, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin, or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium, for example, peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil.
  • Surfactants which can be used to form pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, hydrophilic surfactants, lipophilic surfactants, and mixtures thereof. That is, a mixture of hydrophilic surfactants may be employed, a mixture of lipophilic surfactants may be employed, or a mixture of at least one hydrophilic surfactant and at least one lipophilic surfactant may be employed.
  • a suitable hydrophilic surfactant may generally have an HLB value of at least 10, while suitable lipophilic surfactants may generally have an HLB value of or less than about 10.
  • An empirical parameter used to characterize the relative hydrophilicity and hydrophobicity of non- ionic amphiphilic compounds is the hydrophilic-lipophilic balance ("HLB" value).
  • HLB hydrophilic-lipophilic balance
  • Surfactants with lower HLB values are more lipophilic or hydrophobic, and have greater solubility in oils, while surfactants with higher HLB values are more hydrophilic, and have greater solubility in aqueous solutions.
  • Hydrophilic surfactants are generally considered to be those compounds having an HLB value greater than about 10, as well as anionic, cationic, or zwitterionic compounds for which the HLB scale is not generally applicable.
  • lipophilic (i.e., hydrophobic) surfactants are compounds having an HLB value equal to or less than about 10.
  • HLB value of a surfactant is merely a rough guide generally used to enable formulation of industrial, pharmaceutical and cosmetic emulsions.
  • Hydrophilic surfactants may be either ionic or non-ionic. Suitable ionic surfactants include, but are not limited to, alkylammonium salts; fusidic acid salts; fatty acid derivatives of amino acids, oligopeptides, and polypeptides; glyceride derivatives of amino acids,
  • oligopeptides, and polypeptides lecithins and hydrogenated lecithins; lysolecithins and hydrogenated lysolecithins; phospholipids and derivatives thereof; lysophospholipids and derivatives thereof; carnitine fatty acid ester salts; salts of alkylsulfates; fatty acid salts; sodium docusate; acylactylates; mono- and di-acetylated tartaric acid esters of mono- and di-glycerides; succinylated mono- and di-glycerides; citric acid esters of mono- and di-glycerides; and mixtures thereof.
  • ionic surfactants include, by way of example:
  • Ionic surfactants may be the ionized forms of lecithin, lysolecithin,
  • phosphatidylcholine phosphatidylethanolamine
  • phosphatidylglycerol phosphatidic acid
  • phosphatidylserine lysophosphatidylcholine
  • lysophosphatidylethanolamine phosphatidylethanolamine
  • lysophosphatidylglycerol lysophosphatidic acid, lysophosphatidylserine, PEG- phosphatidylethanolamine, PVP-phosphatidylethanolamine, lactylic esters of fatty acids, stearoyl-2-lactylate, stearoyl lactylate, succinylated monoglycerides, mono/diacetylated tartaric acid esters of mono/diglycerides, citric acid esters of mono/diglycerides, cholylsarcosine, caproate, caprylate, caprate, laurate, myristate, palmitate, oleate, ricinoleate, linoleate, linolenate, stearate, lauryl sulfate, teracecyl sulfate, docusate, lauroyl carnitines, palmitoyl carnitines, myristoyl carn
  • Hydrophilic non-ionic surfactants may include, but not limited to, alkylglucosides; alkylmaltosides; alkylthioglucosides; lauryl macrogolglycerides; polyoxyalkylene alkyl ethers such as polyethylene glycol alkyl ethers; polyoxyalkylene alkylphenols such as polyethylene glycol alkyl phenols; polyoxyalkylene alkyl phenol fatty acid esters such as polyethylene glycol fatty acids monoesters and polyethylene glycol fatty acids diesters; polyethylene glycol glycerol fatty acid esters; polyglycerol fatty acid esters; polyoxyalkylene sorbitan fatty acid esters such as polyethylene glycol sorbitan fatty acid esters; hydrophilic transesterification products of a polyol with at least one member of the group consisting of glycerides, vegetable oils, hydrogenated vegetable oils, fatty acids, and sterols; polyoxyethylene sterol
  • hydrophilic-non-ionic surfactants include, without limitation, PEG- 10 laurate, PEG- 12 laurate, PEG-20 laurate, PEG-32 laurate, PEG-32 dilaurate, PEG- 12 oleate, PEG- 15 oleate, PEG-20 oleate, PEG-20 dioleate, PEG-32 oleate, PEG-200 oleate, PEG-400 oleate, PEG- 15 stearate, PEG-32 distearate, PEG-40 stearate, PEG- 100 stearate, PEG-20 dilaurate, PEG-25 glyceryl trioleate, PEG-32 dioleate, PEG-20 glyceryl laurate, PEG-30 glyceryl laurate, PEG-20 glyceryl stearate, PEG-20 glyceryl oleate, PEG-30 glyceryl oleate, PEG-30 glyce
  • caprate/caprylate glycerides polyglyceryl-10 laurate, PEG-30 cholesterol, PEG-25 phyto sterol, PEG-30 soya sterol, PEG-20 trioleate, PEG-40 sorbitan oleate, PEG-80 sorbitan laurate, polysorbate 20, polysorbate 80, POE-9 lauryl ether, POE-23 lauryl ether, POE-10 oleyl ether, POE-20 oleyl ether, POE-20 stearyl ether, tocopheryl PEG- 100 succinate, PEG-24 cholesterol, polyglyceryl-lOoleate, Tween 40, Tween 60, sucrose monostearate, sucrose monolaurate, sucrose monopalmitate, PEG 10-100 nonyl phenol series, PEG 15-100 octyl phenol series, and poloxamers.
  • Suitable lipophilic surfactants include, by way of example only: fatty alcohols; glycerol fatty acid esters; acetylated glycerol fatty acid esters; lower alcohol fatty acids esters; propylene glycol fatty acid esters; sorbitan fatty acid esters; polyethylene glycol sorbitan fatty acid esters; sterols and sterol derivatives; polyoxyethylated sterols and sterol derivatives; polyethylene glycol alkyl ethers; sugar esters; sugar ethers; lactic acid derivatives of mono- and di-glycerides;
  • hydrophobic transesterification products of a polyol with at least one member of the group consisting of glycerides, vegetable oils, hydrogenated vegetable oils, fatty acids and sterols; oil- soluble vitamins/vitamin derivatives; and mixtures thereof.
  • preferred lipophilic surfactants include glycerol fatty acid esters, propylene glycol fatty acid esters, and mixtures thereof, or are hydrophobic transesterification products of a polyol with at least one member of the group consisting of vegetable oils, hydrogenated vegetable oils, and triglycerides.
  • the composition may include a solubilizer to ensure good
  • solubilization and/or dissolution of the compound of the present invention and to minimize precipitation of the compound of the present invention. This can be especially important for compositions for non-oral use, such as for compositions for injection.
  • a solubilizer may also be added to increase the solubility of the hydrophilic drug and/or other components, such as surfactants, or to maintain the composition as a stable or homogeneous solution or dispersion.
  • solubilizers include, but are not limited to, the following: alcohols and polyols, such as ethanol, isopropanol, butanol, benzyl alcohol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butanediols and isomers thereof, glycerol, pentaerythritol, sorbitol, mannitol, transcutol, dimethyl isosorbide, polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, polyvinylalcohol,
  • alcohols and polyols such as ethanol, isopropanol, butanol, benzyl alcohol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butanediols and isomers thereof, glycerol, pentaerythritol, sorbitol, mannitol, transcutol, dimethyl isosorbide, polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, polyvinylalcohol,
  • solubilizers may also be used. Examples include, but not limited to, triacetin, triethylcitrate, ethyl oleate, ethyl caprylate, dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, N-hydroxyethylpyrrolidone, polyvinylpyrrolidone, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose,
  • hydroxypropyl cyclodextrins ethanol, polyethylene glycol 200-100, glycofurol, transcutol, propylene glycol, and dimethyl isosorbide.
  • Particularly preferred solubilizers include sorbitol, glycerol, triacetin, ethyl alcohol, PEG-400, glycofurol and propylene glycol.
  • the amount of solubilizer that can be included is not particularly limited.
  • the amount of a given solubilizer may be limited to a bioacceptable amount, which may be readily determined by one of skill in the art.
  • the solubilizer can be in a weight ratio of 10%, 25%, 50%>, 100%, or up to about 200% by weight, based on the combined weight of the drug, and other excipients.
  • the composition can further include one or more pharmaceutically acceptable additives and excipients.
  • additives and excipients include, without limitation, detackifiers, anti- foaming agents, buffering agents, polymers, antioxidants, preservatives, chelating agents, viscomodulators, tonicifiers, flavorants, colorants, odorants, opacifiers, suspending agents, binders, fillers, plasticizers, lubricants, and mixtures thereof.
  • an acid or a base may be incorporated into the composition to facilitate processing, to enhance stability, or for other reasons.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable bases include amino acids, amino acid esters, ammonium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium hydrogen carbonate, aluminum hydroxide, calcium carbonate, magnesium hydroxide, magnesium aluminum silicate, synthetic aluminum silicate, synthetic hydrocalcite, magnesium aluminum hydroxide, diisopropylethylamine, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, triethanolamine, triethylamine, triisopropanolamine, trimethylamine, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane (TRIS) and the like.
  • bases that are salts of a pharmaceutically acceptable acid, such as acetic acid, acrylic acid, adipic acid, alginic acid, alkanesulfonic acid, amino acids, ascorbic acid, benzoic acid, boric acid, butyric acid, carbonic acid, citric acid, fatty acids, formic acid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, hydroquinosulfonic acid, isoascorbic acid, lactic acid, maleic acid, oxalic acid, para-bromophenylsulfonic acid, propionic acid, /?-toluenesulfonic acid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, succinic acid, tannic acid, tartaric acid, thioglycolic acid, toluenesulfonic acid, uric acid, and the like.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable acid such as acetic acid, acrylic acid, adipic acid, alginic acid, alkanesulfonic acid, amino
  • Salts of polyprotic acids such as sodium phosphate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, and sodium dihydrogen phosphate can also be used.
  • the cation can be any convenient and pharmaceutically acceptable cation, such as ammonium, alkali metals and alkaline earth metals. Examples may include, but are not limited to, sodium, potassium, lithium, magnesium, calcium and ammonium.
  • Suitable acids are pharmaceutically acceptable organic or inorganic acids.
  • suitable inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydriodic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, boric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
  • suitable organic acids include acetic acid, acrylic acid, adipic acid, alginic acid, alkanesulfonic acids, amino acids, ascorbic acid, benzoic acid, boric acid, butyric acid, carbonic acid, citric acid, fatty acids, formic acid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, hydroquinosulfonic acid, isoascorbic acid, lactic acid, maleic acid, methanesulfonic acid, oxalic acid, para-bromophenylsulfonic acid, propionic acid, p- toluenesulfonic acid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, succinic acid, tannic acid, tartaric acid, thioglycolic acid, toluenesulfonic acid and uric acid.
  • the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for injection containing a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II), and a pharmaceutical excipient suitable for injection.
  • a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II)
  • a pharmaceutical excipient suitable for injection a pharmaceutical excipient suitable for injection.
  • Components and amounts of agents in the compositions are as described herein.
  • Aqueous solutions in saline are also conventionally used for injection.
  • Ethanol, glycerol, propylene glycol and liquid polyethylene glycol (and suitable mixtures thereof), cyclodextrin derivatives, and vegetable oils may also be employed.
  • the proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating, such as lecithin, for the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants.
  • the prevention of the action of microorganisms can be brought about by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid and thimerosal.
  • Sterile injectable solutions are prepared by incorporating a a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) in the required amounts in the appropriate solvent with various other ingredients as enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization.
  • dispersions are prepared by incorporating the various sterilized active ingredients into a sterile vehicle which contains the basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
  • certain desirable methods of preparation are vacuum-drying and freeze-drying techniques which yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for transdermal delivery containing the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and a pharmaceutical excipient suitable for transdermal delivery.
  • compositions of the present invention can be formulated into preparations in solid, semi-solid, or liquid forms suitable for local or topical administration, such as gels, water soluble jellies, creams, lotions, suspensions, foams, powders, slurries, ointments, solutions, oils, pastes, suppositories, sprays, emulsions, saline solutions, dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO)-based solutions.
  • DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
  • carriers with higher densities are capable of providing an area with a prolonged exposure to the active ingredients.
  • a solution formulation may provide more immediate exposure of the active ingredient to the chosen area.
  • compositions also may comprise suitable solid or gel phase carriers or excipients, which are compounds that allow increased penetration of, or assist in the delivery of, therapeutic molecules across the stratum corneum permeability barrier of the skin.
  • suitable solid or gel phase carriers or excipients which are compounds that allow increased penetration of, or assist in the delivery of, therapeutic molecules across the stratum corneum permeability barrier of the skin.
  • penetration-enhancing molecules known to those trained in the art of topical formulation.
  • humectants e.g., urea
  • glycols e.g., propylene glycol
  • alcohols e.g., ethanol
  • fatty acids e.g., oleic acid
  • surfactants e.g., isopropyl myristate and sodium lauryl sulfate
  • pyrrolidones e.g., isopropyl myristate and sodium lauryl sulfate
  • pyrrolidones e.glycerol monolaurate, sulfoxides, terpenes (e.g., menthol)
  • amines amides, alkanes, alkanols, water, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars, starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, and polymers such as polyethylene glycols.
  • transdermal delivery devices Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) in controlled amounts, either with or without another active pharmaceutical ingredient.
  • transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,023,252; 4,992,445 and 5,001 , 139. Such patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of
  • compositions may also be prepared from compositions described herein and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients suitable for sublingual, buccal, rectal, intraosseous, intraocular, intranasal, epidural, or intraspinal administration. Preparations for such pharmaceutical compositions are well-known in the art. See, e.g., Anderson, et al. eds.,
  • Administration of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) or pharmaceutical composition of these compounds can be effected by any method that enables delivery of the compounds to the site of action. These methods include oral routes, intraduodenal routes, parenteral injection (including intravenous, intraarterial, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravascular, intraperitoneal or infusion), topical ⁇ e.g., transdermal application), rectal administration, via local delivery by catheter or stent or through inhalation.
  • the combination of compounds can also be administered intraadiposally or intrathecally.
  • Exemplary parenteral administration forms include solutions or suspensions of active compound in sterile aqueous solutions, for example, aqueous propylene glycol or dextrose solutions. Such dosage forms can be suitably buffered, if desired.
  • kits include the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II), either alone or in combination in suitable packaging, and written material that can include instructions for use, discussion of clinical studies and listing of side effects.
  • kits may also include information, such as scientific literature references, package insert materials, clinical trial results, and/or summaries of these and the like, which indicate or establish the activities and/or advantages of the composition, and/or which describe dosing, administration, side effects, drug interactions, or other information useful to the health care provider. Such information may be based on the results of various studies, for example, studies using experimental animals involving in vivo models and studies based on human clinical trials.
  • the kit may further contain another active pharmaceutical ingredient.
  • kits described herein can be provided, marketed and/or promoted to health providers, including physicians, nurses, pharmacists, formulary officials, and the like. Kits may also, in selected embodiments, be marketed directly to the consumer.
  • the invention provides a kit comprising a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) for use in the treatment of CLL or SLL, hematological malignancies, or any of the other cancers described herein.
  • BTK inhibitors administered will be dependent on the mammal being treated, the severity of the disorder or condition, the rate of administration, the disposition of the compounds and the discretion of the prescribing physician.
  • an effective dosage is in the range of about 0.001 to about 100 mg per kg body weight per day, such as about 1 to about 35 mg/kg/day, in single or divided doses. For a 70 kg human, this would amount to about 0.05 to 7 g/day, such as about 0.05 to about 2.5 g/day.
  • dosage levels below the lower limit of the aforesaid range may be more than adequate, while in other cases still larger doses may be employed without causing any harmful side effect - e.g., by dividing such larger doses into several small doses for administration throughout the day.
  • the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered in a single dose.
  • such administration will be by injection - e.g., intravenous injection, in order to introduce the agents quickly.
  • other routes may be used as appropriate.
  • a single dose of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) may also be used for treatment of an acute condition.
  • the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered in multiple doses. Dosing may be once, twice, three times, four times, five times, six times, or more than six times per day. Dosing may be once a month, once every two weeks, once a week, or once every other day. In other embodiments, a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered about once per day to about 6 times per day.
  • a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered once daily, while in other embodiments a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered twice daily, and in other embodiments a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered three times daily. [00233] Administration of the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) may continue as long as necessary. In some embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered for more than 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 14, or 28 days. In some embodiments, the the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered for less than 28, 14, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 day.
  • the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered chronically on an ongoing basis - e.g., for the treatment of chronic effects.
  • administration of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) continues for less than about 7 days.
  • the administration continues for more than about 6, 10, 14, 28 days, two months, six months, or one year.
  • continuous dosing is achieved and maintained as long as necessary.
  • an effective dosage of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is in the range of about 1 mg to about 500 mg, about 10 mg to about 300 mg, about 20 mg to about 250 mg, about 25 mg to about 200 mg, about 10 mg to about 200 mg, about 20 mg to about 150 mg, about 30 mg to about 120 mg, about 10 mg to about 90 mg, about 20 mg to about 80 mg, about 30 mg to about 70 mg, about 40 mg to about 60 mg, about 45 mg to about 55 mg, about 48 mg to about 52 mg, about 50 mg to about 150 mg, about 60 mg to about 140 mg, about 70 mg to about 130 mg, about 80 mg to about 120 mg, about 90 mg to about 110 mg, about 95 mg to about 105 mg, about 150 mg to about 250 mg, about 160 mg to about 240 mg, about 170 mg to about 230 mg, about 180 mg to about 220 mg, about 190 mg to about 210 mg, about 195 mg to about 205 mg, or about 198 to about 202 mg.
  • an effective dosage of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is about 25 mg, about 50 mg, about 75 mg, about 100 mg, about 125 mg, about 150 mg, about 175 mg, about 200 mg, about 225 mg, about 250 mg, about 275 mg, about 300 mg, about 325 mg, about 350 mg, about 375 mg, about 400 mg, about 425 mg, about 450 mg, about 475 mg, or about 500 mg.
  • an effective dosage of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is 25 mg, 50 mg, 75 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg, 175 mg, 200 mg, 225 mg, 250 mg, 275 mg, 300 mg, 325 mg, 350 mg, 375 mg, 400 mg, 425 mg, 450 mg, 475 mg, or 500 mg.
  • an effective dosage of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is in the range of about 0.01 mg/kg to about 4.3 mg/kg, about 0.15 mg/kg to about 3.6 mg/kg, about 0.3 mg/kg to about 3.2 mg/kg, about 0.35 mg/kg to about 2.85 mg/kg, about 0.15 mg/kg to about 2.85 mg/kg, about 0.3 mg to about 2.15 mg/kg, about 0.45 mg/kg to about 1.7 mg/kg, about 0.15 mg/kg to about 1.3 mg/kg, about 0.3 mg/kg to about 1.15 mg/kg, about 0.45 mg/kg to about 1 mg/kg, about 0.55 mg/kg to about 0.85 mg/kg, about 0.65 mg/kg to about 0.8 mg/kg, about 0.7 mg/kg to about 0.75 mg/kg, about 0.7 mg/kg to about 2.15 mg/kg, about 0.85 mg/kg to about 2 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about 1.85 mg/kg, about 1.
  • an effective dosage of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is about 0.35 mg/kg, about 0.7 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg, about 1.4 mg/kg, about 1.8 mg/kg, about 2.1 mg/kg, about 2.5 mg/kg, about 2.85 mg/kg, about 3.2 mg/kg, or about 3.6 mg/kg.
  • a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is adminstered at a dosage of 10 to 400 mg BID, including a dosage of 25 mg, 50 mg, 75 mg, 100 mg, 150 mg, 175 mg, 200 mg, 225 mg, 250 mg, 275 mg, 300 mg, 325 mg, 350 mg, 375 mg, and 400 mg BID.
  • An effective amount of the combination of the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) may be administered in either single or multiple doses by any of the accepted modes of administration of agents having similar utilities, including rectal, buccal, sublingual, intranasal and transdermal routes, by intra-arterial injection, intravenously, intraperitoneally, parenterally, intramuscularly, subcutaneously, orally, topically, or as an inhalant.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating SLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating SLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, in a dosing regimen selected from the group consisting of 100 mg QD, 175 mg QD, 250 mg QD, 400 mg QD, and 100 mg BID.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, in a dosing regimen selected from the group consisting of 100 mg QD, 175 mg QD, 250 mg QD, 400 mg QD, and 100 mg BID.
  • the invention relates to a use of a composition of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating CLL, wherein the treating comprises the step of administering one or more doses of Formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a use of a composition of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating SLL, wherein the treating comprises the step of administering one or more doses of Formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a use of a composition of Formula (I), or a
  • the treating comprises the step of administering one or more doses of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a use of a composition of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating SLL, wherein the treating comprises the step of administering one or more doses of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a mammal that comprises the step of administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating SLL in a mammal that comprises the step of administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a mammal that comprises the step of administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • a method of treating SLL in a mammal that comprises the step of
  • the mammal in any of the foregoing embodiments is selected from the group consisting of a human, a canine, a feline, or an equine. In an embodiment, the mammal in any of the foregoing embodiments is a companion animal.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a subtype of CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • a number of subtypes of CLL have been characterized. CLL is often classified for immunoglobulin heavy-chain variable-region (IgV f j) mutational status in leukemic cells.
  • IgV f j immunoglobulin heavy-chain variable-region
  • ZAP70 expression (positive or negative) is also used to characterize CLL.
  • the methylation of ZAP-70 at CpG3 is also used to characterize CLL, for example by pyrosequencing.
  • CLL is also classfied by stage of disease under the Binet or Rai criteria. J. L. Binet, et al, Cancer 1977, 40, 855-64; K.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a CLL in a human that comprises the step of
  • a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof wherein the CLL is selected from the group consisting of IgV H mutation negative CLL, ZAP-70 positive CLL, ZAP-70 methylated at CpG3 CLL, CD38 positive CLL, chronic lymphocytic leukemia characterized by a 17p 13.1 (17p) deletion, and CLL characterized by a 1 lq22.3 (11 q) deletion.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, wherein the CLL has undergone a Richter's transformation.
  • a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, wherein the CLL has undergone a Richter's transformation.
  • Methods of assessing Richter's transformation which is also known as Richter's syndrome, are described in P. Jain and S. O'Brien, Oncology, 2012, 26, 1146-52.
  • Richter's transformation is a subtype of CLL that is observed in 5-10% of patients. It involves the development of aggressive lymphoma from CLL and has a generally poor prognosis.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a subtype of CLL in a human, comprising the step of administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, wherein the subtype of CLL is a subtype of CLL that increases monocytes and NK cells in peripheral blood when measured after a period of treatment with Formula (II) selected from the group consisting of about 14 days, about 28 days, about 56 days, about 1 month, about 2 months, about 3 months, about 6 months, and about 1 year, and wherein the term "about” refers to a measurement interval of +/- 2 days.
  • Formula (II) selected from the group consisting of about 14 days, about 28 days, about 56 days, about 1 month, about 2 months, about 3 months, about 6 months, and about 1 year
  • the invention relates to a method of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia in a patient, wherein the chronic lymphocytic leukemia is chronic lymphocytic leukemia in a patient sensitive to lymphocytosis.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia in a patient, wherein the chronic lymphocytic leukemia is chronic lymphocytic leukemia in a patient exhibiting lymphocytosis caused by a disorder selected from the group consisting of a viral infection, a bacterial infection, a protozoal infection, or a post-splenectomy state.
  • the viral infection in any of the foregoing embodiments is selected from the group consisting of infectious mononucleosis, hepatitis, and cytomegalovirus.
  • the bacterial infection in any of the foregoing embodiments is selected from the group consisting of pertussis, tuberculosis, and brucellosis.
  • the methods described above may be used as first-line cancer therapy, or after treatment with conventional chemotherapic active pharmaceutical ingredients, including cyclophosphamide, fludarabine, cyclophosphamide and fludarabine (FC chemotherapy), and chlorambucil.
  • chemotherapic active pharmaceutical ingredients including cyclophosphamide, fludarabine, cyclophosphamide and fludarabine (FC chemotherapy), and chlorambucil.
  • the methods described above may also be supplemented with immunotherapeutic monoclonal antibodies such as the anti-CD52 monoclonal antibody alemtuzumab.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, and further comprises the step of administering to said human an active pharmaceutical ingredient selected from the group consisting of cyclophosphamide, fludarabine,
  • cyclophosphamide chlorambucil, salts, esters, prodrugs, cocrystals, solvates, or hydrates thereof, and combinations thereof, and alemtuzumab, antigen-binding fragments, derivatives, conjugates, variants, and radioisotope-labeled complexes thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating hematological malgnancies in a human comprising the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • Hematological malignancies include CLL and SLL, as well as other cancers of the blood, including B cell malignancies.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a hematological malignancy selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM), Burkitt's lymphoma, multiple myeloma, or myelofibrosis in a human that comprises the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • a hematological malignancy selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphom
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a NHL selected from the group consisting of indolent NHL and aggressive NHL comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a DLBCL selected from the group consisting of activated B-cell like diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL-ABC) and germinal center B-cell like diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL-GCB), comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • a DLBCL selected from the group consisting of activated B-cell like diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL-ABC) and germinal center B-cell like diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL-GCB)
  • a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating an MCL selected from the group consisting of mantle zone MCL, nodular MCL, diffuse MCL, and blastoid MCL (also known as blastic variant MCL), comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • an MCL selected from the group consisting of mantle zone MCL, nodular MCL, diffuse MCL, and blastoid MCL (also known as blastic variant MCL)
  • a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a B-ALL selected from the group consisting of early pre-B cell B-ALL, pre-B cell B-ALL, and mature B cell B-ALL (also known as Burkitt's leukemia), comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a Burkitt's lymphoma selected from the group consisting of sporadic Burkitt's lymphoma, endemic Burkitt's lymphoma, and human immunodeficiency virus-associated Burkitt's lymphoma, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a multiple myeloma selected from the group consisting of hyperdiploid multiple myeloma and non-hyperdiploid multiple myeloma, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a myelofibrosis selected from the group consisting of primary myelofibrosis (also known as chronic idiopathic myelofibrosis) and myelofibrosis secondary to polycythemia vera or essential
  • thrombocythaemia comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a subtype of a hematological malignancy in a human, comprising the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, wherein the subtype of a hematological malignancy is a subtype of a hematological malignancy that increases monocytes and NK cells in peripheral blood when measured after a period of treatment with Formula (II) selected from the group consisting of about 14 days, about 28 days, about 56 days, about 1 month, about 2 months, about 3 months, about 6 months, and about 1 year, wherein the term "about” refers to a measurement interval of +/- 2 days, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DL), diffuse large B cell lympho
  • the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, cocrystal, hydrate, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
  • the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, cocrystal, hydrate, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
  • the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, cocrystal, hydrate, solvate, or prodrug thereof, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient.
  • the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and the anticoagulant or the antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient are administered sequentially. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and the anticoagulant or the antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient are administered concomitantly. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered before the anticoagulant or the antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered after the anticoagulant or the antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient.
  • the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (II), and wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of CLL, SLL, NHL, DLBCL, FL, MCL, Hodgkin's lymphoma, B-ALL, WM, Burkitt's lymphoma, multiple myeloma, or myelofibrosis that comprises the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
  • a BTK inhibitor is Formula (II)
  • the cancer is selected from the group consisting of CLL, SLL, NHL, DLBCL, FL, MCL, Hodgkin's lymphoma, B-ALL, WM, Burkitt's lymphom
  • the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (II), and wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of acute myeloid leukemia, squamous cell carcinoma including chronic myelocytic leukemia, bladder cancer, head and neck tumor, pancreatic ductal adenocarcinoma (PDA), pancreatic cancer, colon carcinoma, mammary carcinoma, breast cancer, fibrosarcoma, mesothelioma cancer, renal cell carcinoma, lung carcinoma, thyoma, prostate cancer, colorectal cancer, ovarian cancer, thymus cancer, brain cancer, squamous cell cancer, skin cancer, eye cancer, retinoblastoma, melanoma, intraocular melanoma, oral cavity and oropharyngeal cancers, gas
  • the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (I) or Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, cocrystal, hydrate, solvate, or prodrug thereof, wherein the cancer is a hematogolical malignancy, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of chronic lymphocytic leukemia, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia, and non-Hodgkin's lymphoma.
  • a BTK inhibitor is Formula (I) or Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, cocrystal, hydrate, solvate, or prodrug thereof
  • the cancer is a hematogolical malignancy
  • the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of chronic lymphocytic leukemia, B cell
  • the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (II), or a
  • hematological malignancy a hematological malignancy
  • the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of chronic lymphocytic leukemia, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia, and non-Hodgkin's lymphoma.
  • Preferred anti-platelet and anticoagulant agents for use in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, cyclooxygenase inhibitors (e.g., aspirin), adenosine diphosphate (ADP) receptor inhibitors (e.g., clopidogrel and ticlopidine), phosphodiesterase inhibitors (e.g., cilostazol), glycoprotein Ilb/IIIa inhibitors (e.g., abciximab, eptifibatide, and tirofiban), adenosine reuptake inhibitors (e.g., dipyridamole), and acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin).
  • cyclooxygenase inhibitors e.g., aspirin
  • ADP adenosine diphosphate
  • phosphodiesterase inhibitors e.g., cilostazol
  • glycoprotein Ilb/IIIa inhibitors e.g., abcix
  • the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (II), or a
  • an anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient is selected from the group consisting of acenocoumarol, anagrelide, anagrelide hydrochloride, abciximab, aloxiprin, antithrombin, apixaban, argatroban, aspirin, aspirin with extended-release dipyridamole, beraprost, betrixaban, bivalirudin, carbasalate calcium, cilostazol, clopidogrel, clopidogrel bisulfate, cloricromen, dabigatran etexilate, darexaban, dalteparin, dalteparin sodium, defibrotide, dicumarol, diphenadione, dipyridamole, ditazole
  • the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) and Formula (II) may also be safely co-administered with immunotherapeutic antibodies such as the anti-CD20 antibodies rituximab, obinutuzumab, ofatumumab, veltuzumab, tositumomab, and ibritumomab, and or antigen-binding fragments, derivatives, conjugates, variants, and radioisotope-labeled complexes thereof, which may be given alone or with conventional chemotherapeutic active pharmaceutical ingredients such as those described herein.
  • immunotherapeutic antibodies such as the anti-CD20 antibodies rituximab, obinutuzumab, ofatumumab, veltuzumab, tositumomab, and ibritumomab, and or antigen-binding fragments, derivatives, conjugates, variants, and radioisotope-labeled complexes thereof, which may be given alone or with
  • the CD20 antigen also called human B-lymphocyte-restricted differentiation antigen, Bp35, or Bl
  • Bp35 human B-lymphocyte-restricted differentiation antigen
  • the CD20 antigen is a glycosylated integral membrane protein with a molecular weight of approximately 35 kD. T. F. Tedder, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 1988, 85, 208-12.
  • CD20 is also expressed on most B cell non-Hodgkin's lymphoma cells, but is not found on hematopoietic stem cells, pro-B cells, normal plasma cells, or other normal tissues.
  • Anti-CD20 antibodies are currently used as therapies for many hematological malignancies, including indolent NHL, aggressive NHL, and CLL/SLL. S. H. Lim, et. al., Haematologica 2010, 95, 135-43; S. A. Beers, et. al, Sem.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering to said human a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, and further comprising the step of administering an anti-CD20 antibody, wherein the anti-CD20 antibody is a monoclonal antibody or an antigen-binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering to said human a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, and further comprising the step of administering an anti-CD20 antibody, wherein the anti-CD20 antibody is an anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody or an antigen-binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof, and wherein the anti-CD20 antibody specifically binds to human CD20 with a K D selected from the group consisting of 1 x 10 7 M or less, 5 X 10 8 M or less, 1 x 10 8 M or less, and 5 ⁇ 10 9 M or less.
  • a K D selected from the group consisting of 1 x 10 7 M or less, 5 X 10 8 M or less, 1 x 10 8 M or less, and 5 ⁇ 10 9 M or less.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating CLL or SLL in a human comprising the step of administering to said human a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, and further comprising the step of administering an anti-CD20 antibody, wherein the anti-CD20 antibody is a monoclonal antibody or an antigen-binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating CLL or SLL in a human comprising the step of administering to said human a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, and further comprising the step of administering an anti-CD20 antibody, wherein the anti-CD20 antibody is an anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof, and wherein the anti-CD20 antibody specifically binds to human CD20 with a K D selected from the group consisting of l x l0 ⁇ 7 M or less, 5x l0 ⁇ 8 M or less, l x l0 ⁇ 8 M or less, and 5x l0 ⁇ 9 M or less.
  • a K D selected from the group consisting of l x l0 ⁇ 7 M or less, 5x l0 ⁇ 8 M or less, l
  • the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody are administered sequentially. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody are administered concomitantly. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered before the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered after the anticoagulant or the antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody are administered over the same time period, and the BTK inhibitor administration continues after the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody administration is completed.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is rituximab, or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof.
  • Rituximab is a chimeric murine-human monoclonal antibody directed against CD20, and its structure comprises an IgGl kappa immunoglobulin containing murine light- and heavy-chain variable region sequences and human constant region sequences.
  • Rituximab is composed of two heavy chains of 451 amino acids and two light chains of 213 amino acids.
  • the amino acid sequence for the heavy chains of rituximab is set forth in SEQ ID NO:l .
  • the amino acid sequence for the light chains of rituximab is set forth in SEQ ID NO:2.
  • Rituximab is
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is an anti-CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to rituximab.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:l . In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:2. In an embodiment, the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO: 1. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:2. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO: 1. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is obinutuzumab, or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof.
  • Obinutuzumab is also known as afutuzumab or GA-101.
  • Obinutuzumab is a humanized monoclonal antibody directed against CD20.
  • the amino acid sequence for the heavy chains of obinutuzumab is set forth in SEQ ID NO:3.
  • the amino acid sequence for the light chains of obinutuzumab is set forth in SEQ ID NO:4.
  • Obinutuzumab is commercially available, and its properties and use in cancer and other diseases is described in more detail in T. Robak, Curr. Opin. Investig. Drugs 2009, 10, 588-96.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is an anti-CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to obinutuzumab.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:3.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:4.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:3.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:4.
  • the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:3. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:4. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:3. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:4. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody
  • obinutuzumab is an immunoglobulin Gl, anti-(human B-lymphocyte antigen CD20 (membrane- spanning 4-domains subfamily A member 1, B-lymphocyte surface antigen Bl, Leu- 16 or Bp35)), humanized mouse monoclonal obinutuzumab des-CH3107-K-yl heavy chain (222-219')- disulfide with humanized mouse monoclonal obinutuzumab ⁇ light chain dimer (228-228" :231- 231”)-bisdisulfide antibody.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is ofatumumab, or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is an anti-CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to ofatumumab.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:5. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:6. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:5. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:6. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:5.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:6. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:5. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:6. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:7. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:8.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:7. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:8. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:7. In an embodiment, the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:8. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:7.
  • the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:8.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ofatumumab is an immunoglobulin Gl, anti-(human B-lymphocyte antigen CD20 (membrane-spanning 4-domains subfamily A member 1, B-lymphocyte surface antigen Bl, Leu-16 or Bp35)); human monoclonal ofatumumab-CD20 ⁇ heavy chain (225-214')-disulfide with human monoclonal ofatumumab- CD20 K light chain, dimer (231-231":234-234")-bisdisulfide antibody.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is veltuzumab, or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof.
  • Veltuzumab is also known as hA20. Veltuzumab is described in D. M. Goldenberg, et ah, Leuk. Lymphoma 2010, 51, 747-55.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is an anti- CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to veltuzumab.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:9.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO: 10.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:9. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO: 10. In an embodiment, the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:9. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO: 10. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:9.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO: 10.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ofatumumab is an immunoglobulin Gl, anti-(human B-lymphocyte antigen CD20 (membrane- spanning 4-domains subfamily A member 1, Leu- 16, Bp35)); [218- arginine,360-glutamic acid,362-methionine]humanized mouse monoclonal hA20 ⁇ heavy chain (224-213 ')-disulfide with humanized mouse monoclonal hA20 ⁇ light chain (230-230":233-233”)-bisdisulfide dimer
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is tositumomab, or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is 131 I-labeled tositumomab.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is an anti-CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to tositumomab.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO: 11.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO: 12.
  • the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO: 11.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO: 12.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO: 11. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO: 12. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO: 11. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO: 12.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is ibritumomab, or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof.
  • the active form of ibritumomab used in therapy is ibritumomab tiuxetan.
  • the chelator tiuxetan diethylene triamine pentaacetic acid
  • a radioactive isotope such as 90 Y or m In.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is ibritumomab tiuxetan, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof.
  • the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody is an anti-CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to tositumomab.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO: 13.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO: 14.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO: 13.
  • the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO: 14. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO: 13. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO: 14. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO: 13. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO: 14.
  • an anti-CD20 antibody selected from the group consisting of obinutuzumab, ofatumumab, veltuzumab, tositumomab, and ibritumomab, and or antigen- binding fragments, derivatives, conjugates, variants, and radioisotope-labeled complexes thereof, is administered to a subject by infusion in a dose selected from the group consisting of about 100 mg, about 200 mg, about 300 mg, about 400 mg, about 500 mg, about 600 mg, about 700 mg, about 800 mg, about 900 mg, about 1000 mg, about 1100 mg, about 1200 mg, about 1300 mg, about 1400 mg, about 1500 mg, about 1600 mg, about 1700 mg, about 1800 mg, about 1900 mg, and about 2000 mg.
  • the anti-CD20 antibody is admininstered weekly. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 antibody is admininstered monthly. In an embodiment, the anti- CD20 antibody is administered at a lower initial dose, which is escalated when administered at subsequent intervals admininstered monthly.
  • the first infusion can deliver 300 mg of anti-CD20 antibody, and subsequent weekly doses could deliver 2,000 mg of anti-CD20 antibody for eight weeks, followed by monthly doses of 2,000 mg of anti-CD20 antibody.
  • the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) may be administered daily, twice daily, or at different intervals as described above, at the dosages described above.
  • the invention provides a kit comprising a composition comprising a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and a composition comprising an anti-CD20 antibody selected from the group consisting of rituximab, obinutuzumab, ofatumumab, veltuzumab, tositumomab, and ibritumomab, or an antigen-binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof, for use in the treatment of CLL or SLL, hematological malignancies, B cell malignanciesor, or any of the other diseases described herein.
  • the compositions are typically both pharmaceutical compositions.
  • the kit is for use in co-administration of the anti-CD20 antibody and the BTK inhibitor, either simultaneously or separately, in the treatment of CLL or SLL, hematological malignancies, B cell malignancies, or any of the other diseases described herein.
  • the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib ((1 -[(3i?)-3-[4-amino-3-(4-phenoxyphenyl)- 1H- pyrazolo[3,4- ⁇ i]pyrimidin-l-yl]piperidin-l-yl]prop-2-en-l-one) is a first-generation BTK inhibitor.
  • ibrutinib In clinical testing as a monotherapy in subjects with hematologic malignancies, ibrutinib was generally well tolerated at dose levels through 840 mg (the highest dose tested).
  • thrombocytopenia were observed.
  • the pattern of changes in subjects with CLL was notable.
  • Single-agent ibrutinib caused rapid and substantial reductions in lymph node size concomitant with a redistribution of malignant sites into the peripheral blood.
  • An asymptomatic absolute lymphocyte count (ALC) increase was observed that was maximal during the first few months of treatment and generally decreased thereafter but could be persistent in some subjects or could be seen repeatedly in subjects who had interruption and resumption of drug therapy.
  • ibrutinib has also shown in vitro activity against other kinases with a cysteine in the same position as Cys481 in BTK to which the drug covalently binds.
  • ibrutinib inhibits epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), which may be the cause of ibrutinib-related diarrhea and rash.
  • EGFR epidermal growth factor receptor
  • CYP cytochrome P450
  • FIG. 1 A comparison of the in vivo potency results for the BTK inhibitors of Formula (II) and ibrutinib is shown in FIG. 1.
  • CD86 and CD69 are cell surface proteins that are BCR activation markers. To obtain the in vivo potency results, mice were gavaged at increasing drug
  • BCR was stimulated with IgM and the expression of activation marker CD69 and CD86 are monitored by flow cytometry and to determine EC 50 values.
  • Formula (II) is currently being evaluated in an ongoing study of canine spontaneous B- cell lymphoma.
  • Six dogs have been treated with Formula (II) using 2.5 mg/kg once daily oral administration for an average of 22 days (range 14 to 42 days).
  • partial remission (PR) per Veterinary Cooperative Oncology Group criteria for assessment of response in peripheral nodal lymphoma, has been observed in 2 of 6 dogs.
  • PR partial remission
  • Formula (II) shows significant activity only against the A3 adenosine receptor; follow-up dose-response experiments indicated a IC 50 of 2.7 ⁇ , suggesting a low clinical risk of off-target effects.
  • Formula (II) at 10 ⁇ showed no inhibition of in vitro EGFR phosphorylation in an A431 human epidermoid cancer cell line whereas ibrutinib had an IC 50 of 66 nM.
  • the second generation BTK inhibitor, Formula (II) achieves significant oral bioavailability and potency, and has favorable preclinical characteristics, as described above.
  • the purpose of this study is to evaluate the safety and efficacy of the second generation BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) in treating subjects with chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL) and small lymphocytic lymphoma (SLL).
  • CLL chronic lymphocytic leukemia
  • SLL small lymphocytic lymphoma
  • the primary objectives of the clinical study are as follows: (1) establish the safety and the MTD of orally administered Formula (II) in subjects with CLL/SLL; (2) determine pharmacokinetics (PK) of orally administered Formula (II) and identification of its major metabolite(s); and (3) measure pharmacodynamic (PD) parameters including drug occupancy of BTK, the target enzyme, and effect on biologic markers of B cell function.
  • PK pharmacokinetics
  • PD pharmacodynamic
  • the secondary objective of the clinical study is to evaluate tumor responses in patients treated with Formula (II).
  • This study is a multicenter, open-label, nonrandomized, sequential group, dose escalation study.
  • Each cohort will be enrolled sequentially with 6 subjects per cohort. If ⁇ 1 dose- limiting toxicity (DLT) is observed in the cohort during Cycle 1 , escalation to the next cohort will proceed. Subjects may be enrolled in the next cohort if 4 of the 6 subjects enrolled in the cohort completed Cycle 1 without experiencing a DLT, while the remaining 2 subjects are completing evaluation. If > 2 DLTs are observed during Cycle 1, dosing at that dose and higher will be suspended and the MTD will be established as the previous cohort. The MTD is defined as the largest daily dose for which fewer than 33% of the subjects experience a DLT during Cycle 1. Dose escalation will end when either the MTD is achieved or at 3 dose levels above full BTK occupancy, whichever occurs first.
  • DLT dose- limiting toxicity
  • Full BTK occupancy is defined as Formula (II) active- site occupancy of > 80% (average of all subjects in cohort) at 24 hours postdose. Should escalation to Cohort 6 be necessary, the dose will be determined based on the aggregate data from Cohorts 1 to 5, which includes safety, efficacy, and PK/PD results. The dose for Cohort 6 will not exceed 900 mg/day.
  • Treatment with Formula (II) may be continued for > 28 days until disease progression or an unacceptable drug-related toxicity occurs.
  • Subjects with disease progression will be removed from the study. All subjects who discontinue study drug will have a safety follow-up visit 30 ( ⁇ 7) days after the last dose of study drug unless they have started another cancer therapy within that timeframe.
  • Radiologic tumor assessment will be done at screening and at the end of Cycle 2, Cycle 4, and Cycle 12 and at investigator discretion. Confirmation of complete response (CR) will require bone marrow analysis and radiologic tumor assessment. For subjects who remain on study for > 11 months, a mandatory bone marrow aspirate and biopsy is required in Cycle 12 concurrent with the radiologic tumor assessment.
  • Dose-limiting toxicity is defined as any of the following events (if not related to disease progression): (1) any Grade > 3 non-hemato logic toxicity (except alopecia) persisting despite receipt of a single course of standard outpatient symptomatic therapy (e.g., Grade 3 diarrhea that responds to a single, therapeutic dose of Imodium® would not be considered a DLT); (2) grade > 3 prolongation of the corrected QT interval (QTc), as determined by a central ECG laboratory overread; (3) grade 4 neutropenia (absolute neutrophil count [ANC] ⁇ 500/ ⁇ ) lasting > 7 days after discontinuation of therapy without growth factors or lasting > 5 days after discontinuation of therapy while on growth factors (i.e., Grade 4 neutropenia not lasting as long as specified will not be considered a DLT), (4) grade 4 thrombocytopenia (platelet count ⁇ 20,000/ ⁇ ) lasting > 7 days after discontinuation of therapy or requiring transfusion (i.e., Grade 4 thrombocytopenia not
  • the efficacy parameters for the study include overall response rate, duration of response, and progression-free survival (PFS).
  • the safety parameters for the study include DLTs and MTD, frequency, severity, and attribution of adverse events (AEs) based on the Common Terminology Criteria for Adverse Events (CTCAE v4.03) for non-hematologic AEs. M. Hallek, et al, Blood 2008, 111, 5446-5456.
  • the schedule of assessments is as follows, with all days stated in the following meaning the given day or +/- 2 days from the given day.
  • a physical examination including vital signs and weight, are performed at screening, during cycle 1 at 1, 8, 15, 22, and 28 days, during cycle 2 at 15 and 28 days, during cycles 3 to 24 at 28 days, and at follow up (after the last dose).
  • the screening physical examination includes, at a minimum, the general appearance of the subject, height (screening only) and weight, and examination of the skin, eyes, ears, nose, throat, lungs, heart, abdomen, extremities, musculoskeletal system, lymphatic system, and nervous system. Symptom-directed physical exams are done thereafter.
  • ECG Eastern Cooperative Oncology Group
  • ECG testing is performed at screening, during cycle 1 at 1, 2, 8, 15, 22, and 28 days, during cycle 2 at 15 and 28 days, during cycles 3 to 24 at 28 days, and at follow up.
  • the 12-lead ECG test will be done in triplicate (> 1 minute apart) at screening.
  • the calculated QTc average of the 3 ECGs must be ⁇ 480 ms for eligibility.
  • single ECGs are done predose and at 1, 2, 4, and 6 h postdose.
  • the single ECG on Cycle 1 Day 2 is done predose.
  • Subjects should be in supine position and resting for at least 10 minutes before study- related ECGs. Two consecutive machine-read QTc > 500 ms or > 60 ms above baseline require central ECG review.
  • Hematology including complete blood count with differential and platelet and reticulocyte counts, is assesed at screening, during cycle 1 at 1, 8, 15, 22, and 28 days, during cycle 2 at 15 and 28 days, during cycles 3 to 24 at 28 days, and at follow up.
  • Serum chemistry is assesed at screening, during cycle 1 at 1, 8, 15, 22, and 28 days, during cycle 2 at 15 and 28 days, during cycles 3 to 24 at 28 days, and at follow up.
  • Serum chemistry includes albumin, alkaline phosphatase, ALT, AST, bicarbonate, blood urea nitrogen (BUN), calcium, chloride, creatinine, glucose, lactate dehydrogenase (LDH), magnesium, phosphate, potassium, sodium, total bilirubin, total protein, and uric acid.
  • Cell counts and serum immunoglobulin are performed at screening, at cycle 2, day 28, and at every 6 months thereafter until last dose and include T/B/NK/monocyte cell counts (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD14, CD19, CD19, CD16/56, and others as needed) and serum immunoglobulin (IgG, IgM, IgA, and total immunoglobulin). Bone marrow aspirates are performed at cycle 12.
  • Pharmacodynamics samples are drawn during cycle 1 at 1, 2, and 8 days, and at follow up. On days 1 and 8, pharmacodynamic samples are drawn pre-dose and 4 hours ( ⁇ 10 minutes) post-dose, and on day 2, pharmacodynamic samples are drawn pre-dose. Pharmacokinetics samples are drawn during cycle 1 at 1, 2, 8, 15, 22, and 28 days. Pharmacokinetic samples for Cycle 1 Day 1 are drawn pre-dose and at 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6 and 24 hours (before dose on Day 2) post-dose. Samples for Cycle 1 Day 8 are drawn pre-dose and at 0.5, 1, 2, 4, and 6 hours post-dose.
  • a PK sample is drawn pre- dose and the second PK sample must be drawn before (up to 10 minutes before) the ECG acquisition, which is 2 hours postdose.
  • Pretreatment radiologic tumor assessments are performed within 30 days before the first dose.
  • a computed tomography (CT) scan (with contrast unless contraindicated) is required of the chest, abdomen, and pelvis.
  • PET positron emission tomography
  • Radiologic tumor assessments are mandatory at the end of Cycle 2 (-7 days), Cycle 4 (- 7days), and Cycle 12 (-7 days).
  • Radiologic tumor assessments are done at investigator discretion.
  • a CT (with contrast unless contraindicated) scan of the chest, abdomen, and pelvis is required for subjects with CLL.
  • a PET/CT is required in subjects with SLL.
  • assessments are both required for confirmation of a complete response (CR).
  • Clinical assessments of tumor response should be done at the end of Cycle 6 and every 3 months thereafter.
  • Molecular markers are measured at screening, and include interphase cytogenetics, stimulated karyotype, IgHV mutational status, Zap-70 methylation, and beta-2 microglobulin levels.
  • Urinalysis is performed at screening, and includes pH, ketones, specific gravity, bilirubin, protein, blood, and glucose. Other assessments, including informed consent, eligibility, medical history, and pregnancy test are done at the time of screening.
  • ANC absolute neutrophil count
  • CR complete remission
  • CRi CR with incomplete blood count recovery
  • PR partial remission.
  • Computed tomography (CT) scan of abdomen, pelvis, and chest is required for this evaluation b. Without need for exogenous growth factors
  • the PK parameters of the study are as follows.
  • the plasma PK of Formula (II) and a metabolite is characterized using noncompartmental analysis.
  • the following PK parameters are calculated, whenever possible, from plasma concentrations of Formula (II): AUC(o-t): Area under the plasma concentration-time curve calculated using linear trapezoidal summation from time 0 to time t, where t is the time of the last measurable concentration (Ct),
  • AUC(o-24) Area under the plasma concentration-time curve from 0 to 24 hours, calculated using linear trapezoidal summation
  • the PD parameters of the study are as follows.
  • the occupancy of BTK by Formula (II) are measured in peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) with the aid of a biotin-tagged Formula (II) analogue probe.
  • PBMCs peripheral blood mononuclear cells
  • Formula (II) analogue probe
  • Safety analysis set All enrolled subjects who receive > 1 dose of study drug
  • Per-protocol (PP) analysis set All enrolled subjects who receive > 1 dose of study drug and with > 1 tumor response assessment after treatment.
  • the safety analysis set will be used for evaluating the safety parameters in this study.
  • the PP analysis sets will be analyzed for efficacy parameters in this study.
  • Safety endpoint analysis was performed as follows. Safety summaries will include summaries in the form of tables and listings. The frequency (number and percentage) of treatment emergent adverse events will be reported in each treatment group by Medical
  • Additional analyses include summaries of subject demographics, baseline
  • the analysis of efficacy parameters was performed as follows.
  • the point estimate of the overall response rate will be calculated for the PP analysis set.
  • the corresponding 95% confidence interval also will be derived.
  • the duration of overall response is measured from the time measurement criteria are met for CR or PR (whichever is first recorded) until the first date that recurrent or progressive disease is objectively documented (taking as reference for progressive disease the smallest measurements recorded since the treatment started).
  • Kaplan- Meier methodology will be used to estimate event- free curves and corresponding quantiles (including the median).
  • Progression-free survival is measured from the time of first study drug administration until the first date that recurrent or progressive disease is objectively documented (taking as reference for progressive disease the smallest measurements recorded since the treatment started).
  • Kaplan-Meier methodology will be used to estimate the event- free curves and corresponding quantiles (including the median).
  • the study scheme is a seqential cohort escalation. Each cohort consists of six subjects. The sample size of the study is 24 to 36 subjects, depending on dose escalation into subsequent cohorts.
  • the dose level for Cohort 6 will be determined based on the safety and efficacy of Cohorts 1 to 5, and will not exceed 900 mg/day. Escalation will end with either the MTD cohort or three levels above full BTK occupancy, whichever is observed first. An additional arm of the study will explore 100 mg BID dosing. Treatment with oral Formula (II) may be continued for greater than 28 days until disease progression or an unacceptable drug-related toxicity occurs.
  • the inclusion criteria for the study are as follows: (1) men and women > 18 years of age with a confirmed diagnosis of CLL/SLL, which has relapsed after, or been refractory to, > 2 previous treatments for CLL/SLL; however, subjects with 17p deletion are eligible if they have relapsed after, or been refractory to, 1 prior treatment for CLL/SLL; (2) body weight > 60 kg, (3) ECOG performance status of ⁇ 2; (4) agreement to use contraception during the study and for 30 days after the last dose of study drug if sexually active and able to bear children; (5) willing and able to participate in all required evaluations and procedures in this study protocol including swallowing capsules without difficulty; or (6) ability to understand the purpose and risks of the study and provide signed and dated informed consent and authorization to use protected health information (in accordance with national and local subject privacy regulations).
  • the dosage form and strength of Formula (II) used in the clinical study is a hard gelatin capsules prepared using standard pharmaceutical grade excipients (microcrystalline cellulose) and containing 25 mg of Formula (II) each.
  • the color of the capsules is Swedish orange.
  • the route of administration is oral (per os, or PO).
  • the dose regimen is once daily or twice daily, as defined by the cohort, on an empty stomach (defined as no food 2 hours before and 30 minutes after dosing).
  • the baseline characteristics for the patients enrolled in the clinical study are given in Table 4.
  • FIG. 2 shows the median % change in ALC and SPD from baseline in the clinical study of Formula (II), plotted in comparison to the results reported for ibrutinib in Figure 1A of J. C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 12-42.
  • the results show that Formula (II) leads to a more rapid patient response in CLL than corresponding treatment with ibrutinib.
  • This effect is illustrated, for example, by the median % change in SPD, which achieved the same status in the present study at 7 months of treatment with Formula (II) as compared to 18 months for ibrutinib.
  • the % change in SPD observed in the different cohorts ⁇ i.e. by dose and dosing regimen) is shown in FIG. 3, and in all cases shows significant responses.
  • FIG. 4 A Kaplan-Meier curve showing PFS from the clinical CLL study of Formula (II) is shown in FIG. 4.
  • a comparison of survival curves was performed using the Log-Rank (Mantle- Cox) test, with a p-value of 0.0206 indicating that the survival curves are different.
  • the number of patients at risk is shown in FIG. 5.
  • FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 show the results for Formula (II) in comparison to the results reported for ibrutinib in J. C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 32-42.
  • An improvement in survival and a reduction in risk are observed in CLL patients treated with Formula (II) in comparison to patients treated with ibrutinib.
  • BTK target occupany was measured for relapsed/refractory CLL patients with the results shown in FIG. 8.
  • each cell subset was defined by hierarchical flow cytometry gating. Then, the change in frequency (between day 1 and day 28) was calculated for each cell subset. MDSC subsets were measured as a % of all myeloid cells. T cell subsets were measured as a % of all CD3 + cells, and NK cells were measured as a % of all live CD45 + cells.
  • FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 the results show the % change in MDSC (monocytic) level over 28 days versus % ALC change at cycle 1 day 28 (C1D28) and at cycle 2 day 28 (C2D28). A cycle is 28 days. A trend is observed wherein patients with decreasing ALC % had increasing MDSC (monocytic) %.
  • NK cells and MDSC cells are observed in multiple cohorts, at doses including 100 mg BID, 200 mg QD, and 400 mg QD.
  • the effects on NK cells and MDSC cells are compared to a number of other markers versus % change in ALC at C1D28 and C2D28.
  • these other markers include CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, CD4+/CD8+ T cell ratio, NK-T cells, PD-1+ CD4+ T cells, and PD-1+ CD8+ T cells.
  • the effects on NK cells and MDSC cells are observed to be much more pronounced than on any of these other markers.
  • NK cells and monocytic MDSC subsets increase in frequency in the peripheral blood in patients with falling ALC counts, an important clinical parameter in CLL.
  • the NK cell increase may reflect an overall increase in cytolytic activity against B-CLL resulting in the ALC % to drop.
  • the increase in MDSC % in the blood may be due to a movement of these cells out of the lymph nodes, spleen, and bone marrow, which are all possible sites of CLL proliferation.
  • Formula (II) shows superior efficacy as measured by ALC than first generation BTK inhibitors such as ibrutinib, or PI3K-5 inhibitors such as idelalisib.
  • first generation BTK inhibitors such as ibrutinib, or PI3K-5 inhibitors such as idelalisib.
  • Formula (II) has better target occupancy and better pharmacokinetic and metabolic parameters than ibrutinib, leading to improved B cell apoptosis.
  • treatment with Formula (II) does not affect NK cell function.
  • treatment with Formula (II) leads to a CLL tumor microenvironmental effect by excluding MDSC cells from the marrow and lymph nodes and reducing their number.
  • CC-292 refers to (N-(3-((5-fluoro-2-((4-(2- methoxyethoxy)phenyl)amino)pyrimidin-4-yl)amino)phenyl)acrylamide, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including a hydrochloride salt or besylate salt thereof.
  • CLL chronic lymphocytic leukemia
  • MCL mantle cell lymphoma
  • BTK is activated and undergoes tyrosine phosphorylation upon challenge of the platelet thrombin receptor, which requires the engagement of ⁇ ) ⁇ 3 integrin and PI3K activity (Laffargue, et al, FEBSLett. 1999, 443(1), 66-70). It has also been implicated in GPIba-dependent thrombus stability at sites of vascular injury (Liu, et al, Blood 2006, 108(8), 2596-603). Thus, BTK and Tec are involved in several processes important in supporting the formation of a stable hemostatic plug, which is critical for preventing significant blood loss in response to vascular injury.
  • the BTK inhibitor-treated human platelets were fluorescently labeled and infused continuously through a catheter inserted into the femoral artery. Their behavior in response to laser-induced vascular injury was monitored in real time using two-channel confocal intravital microscopy (Furie and Furie, J. Clin. Invest. 2005, 115(12), 2255-62). Upon induction of arteriole injury untreated platelets rapidly formed thrombi with an average thrombus size of 6,450 ⁇ 292 mm 2 (mean ⁇ s.e.m.), as shown in FIG. 15, 16, and 17.
  • CC-292 showed an effect similar to ibrutinib. These results, which show reduced thrombus formation for ibrutinib at physiologically relevant concentrations, may provide some mechanistic background for the Grade > 3 bleeding events (eg, subdural hematoma,
  • GPVI platelet aggregation was measured for Formula (II) and ibrutinib. Blood was obtained from untreated humans, and platelets were purified from plasma-rich protein by centrifugation.
  • FIG. 20 the results of CVX-induced (250 ng/mL) human platelet aggregation results before and 15 minutes after administration of the BTK inhibitors to 6 healthy individuals are shown.
  • Rituximab-combination chemotherapy is today's standard of care in CD20 + B-cell malignancies.
  • Previous studies investigated and determined that ibrutinib antagonizes rituximab antibody-dependent cell mediated cytotoxicity (ADCC) mediated by NK cells. This may be due to ibrutinib 's secondary irreversible binding to interleukin-2 inducible tyrosine kinase (ITK) which is required for FcR-stimulated NK cell function including calcium mobilization, granule release, and overall ADCC.
  • ADCC rituximab antibody-dependent cell mediated cytotoxicity
  • ITK interleukin-2 inducible tyrosine kinase
  • Rituximab-mediated ADCC was evaluated in NK cells from healthy volunteers as well as assays of NK cells from CLL patients targeting autologous CLL cells. In both cases, ADCC was not inhibited by Formula (II) treatment at 1 ⁇ . In contrast, addition of ibrutinib to the ADCC assays strongly inhibited the rituximab-mediated cytotoxicity of target cells, and no increase over natural cytotoxicity was observed at any rituximab concentration. This result indicates that the combination of rituximab and Formula (II) provides an unexpected benefit in the treatment of CLL.
  • BTK is a non-receptor enzyme in the Tec kinase family that is expressed among cells of hematopoietic origin, including B cells, myeloid cells, mast cells and platelets, where it regulates multiple cellular processes including proliferation, differentiation, apoptosis, and cell migration.
  • W. N. Khan Immunol Res. 2001, 23, 147-56; A. J. Mohamed, et al, Immunol Rev. 2009, 228, 58-73; J. M. Bradshaw, Cell Signal. 2010, 22, 1175-84.
  • Functional null mutations of BTK in humans cause the inherited disease, X linked agammaglobulinemia, which is characterized by a lack of mature peripheral B cells.
  • BTK activation is implicated in the pathogenesis of several B-cell malignancies. S.
  • Ibrutinib (PCI-32765, IMBRUVICA), is a first-in-class therapeutic BTK inhibitor. This orally delivered, small-molecule drug is being developed by Pharmacyclics, Inc. for the therapy of B-cell malignancies. As described above, in patients with heavily pretreated indolent non- Hodgkin lymphoma (iNHL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), and CLL, ibrutinib showed substantial antitumor activity, inducing durable regressions of lymphadenopathy and splenomegaly in the majority of patients.
  • iNHL indolent non- Hodgkin lymphoma
  • MCL mantle cell lymphoma
  • CLL CLL
  • rituximab is a backbone of lymphoma therapy, with mechanisms of action including ADCC, as well as direct induction of apoptosis and
  • Formula (II) is a more selective inhibitor than ibrutinib, as shown previously.
  • Formula (II) is not a potent inhibitor of Itk kinase in contrast to ibrutinib (see Table 1). Itk kinase is required for FcR-stimulated NK cell function including calcium mobilization, granule release, and overall ADCC.
  • anti-CD20 antibodies like rituximab are standard of care drugs, often as part of combination regimens, for the treatment of CD20+ B-cell malignancies, the potential of ibrutinib or Formula (II) to antagonize ADCC was evaluated in vitro.
  • Btk inhibitor Formula (II) which does not have activity against Itk, may preserve NK cell function and therefore synergize rather than antagonize rituximab-mediated ADCC.
  • Rituximab-dependent NK-cell mediated cytotoxicity was assessed using lymphoma cell lines as well as autologous CLL tumor cells.
  • PBMC peripheral blood mononuclear cells
  • NK cells were washed and then subject to positive selection of CD5 + CD19 + CLL cells using magnetic beads (MACS, Miltenyi Biotech). Cell preparations were used fresh after selection. NK cells from CLL patients and healthy volunteers were enriched from peripheral blood collected in sodium citrate anti-coagulant tubes and then subject to density centrifugation. Removal of non NK cells was performed using negative selection by MACS separation. Freshly isolated NK cells were washed three times, enumerated, and then used immediately for ADCC assays.
  • MACS Miltenyi Biotech
  • Cytokine secretion was determined as follows. Rituximab and trastuzumab-dependent NK-cell mediated degranulation and cytokine release were assessed using lymphoma and HER2+ breast cancer cell lines (DHL-4 and HER18, respectively). Target cells were cultured in flat-bottom plates containing 10 ⁇ g/mL of rituximab (DHL-4) or trastuzumab (HER18) and test articles (0.1 or 1 ⁇ ibrutinib, 1 ⁇ Formula (II), or DMSO vehicle control). NK cells from healthy donors were enriched as described above and then added to the target cells and incubated for 4 hours at 37 °C. Triplicate cultures were performed on NK cells from donors. After incubation, supernatants were harvested, centrifuged briefly, and then analyzed for interferon- ⁇ using an enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) (R&D Systems, Minneapolis, MN, USA).
  • ELISA enzyme-linked immunosorbent as
  • Lytic granule release was determined as follows. NK cells from healthy donors were enriched and cultured in the presence of target cells, monoclonal antibodies and test articles as described above. After 4 hours, the cultures were harvested and cells were pelleted, washed, and then stained for flow cytometry evaluation. Degranulation was evaluated via by flow cytometery by externalization of CD 107a, a protein normally present on the inner leaflet of lytic granules, and gating on NK cells (CD3-CD16 + lymphocytes). The percentage of CD 107a positive NK cells was quantified by comparison with a negative control (isotype control, unstained cells/FMO). Control cultures (NK cells cultured without target cells, or NK, target cell co- cultures in the absence of appropriate monoclonal antibody) were also evaluated; all experiments were performed in triplicate.
  • ADCC assays were performed as follows. Briefly, target cells (Raji or primary CLL) were labeled by incubation at 37 °C with 100 ⁇ 51 Cr for 4 hours prior to co-culture with NK cells. Cells were washed, enumerated, and then added in triplicate to prepared 96-well plates containing treated NK cells at an effector :target (E:T) ratio of 25 : 1.
  • Rituximab Genentech
  • NK cell natural cytotoxicity was assessed in wells containing no rituximab. Cultures were incubated at 37 °C for 4 hours, and then centrifuged. Supernatants were harvested and 51 Cr release was measured by liquid scintillation counting. All experiments were performed in triplicate.
  • Ibrutinib is clinically effective as monotherapy and in combination with rituximab, despite inhibition of ADCC in vitro and in vivo murine models due to ibrutinib 's secondary irreversible binding to ITK.
  • the efficacy of therapeutics which do not inhibit NK cell function, including Formula (II) is superior to ibrutinib.
  • Clinical investigation is needed to determine the impact of this finding on patients receiving rituximab as these results provide support for the unexpected property of Formula (II) as a better agent than ibrutinib to use in combination with antibodies that have ADCC as a mechanism of action.
  • An assay was performed to assess the effects of BTK inhibition using Formula (II) on generalized NK killing (non-ADCC killing).
  • the targets (K562 cells) do not express MHC class I, so they do not inactivate NK cells.
  • Target cells were grown to mid-log phase, and 5x 10 5 cells were labeled in 100 ⁇ ⁇ of assay medium (IMDM with 10% FCS and penicillin/streptomycin) with 100 ⁇ Ci 51 Cr for 1 hour at 37 °C. Cells were washed twice and resuspended in assay medium. A total of 5000 target cells/well was used in the assay. Effector cells were
  • An assay was performed to assess the effects of BTK inhibition using Formula (II) on T cells.
  • Enriched CD4 + T cells are plated on 24-well culture dishes that have been precoated 2 hr with 250 ⁇ anti-TCRp (0.5 ⁇ g/mL) plus anti-CD28 (5 ⁇ g/mL) at 37 °C in PBS.
  • the cells are then supplemented with media containing BTK inhibitors along with the skewing cytokines as indicated in the following.
  • the Thl7 and Treg cultures are grown for 4 days before analysis.
  • the cells are maintained for an additional 3 days with skewing cytokines (Thl7; 20 ng/mL IL-6, 0.5 ng/mL TGF- ⁇ , 5 ⁇ g/mL IL-4, 5 ⁇ g/mL IFN- ⁇ and Treg; 0.5 ng/mL TGF- ⁇ , 5 ⁇ g/mL IL-4, 5 ⁇ g/mL IFN- ⁇ ) and are supplemented with IL2 as a growth factor.
  • skewing cytokines Thl7; 20 ng/mL IL-6, 0.5 ng/mL TGF- ⁇ , 5 ⁇ g/mL IL-4, 5 ⁇ g/mL IFN- ⁇
  • IL2 as a growth factor.

Abstract

Therapeutic methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL) and small lymphocytic leukemia (SLL) are described. In certain embodiments, the invention includes therapeutic methods of treating CLL and SLL using a BTK inhibitor. In certain embodiments, the invention includes therapeutic methods of treating subtypes of CLL and SLL using a BTK inhibitor, including subtypes of CLL in patients sensitive to thrombosis and subtypes of CLL that increase monocytes and NK cells in peripheral blood after treatment with a BTK inhibitor. In certain embodiments, the invention includes therapeutic methods of treating CLL and SLL using a combination of a BTK inhibitor and an anti-CD20 antibody.

Description

METHODS OF TREATING CHRONIC LYMPHOCYTIC LEUKEMIA AND SMALL LYMPHOCYTIC LEUKEMIA USING A BTK INHIBITOR
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
[001] Therapeutic methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia using a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor are disclosed herein.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[002] Bruton's Tyrosine Kinase (BTK or Btk) is a TEC family non-receptor protein kinase expressed in B cells and myeloid cells. The function of BTK in signaling pathways activated by the engagement of the B cell receptor (BCR) and FCER1 on mast cells is well established.
Functional mutations in BTK in humans result in a primary immunodeficiency disease characterized by a defect in B cell development with a block between pro- and pre-B cell stages. The result is an almost complete absence of B lymphocytes, causing a pronounced reduction of serum immunoglobulin of all classes. These findings support a key role for BTK in the regulation of the production of auto-antibodies in autoimmune diseases.
[003] Other diseases with an important role for dysfunctional B cells are B cell malignancies. The reported role for BTK in the regulation of proliferation and apoptosis of B cells indicates the potential for BTK inhibitors in the treatment of B cell lymphomas. BTK inhibitors have thus been developed as potential therapies, as described in O. J. D'Cruz and F. M. Uckun,
OncoTargets and Therapy 2013, 6, 161-176.
[004] B cell chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL) is one of the most prevalent B cell malignancies in adults. CLL is characterized by an expansion of monoclonal mature B cells. CLL patients who relapsed after standard treatments generally experience poor outcomes.
Although survival has been improved by the addition of immunotherapies such as rituximab to standard chemotherapies such as fludarabine and cyclophosphamide, as described in M. Hallek, et al., Lancet, 2010, 76, 1164-74, many standard treatments are associated with toxicities and immunosuppression. There is therefore a significant need to identify less toxic and highly efficacious treatments for CLL. Small lymphocytic leukemia (SLL) is closely related to CLL, and differs only in that a lower level of monoclonal lymphocytes is observed in blood than in CLL, along with an enlarged spleen or lymph nodes. There is also a significant need to identify less toxic and highly efficacious treatments for SLL.
[005] CLL (and SLL) cells rapidly accumulate and are resistant to apoptosis in vivo, but are known to die rapidly in vitro. M. Buchner, et al, Blood 2010, 115, 4497-506. One cause of this effect is from nonmalignant accessory cells in the tumor micro environment, such as stromal cell contact mediated cell survival. Stromal cells in the bone marrow and lymph nodes are known to have an antiapoptotic and protective effect on CLL cells, protecting them from both
chemotherapeutic and spontaneous apoptosis. R. E. Mudry, et al, Blood 2000, 96, 1926-32. The chemokine SDFla (CXCL12) directs homing of CLL cells towards protective niches. M. Burger, et al, Blood 2005, 106, 1824-30. Existing drugs that target the BCR pathway in B cell malignancies can lead to some lymphocytosis, i.e. lymphocyte egress from nodal compartments, through disruption of CXCR4-SDFla signaling and other adhesion factors in bone marrow and the resulting mobilization of cells. However, existing therapies may not eradicate residual malignent B cell populations in the microenvironment of the bone marrow and lymph nodes, where protective stromal cells prevent apoptosis. There is thus an urgent need for treatments that reduce or overcome the protective effect of the microenvironment on CLL cells to enable superior clinical responses in patients.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[006] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof.
[007] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, wherein the BTK inhibitor is administered once daily at a dose selected from the group consisting of 100 mg, 175 mg, 250 mg, and 400 mg.
[008] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, wherein the BTK inhibitor is administered twice daily at a dose of 100 mg.
[009] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, wherein the CLL increases monocytes and NK cells in peripheral blood after treatment with Formula (II) for a period selected from the group consisting of about 14 days, about 28 days, or about 56 days.
[0010] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, wherein the CLL is selected from the group consisting of IgVH mutation negative CLL, ZAP-70 positive CLL, ZAP-70 methylated at CpG3 CLL, CD38 positive CLL, CLL with a 17pl3.1 (17p) deletion, CLL with a 1 lq22.3 (1 lq) deletion, CLL in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, CLL in a human presently suffering from platelet-mediated thrombosis, CLL in a human previously suffering from platelet-mediated thrombosis, or combinations thereof.
[0011] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anti-CD20 antibody selected from the group consisting of rituximab, obinutuzumab, ofatumumab, veltuzumab, tositumomab, ibritumomab, and fragments, derivatives, conjugates, variants, radioisotope- labeled complexes, and biosimilars thereof.
[0012] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient.
[0013] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating CLL and/or SLL, comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, a Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2- ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient, wherein the anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient is selected from the group consisting of acenocoumarol, anagrelide, anagrelide hydrochloride, abciximab, aloxiprin, antithrombin, apixaban, argatroban, aspirin, aspirin with extended-release dipyridamole, beraprost, betrixaban, bivalirudin, carbasalate calcium, cilostazol, clopidogrel, clopidogrel bisulfate, cloricromen, dabigatran etexilate, darexaban, dalteparin, dalteparin sodium, defibrotide, dicumarol, diphenadione, dipyridamole, ditazole, desirudin, edoxaban, enoxaparin, enoxaparin sodium, eptifibatide, fondaparinux, fondaparinux sodium, heparin, heparin sodium, heparin calcium, idraparinux, idraparinux sodium, iloprost, indobufen, lepirudin, low molecular weight heparin, melagatran, nadroparin, otamixaban, parnaparin, phenindione, phenprocoumon, prasugrel, picotamide, prostacyclin, ramatroban, reviparin, rivaroxaban, sulodexide, terutroban, terutroban sodium, ticagrelor, ticlopidine, ticlopidine hydrochloride, tinzaparin, tinzaparin sodium, tirofiban, tirofiban hydrochloride, treprostinil, treprostinil sodium, triflusal, vorapaxar, warfarin, warfarin sodium, ximelagatran, salts thereof, solvates thereof, hydrates thereof, and combinations thereof.
[0014] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lymphoma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM), Burkitt's lymphoma, multiple myeloma, or myelofibrosis.
[0015] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lymphoma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM), Burkitt's lymphoma, multiple myeloma, or myelofibrosis, wherein the BTK inhibitor is administered once daily at a dose selected from the group consisting of 100 mg, 175 mg, 250 mg, and 400 mg.
[0016] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lymphoma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM), Burkitt's lymphoma, multiple myeloma, or myelofibrosis, wherein the BTK inhibitor is administered twice daily at a dose of 100 mg.
[0017] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lymphoma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM), Burkitt's lymphoma, multiple myeloma, or myelofibrosis, wherein the hematological malignancy increases monocytes and NK cells in peripheral blood after treatment with Formula (II) for a period selected from the group consisting of about 14 days, about 28 days, or about 56 days.
[0018] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is non- Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), wherein the NHL is selected from the group consisting of indolent NHL and aggressive NHL.
[0019] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), wherein the DLBCL is selected from the group consisting of activated B-cell like diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL-ABC) and germinal center B-cell like diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL-GCB). [0020] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), wherein the MCL is selected from the group consisting of mantle zone MCL, nodular MCL, diffuse MCL, and blastoid MCL.
[0021] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), wherein the B-ALL is selected from the group consisting of early pre-B cell B-ALL, pre-B cell B-ALL, and mature B cell B-ALL.
[0022] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is Burkitt's lymphoma, wherein the Burkitt's lymphoma is selected from the group consisting of sporadic Burkitt's lymphoma, endemic Burkitt's lymphoma, and human immunodeficiency virus-associated Burkitt's lymphoma.
[0023] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is multiple myeloma, wherein the multiple myeloma is selected from the group consisting of hyperdiploid multiple myeloma and non-hyperdiploid multiple myeloma. [0024] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is myelofibrosis, wherein the myelofibrosis is selected from the group consisting of primary myelofibrosis, myelofibrosis secondary to polycythemia vera, and myelofibrosis secondary to essential thrombocythaemia.
[0025] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lymphoma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM), Burkitt's lymphoma, multiple myeloma, or myelofibrosis, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anti-CD20 antibody selected from the group consisting of rituximab, obinutuzumab, ofatumumab, veltuzumab, tositumomab, ibritumomab, and fragments, derivatives, conjugates, variants, radioisotope- labeled complexes, and biosimilars thereof.
[0026] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lymphoma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM), Burkitt's lymphoma, multiple myeloma, or myelofibrosis, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient.
[0027] In an embodiment, the invention includes a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l ,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lymphoma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM), Burkitt's lymphoma, multiple myeloma, or myelofibrosis, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient, wherein the anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient is selected from the group consisting of acenocoumarol, anagrelide, anagrelide hydrochloride, abciximab, aloxiprin, antithrombin, apixaban, argatroban, aspirin, aspirin with extended-release dipyridamole, beraprost, betrixaban, bivalirudin, carbasalate calcium, cilostazol, clopidogrel, clopidogrel bisulfate, cloricromen, dabigatran etexilate, darexaban, dalteparin, dalteparin sodium, defibrotide, dicumarol, diphenadione, dipyridamole, ditazole, desirudin, edoxaban, enoxaparin, enoxaparin sodium, eptifibatide, fondaparinux, fondaparinux sodium, heparin, heparin sodium, heparin calcium, idraparinux, idraparinux sodium, iloprost, indobufen, lepirudin, low molecular weight heparin, melagatran, nadroparin, otamixaban, parnaparin, phenindione, phenprocoumon, prasugrel, picotamide, prostacyclin, ramatroban, reviparin, rivaroxaban, sulodexide, terutroban, terutroban sodium, ticagrelor, ticlopidine, ticlopidine hydrochloride, tinzaparin, tinzaparin sodium, tirofiban, tirofiban hydrochloride, treprostinil, treprostinil sodium, triflusal, vorapaxar, warfarin, warfarin sodium, ximelagatran, salts thereof, solvates thereof, hydrates thereof, and combinations thereof.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0028] The foregoing summary, as well as the following detailed description of the invention, will be better understood when read in conjunction with the appended drawings. [0029] FIG. 1 illustrates in vivo potency of Formula (II) (labeled "BTK inhibitor") and ibrutinib. Mice were gavaged at increasing drug concentration and sacrificed at one time point (3 h post-dose). BCR is stimulated with IgM and the expression of activation markers CD69 and CD 86 are monitored by flow cytometry to determine ECso's. The results show that Formula (II) is more potent at inhibiting expression of activation makers than ibrutinib.
[0030] FIG. 2 illustrates the results of the clinical study of Formula (II) (labeled "BTK inhibitor") in CLL, which are shown in comparison to the results reported for ibrutinib in Figure 1A of J.C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 32-42. The results show that the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) causes a much smaller relative increase and much faster decrease in absolute lymphocyte count (ALC) relative to the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib. The sum of the product of greatest diameters (SPD) also decreases more rapidly during treatment with the BTK inhibitor than with the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib.
[0031] FIG. 3 shows overall response data shown by SPD of enlarged lymph nodes in CLL patients as a function of dose of the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II).
[0032] FIG. 4 shows a comparison of progression-free survival (PFS) in CLL patients treated with the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib or the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II). The ibrutinib data is taken from J.C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 32-42. CLL patients treated with Formula (II) for at least 8 days are included.
[0033] FIG. 5 shows a comparison of number of patients at risk in CLL patients treated with the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib or the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II). CLL patients treated with Formula (II) for at least 8 days are included.
[0034] FIG. 6 shows a comparison of progression-free survival (PFS) in CLL patients exhibiting the 17p deletion and treated with the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib or the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II). The ibrutinib data is taken from J.C. Byrd, et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 32- 42.
[0035] FIG. 7 shows a comparison of number of patients at risk in CLL patients exhibiting the 17p deletion and treated with the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib or the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II). The ibrutinib data is taken from J.C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 32-42. CLL patients treated with Formula (II) for at least 8 days are included.
[0036] FIG. 8 shows improved BTK target occupancy of Formula (II) at lower dosage versus ibrutinib in relapsed/refractory CLL patients.
[0037] FIG. 9 shows the % change in myeloid-derived suppressor cell (MDSC) (monocytic) level over 28 days versus % ALC change at Cycle 1, day 28 (C1D28) with trendlines.
[0038] FIG. 10 shows the % change in MDSC (monocytic) level over 28 days versus % ALC change at Cycle 2, day 28 (C2D28) with trendlines.
[0039] FIG. 11 shows the % change in natural killer (NK) cell level over 28 days versus % ALC change at Cycle 1, day 28 (C2D28) with trendlines.
[0040] FIG. 12 shows the % change in NK cell level over 28 days versus % ALC change at Cycle 2, day 28 (C2D28) with trendlines.
[0041] FIG. 13 compares the % change in MDSC (monocytic) level and % change in NK cell level over 28 days versus % ALC change with the % change in level of CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, CD4+/CD8+ T cell ratio, NK-T cells, PD-1+ CD4+ T cells, and PD-1+ CD8+ T cells, also versus % ALC change, at Cycle 1 day 28 (C1D28). Trendlines are shown for % change in MDSC (monocytic) level and % change in NK cell level.
[0042] FIG. 14 compares the % change in MDSC (monocytic) level and % change in NK cell level over 28 days versus % ALC change with the % change in level of CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, CD4+/CD8+ T cell ratio, NK-T cells, PD-1+ CD4+ T cells, and PD-1+ CD8+ T cells, also versus % ALC change, at Cycle 2 day 28 (C2D28). Trendlines are shown for % change in MDSC (monocytic) level and % change in NK cell level.
[0043] FIG. 15 illustrates representative photomicrographs and comparison of maximal thrombus size in laser injured arterioles of VWF HAl mutant mice infused with human platelets in the absence or presence of various BTK inhibitors. Representative photomicrographs are given as a comparison of maximal thrombus size in laser-injured arterioles (1 μΜ concentrations shown). [0044] FIG. 16 illustrates a quantitative comparison obtained by in vivo analysis of early thrombus dynamics in a humanized mouse laser injury model using three BTK inhibitors at a concentration of 1 μΜ.
[0045] FIG. 17 illustrates the effect of the tested BTK inhibitors on thrombus formation. The conditions used were N=4, 3 mice per drug; anti-clotting agents < 2000 μΜ2. In studies with ibrutinib, 48% MCL bleeding events were observed with 560 mg QD and 63% CLL bleeding events were observed with 420 mg QD, where bleeding event is defined as subdural hematoma, ecchymoses, GI bleeding, or hematuria.
[0046] FIG. 18 illustrates the effect of the concentration of the tested BTK inhibitors on thrombus formation.
[0047] FIG. 19 illustrates the results of platelet collagen receptor glycoprotein VI (GPVI) platelet aggregation studies of Formula (II) (IC50 = 1.15 μΜ) and ibrutinib (IC50 = 0.13 μΜ).
[0048] FIG. 20 illustrates the results of GPVI platelet aggregation studies of Formula (II) and ibrutinib.
[0049] FIG. 21 shows in vitro analysis of antibody-dependent NK cell-mediated INF-γ release with BTK inhibitors. To evaluate NK cell function, purified NK cells were isolated from healthy peripheral blood mononuclear cells and cultured with 0.1 or 1 μΜ of ibrutinib or 1 μΜ of Formula (II) for 4 hours together with rituximab-coated (10 μg/mL) lymphoma cells, DHL4, or trastuzumab-coated (10 μg/mL) HER2+ breast cancer cells, HER18, and supernatant was harvested and analyzed by enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay for interferon-γ (IFN-γ). All in vitro experiments were performed in triplicate. Labels are defined as follows: *p = 0.018, **p = 0.002, ***p = 0.001.
[0050] FIG. 22 shows in vitro analysis of antibody-dependent NK cell-mediated degranulation with BTK inhibitors. To evaluate NK cell function, purified NK cells were isolated from healthy peripheral blood mononuclear cells and cultured with 0.1 or 1 μΜ of ibrutinib or 1 μΜ of Formula (II) for 4 hours together with rituximab-coated (10 μg/mL) lymphoma cells, DHL4, or trastuzumab-coated (10 μg/mL) HER2+ breast cancer cells, HER18, and NK cells isolated and analyzed for degranulation by flow cytometry for CD 107a mobilization. All in vitro experiments were performed in triplicate. Labels are defined as follows: *p = 0.01, **p = 0.002, ***p = 0.003, ****p = 0.0005.
[0051] FIG. 23 shows that ibrutinib antagonizes antibody-dependent NK cell-mediated cytotoxicity in primary CLL cells. NK cell cytotoxicity as percent lysis of tumor cells was analyzed in chromium release assays with purified NK cells incubated with chromium-labeled Raji for 4 hours at variable rituximab concentrations at a constant effector:target ratio of 25: 1 and ibrutinib (1 μΜ), Formula (II) (1 μΜ), or other ITK sparing BTK inhibitors CGI-1746, inhibA (1 μΜ) and BGB-3111 (1 μΜ). All in vitro experiments were performed in triplicate. Labels are defined as follows: *p = 0.001.
[0052] FIG. 24 shows a summary of the results given in FIG. 24 at the highest concentration of rituximab ("Ab") (10 μg/mL).
[0053] FIG. 25 shows that ibrutinib antagonizes antibody-dependent NK cell-mediated cytotoxicity, as in FIG. 23, using the Raji cell line.
[0054] FIG. 26 shows the effects of BTK inhibition on generalized NK cell mediated cytotoxicity.
[0055] FIG. 27 shows that Formula (II) has no adverse effect on T helper 17 (Thl7) cells, which are a subset of T helper cells that produce interleukin 17 (IL17), while ibrutinib strongly inhibits Thl7 cells.
[0056] FIG. 28 shows that Formula (II) has no effect on regulatory T cell (Treg) development, while ibrutinib strongly increases Treg development.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE SEQUENCE LISTINGS
[0057] SEQ ID NO: 1 is the heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody rituximab.
[0058] SEQ ID NO:2 is the light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody rituximab.
[0059] SEQ ID NO:3 is the heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody obinutuzumab.
[0060] SEQ ID NO:4 is the light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody obinutuzumab. [0061] SEQ ID NO: 5 is the variable heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ofatumumab.
[0062] SEQ ID NO: 6 is the variable light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ofatumumab.
[0063] SEQ ID NO:7 is the Fab fragment heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ofatumumab.
[0064] SEQ ID NO: 8 is the Fab fragment light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ofatumumab.
[0065] SEQ ID NO:9 is the heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody veltuzumab.
[0066] SEQ ID NO: 10 is the light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody veltuzumab.
[0067] SEQ ID NO: 11 is the heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody tositumomab.
[0068] SEQ ID NO: 12 is the light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody tositumomab.
[0069] SEQ ID NO: 13 is the heavy chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ibritumomab.
[0070] SEQ ID NO: 14 is the light chain amino acid sequence of the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ibritumomab.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
[0071] While preferred embodiments of the invention are shown and described herein, such embodiments are provided by way of example only and are not intended to otherwise limit the scope of the invention. Various alternatives to the described embodiments of the invention may be employed in practicing the invention.
[0072] Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as is commonly understood by one of skill in the art to which this invention belongs. [0073] The terms "co-administration" and "administered in combination with" as used herein, encompass administration of two or more active pharmaceutical ingredients to a subject so that both agents and/or their metabolites are present in the subject at the same time. Coadministration includes simultaneous administration in separate compositions, administration at different times in separate compositions, or administration in a composition in which two or more agents are present.
[0074] The term "in vivo" refers to an event that takes place in a subject's body.
[0075] The term "in vitro" refers to an event that takes places outside of a subject's body. In vitro assays encompass cell-based assays in which cells alive or dead are employed and may also encompass a cell-free assay in which no intact cells are employed.
[0076] The term "IC50" refers to the half maximal inhibitory concentration, i.e. inhibition of 50% of the desired activity. The term "EC50" refers to the drug concentration at which one-half the maximum response is achieved.
[0077] The term "effective amount" or "therapeutically effective amount" refers to that amount of an active pharmaceutical ingredient or combination of active pharmaceutical ingredients as described herein that is sufficient to effect the intended application including, but not limited to, disease treatment. A therapeutically effective amount may vary depending upon the intended application (in vitro or in vivo), or the subject and disease condition being treated (e.g., the weight, age and gender of the subject), the severity of the disease condition, the manner of administration, and other factors which can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art. The term also applies to a dose that will induce a particular response in target cells, (e.g., the reduction of platelet adhesion and/or cell migration). The specific dose will vary depending on the particular compounds chosen, the dosing regimen to be followed, whether the compound is administered in combination with other compounds, timing of administration, the tissue to which it is administered, and the physical delivery system in which the compound is carried.
[0078] A "therapeutic effect" as that term is used herein, encompasses a therapeutic benefit and/or a prophylactic benefit as described above. A prophylactic effect includes delaying or eliminating the appearance of a disease or condition, delaying or eliminating the onset of symptoms of a disease or condition, slowing, halting, or reversing the progression of a disease or condition, or any combination thereof.
[0079] The terms "QD," "qd," or "q.d." means quaque die, once a day, or once daily. The terms "BID," "bid," or "b.i.d." mean bis in die, twice a day, or twice daily. The terms "TID," "tid," or "t.i.d." mean ter in die, three times a day, or three times daily. The terms "QID," "qid," or "q.i.d." mean quater in die, four times a day, or four times daily.
[0080] The term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to salts derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter ions known in the art. Pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts can be formed with inorganic acids and organic acids. Inorganic acids from which salts can be derived include, for example, hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid and phosphoric acid. Organic acids from which salts can be derived include, for example, acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, /?-toluenesulfonic acid and salicylic acid.
Pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts can be formed with inorganic and organic bases. Inorganic bases from which salts can be derived include, for example, sodium, potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium, magnesium, iron, zinc, copper, manganese and aluminum.
Organic bases from which salts can be derived include, for example, primary, secondary, and tertiary amines, substituted amines including naturally occurring substituted amines, cyclic amines and basic ion exchange resins. Specific examples include isopropylamine,
trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, tripropylamine, and ethanolamine. In selected embodiments, the pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salt is chosen from ammonium, potassium, sodium, calcium, and magnesium salts. The term "cocrystal" refers to a molecular complex derived from a number of cocrystal formers known in the art. Unlike a salt, a cocrystal typically does not involve proton transfer between the cocrystal and the drug, and instead involves intermolecular interactions, such as hydrogen bonding, aromatic ring stacking, or dispersive forces, between the cocrystal former and the drug in the crystal structure.
[0081] "Pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" or "pharmaceutically acceptable excipient" is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic, and absorption delaying agents. The use of such media and agents for active pharmaceutical ingredients is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active pharmaceutical ingredient, its use in the therapeutic compositions of the invention is contemplated. Supplementary active ingredients can also be incorporated into the described compositions.
[0082] "Prodrug" is intended to describe a substance that may be converted under
physiological conditions or by solvolysis to a biologically active pharmaceutical ingredient described herein. Thus, the term "prodrug" refers to a precursor of a biologically active compound that is pharmaceutically acceptable. A prodrug may be inactive when administered to a subject, but is converted in vivo to an active pharmaceutical ingredient, for example, by hydrolysis. The prodrug compound often offers the advantages of solubility, tissue compatibility or delayed release in a mammalian organism (see, e.g., H. Bundgaard, Design of Prodrugs, Elsevier, Amsterdam (1985)). The term "prodrug" is also intended to include any covalently bonded carriers, which release the active pharmaceutical ingredient in vivo when administered to a subject. Prodrugs of an active pharmaceutical ingredient, as described herein, may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the active pharmaceutical ingredient in such a way that the modifications are cleaved, either in routine manipulation or in vivo, to yield the active pharmaceutical ingredient. Prodrugs include, for example, compounds wherein a hydroxy, amino or mercapto group is bonded to any group that, when the prodrug of the active
pharmaceutical ingredient is administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxy, free amino or free mercapto group, respectively. Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetates, formates and benzoate derivatives of an alcohol, various ester derivatives of a carboxylic acid, or acetamide, formamide and benzamide derivatives of an amine functional group in the active pharmaceutical ingredient.
[0083] When ranges are used herein to describe, for example, physical or chemical properties such as molecular weight or chemical formulae, all combinations and subcombinations of ranges and specific embodiments therein are intended to be included. Use of the term "about" when referring to a number or a numerical range means that the number or numerical range referred to is an approximation within experimental variability (or within statistical experimental error), and thus the number or numerical range may vary from, for example, between 1% and 15% of the stated number or numerical range. The term "comprising" (and related terms such as "comprise" or "comprises" or "having" or "including") includes those embodiments such as, for example, an embodiment of any composition of matter, method or process that "consist of or "consist essentially of the described features.
[0084] "Alkyl" refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain radical consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms, containing no unsaturation, having from one to ten carbon atoms (e.g., Ci-Cio alkyl). Whenever it appears herein, a numerical range such as "1 to 10" refers to each integer in the given range - e.g., "1 to 10 carbon atoms" means that the alkyl group may consist of 1 carbon atom, 2 carbon atoms, 3 carbon atoms, etc., up to and including 10 carbon atoms, although the definition is also intended to cover the occurrence of the term "alkyl" where no numerical range is specifically designated. Typical alkyl groups include, but are in no way limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl isobutyl, tertiary butyl, pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, septyl, octyl, nonyl and decyl. The alkyl moiety may be attached to the rest of the molecule by a single bond, such as for example, methyl (Me), ethyl (Et), n-propyl (Pr), 1-methylethyl (isopropyl), n-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylethyl (t-butyl) and 3-methylhexyl. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, an alkyl group is optionally substituted by one or more of substituents which are independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -ORa, -SRa, - OC(0)-Ra, -N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, -OC(0)N(Ra)2, -C(0)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)C(0)ORa, - N(Ra)C(0)Ra, -N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2, N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)S(0),Ra (where t is 1 or 2), - S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),N(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2 where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
[0085] "Alkylaryl" refers to an -(alkyl)aryl radical where aryl and alkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for aryl and alkyl respectively.
[0086] "Alkylhetaryl" refers to an -(alkyl)hetaryl radical where hetaryl and alkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for aryl and alkyl respectively. [0087] "Alkylheterocycloalkyl" refers to an -(alkyl) heterocycyl radical where alkyl and heterocycloalkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for heterocycloalkyl and alkyl respectively.
[0088] An "alkene" moiety refers to a group consisting of at least two carbon atoms and at least one carbon-carbon double bond, and an "alkyne" moiety refers to a group consisting of at least two carbon atoms and at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. The alkyl moiety, whether saturated or unsaturated, may be branched, straight chain, or cyclic.
[0089] "Alkenyl" refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain radical group consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms, containing at least one double bond, and having from two to ten carbon atoms (i.e., C2-Cio alkenyl). Whenever it appears herein, a numerical range such as "2 to 10" refers to each integer in the given range - e.g., "2 to 10 carbon atoms" means that the alkenyl group may consist of 2 carbon atoms, 3 carbon atoms, etc., up to and including 10 carbon atoms. The alkenyl moiety may be attached to the rest of the molecule by a single bond, such as for example, ethenyl (i.e., vinyl), prop-l-enyl (i.e., allyl), but-l-enyl, pent-l-enyl and penta-1,4- dienyl. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, an alkenyl group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which are independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -ORa, -SRa, -OC(0)-Ra, - N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, -OC(0)N(Ra)2, -C(0)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)C(0)ORa, -N(Ra)C(0)Ra, -N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2, N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)S(0),Ra (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0)tN(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl,
heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
[0090] "Alkenyl-cycloalkyl" refers to an -(alkenyl)cycloalkyl radical where alkenyl and cycloalkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for alkenyl and cycloalkyl respectively.
[0091] "Alkynyl" refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain radical group consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms, containing at least one triple bond, having from two to ten carbon atoms (i.e. C2-Cio alkynyl). Whenever it appears herein, a numerical range such as "2 to 10" refers to each integer in the given range - e.g., "2 to 10 carbon atoms" means that the alkynyl group may consist of 2 carbon atoms, 3 carbon atoms, etc., up to and including 10 carbon atoms. The alkynyl may be attached to the rest of the molecule by a single bond, for example, ethynyl, propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl and hexynyl. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the
specification, an alkynyl group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -ORa, -SRa, -OC(0)-Ra, -N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, -OC(0)N(Ra)2, - C(0)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)C(0)ORa, -N(Ra)C(0)Ra, -N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2, N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2, - N(Ra)S(0),Ra (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),N(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or
heteroarylalkyl.
[0092] "Alkynyl-cycloalkyl" refers to an -(alkynyl)cycloalkyl radical where alkynyl and cycloalkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for alkynyl and cycloalkyl respectively.
[0093] "Carboxaldehyde" refers to a -(C=0)H radical.
[0094] "Carboxyl" refers to a -(C=0)OH radical.
[0095] "Cyano" refers to a -CN radical.
[0096] "Cycloalkyl" refers to a monocyclic or polycyclic radical that contains only carbon and hydrogen, and may be saturated, or partially unsaturated. Cycloalkyl groups include groups having from 3 to 10 ring atoms (i.e. C2-Cio cycloalkyl). Whenever it appears herein, a numerical range such as "3 to 10" refers to each integer in the given range - e.g., "3 to 10 carbon atoms" means that the cycloalkyl group may consist of 3 carbon atoms, etc., up to and including 10 carbon atoms. Illustrative examples of cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to the following moieties: cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexyl,
cyclohexenyl, cycloseptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl, cyclodecyl, norbornyl, and the like. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, a cycloalkyl group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifiuoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -ORa, -SRa, -OC(0)-Ra, -N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, -OC(0)N(Ra)2, -C(0)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)C(0)ORa, -N(Ra)C(0)Ra,
-N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2, N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)S(0)tRa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0)tN(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl,
heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
[0097] "Cycloalkyl-alkenyl" refers to a -(cycloalkyl)alkenyl radical where cycloalkyl and alkenyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for cycloalkyl and alkenyl, respectively.
[0098] "Cycloalkyl-heterocycloalkyl" refers to a -(cycloalkyl)heterocycloalkyl radical where cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for cycloalkyl and
heterocycloalkyl, respectively.
[0099] "Cycloalkyl-heteroaryl" refers to a -(cycloalkyl)heteroaryl radical where cycloalkyl and heteroaryl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for cycloalkyl and heteroaryl, respectively.
[00100] The term "alkoxy" refers to the group -O-alkyl, including from 1 to 8 carbon atoms of a straight, branched, cyclic configuration and combinations thereof attached to the parent structure through an oxygen. Examples include, but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, cyclopropyloxy and cyclohexyloxy. "Lower alkoxy" refers to alkoxy groups containing one to six carbons.
[00101] The term "substituted alkoxy" refers to alkoxy wherein the alkyl constituent is substituted (i.e., -0-(substituted alkyl)). Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, the alkyl moiety of an alkoxy group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifiuoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -ORa, -SRa, -OC(0)-Ra, -N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, -OC(0)N(Ra)2, - C(0)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)C(0)ORa, -N(Ra)C(0)Ra, -N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2, N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2, - N(Ra)S(0),Ra (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),N(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or
heteroarylalkyl.
[00102] The term "alkoxycarbonyl" refers to a group of the formula (alkoxy)(C=0)- attached through the carbonyl carbon wherein the alkoxy group has the indicated number of carbon atoms. Thus a Ci-C6 alkoxycarbonyl group is an alkoxy group having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms attached through its oxygen to a carbonyl linker. "Lower alkoxycarbonyl" refers to an
alkoxycarbonyl group wherein the alkoxy group is a lower alkoxy group.
[00103] The term "substituted alkoxycarbonyl" refers to the group (substituted alkyl)-O-C(O)- wherein the group is attached to the parent structure through the carbonyl functionality. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, the alkyl moiety of an alkoxycarbonyl group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -ORa, -SRa, - OC(0)-Ra, -N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, -OC(0)N(Ra)2, -C(0)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)C(0)ORa, - N(Ra)C(0)Ra, -N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2, N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)S(0),Ra (where t is 1 or 2), - S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),N(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
[00104] "Acyl" refers to the groups (alkyl)-C(O)-, (aryl)-C(O)-, (heteroaryl)-C(O)-,
(heteroalkyl)-C(O)- and (heterocycloalkyl)-C(O)-, wherein the group is attached to the parent structure through the carbonyl functionality. If the R radical is heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl, the hetero ring or chain atoms contribute to the total number of chain or ring atoms. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, the alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl moiety of the acyl group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which are independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, - ORa, -SRa, -OC(0)-Ra, -N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, -OC(0)N(Ra)2, -C(0)N(Ra)2, - N(Ra)C(0)ORa, -N(Ra)C(0)Ra, -N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2, N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)S(0),Ra (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),N(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
[00105] "Acyloxy" refers to a R(C=0)0- radical wherein R is alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl or heterocycloalkyl, which are as described herein. If the R radical is heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl, the hetero ring or chain atoms contribute to the total number of chain or ring atoms. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, the R of an acyloxy group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifiuoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -ORa, -SRa, - OC(0)-Ra, -N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, -OC(0)N(Ra)2, -C(0)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)C(0)ORa, - N(Ra)C(0)Ra, -N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2, N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)S(0),Ra (where t is 1 or 2), - S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),N(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
[00106] "Amino" or "amine" refers to a -N(Ra)2 radical group, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification. When a -N(Ra)2 group has two Ra substituents other than hydrogen, they can be combined with the nitrogen atom to form a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered ring. For example, -N(Ra)2 is intended to include, but is not limited to, 1-pyrrolidinyl and 4-morpholinyl. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, an amino group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano,
trifluoromethyl, trifiuoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -ORa, -SRa, -OC(0)-Ra, -N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, -OC(0)N(Ra)2, -C(0)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)C(0)ORa, -N(Ra)C(0)Ra,
-N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2, N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)S(0)tRa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0)tN(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl,
heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl. [00107] The term "substituted amino" also refers to N-oxides of the groups -NHRd, and NRdRd each as described above. N-oxides can be prepared by treatment of the corresponding amino group with, for example, hydrogen peroxide or m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid.
[00108] "Amide" or "amido" refers to a chemical moiety with formula -C(0)N(R)2 or
-NHC(0)R, where R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl (bonded through a ring carbon) and heteroalicyclic (bonded through a ring carbon), each of which moiety may itself be optionally substituted. The R2 of -N(R)2 of the amide may optionally be taken together with the nitrogen to which it is attached to form a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7- membered ring. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, an amido group is optionally substituted independently by one or more of the substituents as described herein for alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl. An amide may be an amino acid or a peptide molecule attached to a compound of Formula (I), thereby forming a prodrug. The procedures and specific groups to make such amides are known to those of skill in the art and can readily be found in seminal sources such as T. H. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York (1999).
[00109] "Aromatic" or "aryl" or "Ar" refers to an aromatic radical with six to ten ring atoms {e.g., C6-Cio aromatic or C6-Cio aryl) which has at least one ring having a conjugated pi electron system which is carbocyclic {e.g., phenyl, fluorenyl, and naphthyl). Bivalent radicals formed from substituted benzene derivatives and having the free valences at ring atoms are named as substituted phenylene radicals. Bivalent radicals derived from univalent poly cyclic hydrocarbon radicals whose names end in "-yl" by removal of one hydrogen atom from the carbon atom with the free valence are named by adding "-idene" to the name of the corresponding univalent radical, e.g., a naphthyl group with two points of attachment is termed naphthylidene. Whenever it appears herein, a numerical range such as "6 to 10" refers to each integer in the given range; e.g., "6 to 10 ring atoms" means that the aryl group may consist of 6 ring atoms, 7 ring atoms, etc., up to and including 10 ring atoms. The term includes monocyclic or fused-ring polycyclic {i.e., rings which share adjacent pairs of ring atoms) groups. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, an aryl moiety is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which are independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -ORa, -SRa, -OC(0)-Ra, -N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, -OC(0)N(Ra)2, -C(0)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)C(0)ORa, -N(Ra)C(0)Ra, -N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2, N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2,
-N(Ra)S(0),Ra (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),N(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or
heteroarylalkyl.
[00110] "Aralkyl" or "arylalkyl" refers to an (aryl)alkyl-radical where aryl and alkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for aryl and alkyl respectively.
[00111] "Ester" refers to a chemical radical of formula -COOR, where R is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl (bonded through a ring carbon) and heteroalicyclic (bonded through a ring carbon). The procedures and specific groups to make esters are known to those of skill in the art and can readily be found in seminal sources such as T. H. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York (1999). Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, an ester group is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, trimethylsilanyl, -ORa, -SRa, - OC(0)-Ra, -N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, -OC(0)N(Ra)2, -C(0)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)C(0)ORa, - N(Ra)C(0)Ra, -N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2, N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)S(0),Ra (where t is 1 or 2), - S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),N(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
[00112] "Fluoroalkyl" refers to an alkyl radical, as defined above, that is substituted by one or more fluoro radicals, as defined above, for example, trifluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, 2,2,2- trifluoroethyl, l-fluoromethyl-2-fluoroethyl, and the like. The alkyl part of the fluoroalkyl radical may be optionally substituted as defined above for an alkyl group.
[00113] "Halo," "halide," or, alternatively, "halogen" is intended to mean fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo. The terms "haloalkyl," "haloalkenyl," "haloalkynyl" and "haloalkoxy" include alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl and alkoxy structures that are substituted with one or more halo groups or with combinations thereof. For example, the terms "fluoroalkyl" and "fluoroalkoxy" include haloalkyl and haloalkoxy groups, respectively, in which the halo is fluorine.
[00114] "Heteroalkyl," "heteroalkenyl," and "heteroalkynyl" include optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl radicals and which have one or more skeletal chain atoms selected from an atom other than carbon, e.g., oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus or combinations thereof. A numerical range may be given - e.g., C1-C4 heteroalkyl which refers to the chain length in total, which in this example is 4 atoms long. A heteroalkyl group may be substituted with one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, nitro, oxo, thioxo, trimethylsilanyl, -ORa, -SRa, -OC(0)-Ra, -N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, - OC(0)N(Ra)2, -C(0)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)C(0)ORa, -N(Ra)C(0)Ra, -N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2,
N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)S(0),Ra (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2),
-S(0)tN(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
[00115] "Heteroalkylaryl" refers to an -(heteroalkyl)aryl radical where heteroalkyl and aryl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for heteroalkyl and aryl, respectively.
[00116] "Heteroalkylheteroaryl" refers to an -(heteroalkyl)heteroaryl radical where heteroalkyl and heteroaryl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for heteroalkyl and heteroaryl, respectively.
[00117] "Heteroalkylheterocycloalkyl" refers to an -(heteroalkyl)heterocycloalkyl radical where heteroalkyl and heterocycloalkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for heteroalkyl and
heterocycloalkyl, respectively.
[00118] "Heteroalkylcycloalkyl" refers to an -(heteroalkyl)cycloalkyl radical where heteroalkyl and cycloalkyl are as disclosed herein and which are optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described as suitable substituents for heteroalkyl and cycloalkyl, respectively. [00119] "Heteroaryl" or "heteroaromatic" or "HetAr" refers to a 5- to 18-membered aromatic radical (e.g., C5-C13 heteroaryl) that includes one or more ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, and which may be a monocyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic or tetracyclic ring system. Whenever it appears herein, a numerical range such as "5 to 18" refers to each integer in the given range - e.g., "5 to 18 ring atoms" means that the heteroaryl group may consist of 5 ring atoms, 6 ring atoms, etc., up to and including 18 ring atoms. Bivalent radicals derived from univalent heteroaryl radicals whose names end in "-yl" by removal of one hydrogen atom from the atom with the free valence are named by adding "-idene" to the name of the corresponding univalent radical - e.g., a pyridyl group with two points of attachment is a pyridylidene. A N-containing "heteroaromatic" or "heteroaryl" moiety refers to an aromatic group in which at least one of the skeletal atoms of the ring is a nitrogen atom. The polycyclic heteroaryl group may be fused or non-fused. The heteroatom(s) in the heteroaryl radical are optionally oxidized. One or more nitrogen atoms, if present, are optionally quaternized. The heteroaryl may be attached to the rest of the molecule through any atom of the ring(s). Examples of heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, azepinyl, acridinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzindolyl, 1,3-benzodioxolyl, benzofuranyl, benzooxazolyl, benzo[<i]thiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, benzo[£][l,4]dioxepinyl, benzo[£][l,4]oxazinyl, 1 ,4-benzodioxanyl, benzonaphthofuranyl, benzoxazolyl, benzodioxolyl, benzodioxinyl, benzoxazolyl, benzopyranyl, benzopyranonyl, benzofuranyl, benzofuranonyl, benzofurazanyl, benzothiazolyl, benzothienyl(benzothiophenyl), benzothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidinyl, benzotriazolyl, benzo[4,6]imidazo[l,2-a]pyridinyl, carbazolyl, cinnolinyl, cyclopenta[d]pyrimidinyl, 6,7-dihydro-5H-cyclopenta[4,5]thieno[2,3-<i]pyrimidinyl, 5,6-dihydrobenzo[A]quinazolinyl, 5,6-dihydrobenzo[A]cinnolinyl, 6,7-dihydro-5H- benzo[6,7]cyclohepta[l,2-c]pyridazinyl, dibenzofuranyl, dibenzothiophenyl, furanyl, furazanyl, furanonyl, furo[3,2-c]pyridinyl, 5,6,7,8,9,10-hexahydrocycloocta[d]pyrimidinyl, 5,6,7,8,9,10- hexahydrocycloocta[<i]pyridazinyl, 5,6,7,8,9,10-hexahydrocycloocta[d]pyridinyl, isothiazolyl, imidazolyl, indazolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, isoindolyl, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, isoquinolyl, indolizinyl, isoxazolyl, 5,8-methano-5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinazolinyl, naphthyridinyl, 1,6- naphthyridinonyl, oxadiazolyl, 2-oxoazepinyl, oxazolyl, oxiranyl, 5,6,6a,7,8,9,10,10a- octahydrobenzo[A]quinazolinyl, 1 -phenyl- lH-pyrrolyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl,
phenoxazinyl, phthalazinyl, pteridinyl, purinyl, pyranyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolo[3,4- d]pyrimidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrido[3,2-d]pyrimidinyl, pyrido[3,4-d]pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrrolyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, 5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinazolinyl, 5,6,7,8-tetrahydrobenzo[4,5]thieno[2,3- d]pyrimidinyl, 6,7,8,9-tetrahydro-5H-cyclohepta[4,5]thieno[2,3-<i]pyrimidinyl, 5,6,7,8- tetrahydropyrido[4,5-c]pyridazinyl, thiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thiapyranyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, triazinyl, thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidinyl, thieno[3,2-d]pyrimidinyl, thieno[2,3-c]pyridinyl, and thiophenyl (i.e. thienyl). Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, a heteroaryl moiety is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which are independently: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, nitro, oxo, thioxo, trimethylsilanyl, -ORa, -SRa, -OC(O)- Ra, -N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, -OC(0)N(Ra)2, -C(0)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)C(0)ORa, -N(Ra)C(0)Ra, -N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2, N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)S(0),Ra (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0)tN(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl,
heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
[00120] Substituted heteroaryl also includes ring systems substituted with one or more oxide (-0-) substituents, such as, for example, pyridinyl N-oxides.
[00121] "Heteroarylalkyl" refers to a moiety having an aryl moiety, as described herein, connected to an alkylene moiety, as described herein, wherein the connection to the remainder of the molecule is through the alkylene group.
[00122] "Heterocycloalkyl" refers to a stable 3- to 18-membered non-aromatic ring radical that comprises two to twelve carbon atoms and from one to six heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Whenever it appears herein, a numerical range such as "3 to 18" refers to each integer in the given range - e.g., "3 to 18 ring atoms" means that the heterocycloalkyl group may consist of 3 ring atoms, 4 ring atoms, etc., up to and including 18 ring atoms. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, the heterocycloalkyl radical is a monocyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic or tetracyclic ring system, which may include fused or bridged ring systems. The heteroatoms in the heterocycloalkyl radical may be optionally oxidized. One or more nitrogen atoms, if present, are optionally quaternized. The heterocycloalkyl radical is partially or fully saturated. The heterocycloalkyl may be attached to the rest of the molecule through any atom of the ring(s). Examples of such heterocycloalkyl radicals include, but are not limited to, dioxolanyl, thienyl[l,3]dithianyl, decahydroisoquinolyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, octahydroindolyl, octahydroisoindolyl, 2- oxopiperazinyl, 2-oxopiperidinyl, 2-oxopyrrolidinyl, oxazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, 4- piperidonyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, quinuclidinyl, thiazolidinyl, tetrahydrofuryl, trithianyl, tetrahydropyranyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiamorpholinyl, 1-oxo-thiomorpholinyl, and 1,1-dioxo- thiomorpholinyl. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, a heterocycloalkyl moiety is optionally substituted by one or more substituents which independently are: alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, hydroxy, halo, cyano, nitro, oxo, thioxo, trimethylsilanyl, -ORa, -SRa, -OC(O)- Ra, -N(Ra)2, -C(0)Ra, -C(0)ORa, -OC(0)N(Ra)2, -C(0)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)C(0)ORa, -N(Ra)C(0)Ra, -N(Ra)C(0)N(Ra)2, N(Ra)C(NRa)N(Ra)2, -N(Ra)S(0),Ra (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0),ORa (where t is 1 or 2), -S(0)tN(Ra)2 (where t is 1 or 2), or P03(Ra)2, where each Ra is independently hydrogen, alkyl, fluoroalkyl, carbocyclyl, carbocyclylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl,
heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl.
[00123] "Heterocycloalkyl" also includes bicyclic ring systems wherein one non-aromatic ring, usually with 3 to 7 ring atoms, contains at least 2 carbon atoms in addition to 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen, as well as combinations comprising at least one of the foregoing heteroatoms; and the other ring, usually with 3 to 7 ring atoms, optionally contains 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen and is not aromatic.
[00124] "Isomers" are different compounds that have the same molecular formula.
"Stereoisomers" are isomers that differ only in the way the atoms are arranged in space - i.e., having a different stereochemical configuration. "Enantiomers" are a pair of stereoisomers that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other. A 1 : 1 mixture of a pair of enantiomers is a "racemic" mixture. The term "(±)" is used to designate a racemic mixture where appropriate. "Diastereoisomers" are stereoisomers that have at least two asymmetric atoms, but which are not mirror-images of each other. The absolute stereochemistry is specified according to the Cahn- Ingold-Prelog R-S system. When a compound is a pure enantiomer the stereochemistry at each chiral carbon can be specified by either R or S. Resolved compounds whose absolute configuration is unknown can be designated (+) or (-) depending on the direction (dextro- or levorotatory) which they rotate plane polarized light at the wavelength of the sodium D line. Certain of the compounds described herein contain one or more asymmetric centers and can thus give rise to enantiomers, diastereomers, and other stereoisomeric forms that can be defined, in terms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)- or (S)-. The present chemical entities, pharmaceutical compositions and methods are meant to include all such possible isomers, including racemic mixtures, optically pure forms and intermediate mixtures. Optically active (R)- and (5)-isomers can be prepared using chiral synthons or chiral reagents, or resolved using conventional techniques. When the compounds described herein contain olefmic double bonds or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that the compounds include both E and Z geometric isomers.
[00125] "Enantiomeric purity" as used herein refers to the relative amounts, expressed as a percentage, of the presence of a specific enantiomer relative to the other enantiomer. For example, if a compound, which may potentially have an (R)- or an (5)-isomeric configuration, is present as a racemic mixture, the enantiomeric purity is about 50% with respect to either the (R)- or (iS)-isomer. If that compound has one isomeric form predominant over the other, for example, 80%) (S)- and 20%> (R)-, the enantiomeric purity of the compound with respect to the (5)-isomeric form is 80%. The enantiomeric purity of a compound can be determined in a number of ways known in the art, including but not limited to chromatography using a chiral support,
polarimetric measurement of the rotation of polarized light, nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy using chiral shift reagents which include but are not limited to lanthanide containing chiral complexes or the Pirkle alcohol, or derivatization of a compounds using a chiral compound such as Mosher's acid followed by chromatography or nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy.
[00126] "Moiety" refers to a specific segment or functional group of a molecule. Chemical moieties are often recognized chemical entities embedded in or appended to a molecule.
[00127] 'Nitro" refers to the -N02 radical.
[00128] Oxa" refers to the -O- radical.
[00129] Oxo" refers to the =0 radical. [00130] "Tautomers" are structurally distinct isomers that interconvert by tautomerization. "Tautomerization" is a form of isomerization and includes prototropic or proton-shift tautomerization, which is considered a subset of acid-base chemistry. "Prototropic
tautomerization" or "proton-shift tautomerization" involves the migration of a proton
accompanied by changes in bond order, often the interchange of a single bond with an adjacent double bond. Where tautomerization is possible (e.g. in solution), a chemical equilibrium of tautomers can be reached. An example of tautomerization is keto-enol tautomerization. A specific example of keto-enol tautomerization is the interconversion of pentane-2,4-dione and 4- hydroxypent-3-en-2-one tautomers. Another example of tautomerization is phenol-keto tautomerization. A specific example of phenol-keto tautomerization is the interconversion of pyridin-4-ol and pyridin-4(lH)-one tautomers.
[00131] The terms "enantiomerically enriched," "enantiomerically pure," and "non-racemic," as used herein, refer to compositions in which the percent by weight of one enantiomer is greater than the amount of that one enantiomer in a control mixture of the racemic composition (e.g., greater than 1 : 1 by weight). For example, an enantiomerically enriched preparation of the (S)- enantiomer, means a preparation of the compound having greater than 50% by weight of the (S)- enantiomer relative to the (i?)-enantiomer, such as at least 75% by weight, such as at least 80% by weight. In some embodiments, the enrichment can be significantly greater than 80% by weight, providing a "substantially enantiomerically enriched," "substantially enantiomerically pure," or a "substantially non-racemic" preparation, which refers to preparations of compositions which have at least 85% by weight of one enantiomer relative to the other enantiomer, such as at least 90%) by weight, and such as at least 95% by weight. The terms "diastereomerically enriched" and "diastereomerically pure," as used herein, refer to compositions in which the percent by weight of one diastereomer is greater than the amount of that one diastereomer in a control mixture of diastereomers. In some embodiments, the enrichment can be significantly greater than 80% by weight, providing a "substantially diastereomerically enriched" or
"substantially diastereomerically pure" preparation, which refers to preparations of compositions which have at least 85% by weight of one diastereomer relative to other diastereomers, such as at least 90%) by weight, and such as at least 95% by weight. [00132] In preferred embodiments, the enantiomerically enriched composition has a higher potency with respect to therapeutic utility per unit mass than does the racemic mixture of that composition. Enantiomers can be isolated from mixtures by methods known to those skilled in the art, including chiral high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) and the formation and crystallization of chiral salts; or preferred enantiomers can be prepared by asymmetric syntheses. See, for example, Jacques, et al., Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions, Wiley Interscience, New York (1981); E. L. Eliel and S. H. Wilen, Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds, Wiley- Interscience, New York (1994).
[00133] A "leaving group or atom" is any group or atom that will, under selected reaction conditions, cleave from the starting material, thus promoting reaction at a specified site.
Examples of such groups, unless otherwise specified, include halogen atoms and mesyloxy, p- nitrobenzensulphonyloxy and tosyloxy groups.
[00134] "Protecting group" is intended to mean a group that selectively blocks one or more reactive sites in a multifunctional compound such that a chemical reaction can be carried out selectively on another unprotected reactive site and the group can then be readily removed after the selective reaction is complete. A variety of protecting groups are disclosed, for example, in T. H. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York (1999).
[00135] "Solvate" refers to a compound in physical association with one or more molecules of a pharmaceutically acceptable solvent.
[00136] "Substituted" means that the referenced group may have attached one or more additional moieties individually and independently selected from, for example, acyl, alkyl, alkylaryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, aryl, carbohydrate, carbonate, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, mercapto, alkylthio, arylthio, cyano, halo, carbonyl, ester,
thiocarbonyl, isocyanato, thiocyanato, isothiocyanato, nitro, oxo, perhaloalkyl, perfluoroalkyl, phosphate, silyl, sulfmyl, sulfonyl, sulfonamidyl, sulfoxyl, sulfonate, urea, and amino, including mono- and di-substituted amino groups, and protected derivatives thereof. The substituents themselves may be substituted, for example, a cycloalkyl substituent may itself have a halide substituent at one or more of its ring carbons. [00137] "Sulfanyl" refers to groups that include -S-(optionally substituted alkyl), -S -(optionally substituted aryl), -S-(optionally substituted heteroaryl) and -S -(optionally substituted
heterocycloalkyl) .
[00138] "Sulfmyl" refers to groups that include -S(0)-H, -S(0)-(optionally substituted alkyl), -S(0)-(optionally substituted amino), -S(0)-(optionally substituted aryl), -S(0)-(optionally substituted heteroaryl) and -S(0)-(optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl).
[00139] "Sulfonyl" refers to groups that include -S(02)-H, -S(02)-(optionally substituted alkyl), -S(02)-(optionally substituted amino), -S(02)-(optionally substituted aryl), -S(02)-(optionally substituted heteroaryl), and -S(02)-(optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl).
[00140] "Sulfonamidyl" or "sulfonamido" refers to a -S(=0)2-NRR radical, where each R is selected independently from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl (bonded through a ring carbon) and heteroalicyclic (bonded through a ring carbon). The R groups in -NRR of the -S(=0)2-NRR radical may be taken together with the nitrogen to which it is attached to form a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered ring. A sulfonamido group is optionally substituted by one or more of the substituents described for alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, respectively.
[00141] "Sulfoxyl" refers to a -S(=0)2OH radical.
[00142] "Sulfonate" refers to a -S(=0)2-OR radical, where R is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl (bonded through a ring carbon) and
heteroalicyclic (bonded through a ring carbon). A sulfonate group is optionally substituted on R by one or more of the substituents described for alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, respectively.
[00143] Compounds of the invention also include crystalline and amorphous forms of those compounds, including, for example, polymorphs, pseudopolymorphs, solvates, hydrates, unsolvated polymorphs (including anhydrates), conformational polymorphs, and amorphous forms of the compounds, as well as mixtures thereof. "Crystalline form" and "polymorph" are intended to include all crystalline and amorphous forms of the compound, including, for example, polymorphs, pseudopolymorphs, solvates, hydrates, unsolvated polymorphs (including anhydrates), conformational polymorphs, and amorphous forms, as well as mixtures thereof, unless a particular crystalline or amorphous form is referred to.
[00144] Compounds of the invention also include antibodies. The terms "antibody" and its plural form "antibodies" refer to whole immunoglobulins and any antigen-binding fragment ("antigen-binding portion") or single chains thereof. An "antibody" further refers to a glycoprotein comprising at least two heavy (H) chains and two light (L) chains inter-connected by disulfide bonds, or an antigen-binding portion thereof. Each heavy chain is comprised of a heavy chain variable region (abbreviated herein as VH) and a heavy chain constant region. The heavy chain constant region is comprised of three domains, CHI, CH2 and CH3. Each light chain is comprised of a light chain variable region (abbreviated herein as VL) and a light chain constant region. The light chain constant region is comprised of one domain, CL. The VH and VL regions of an antibody may be further subdivided into regions of hypervariability, which are referred to as complementarity determining regions (CDR) or hypervariable regions (HVR), and which can be interspersed with regions that are more conserved, termed framework regions (FR). Each VH and VL is composed of three CDRs and four FRs, arranged from amino-terminus to carboxy-terminus in the following order: FR1, CDR1, FR2, CDR2, FR3, CDR3, FR4. The variable regions of the heavy and light chains contain a binding domain that interacts with an antigen epitope or epitopes. The constant regions of the antibodies may mediate the binding of the immunoglobulin to host tissues or factors, including various cells of the immune system (e.g., effector cells) and the first component (Clq) of the classical complement system.
[00145] The terms "monoclonal antibody," "mAb," "monoclonal antibody composition," or their plural forms refer to a preparation of antibody molecules of single molecular composition. A monoclonal antibody composition displays a single binding specificity and affinity for a particular epitope. Monoclonal antibodies specific to CD20 can be made using knowledge and skill in the art of injecting test subjects with CD20 antigen and then isolating hybridomas expressing antibodies having the desired sequence or functional characteristics. DNA encoding the monoclonal antibodies is readily isolated and sequenced using conventional procedures (e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of the monoclonal antibodies). The hybridoma cells serve as a preferred source of such DNA. Once isolated, the DNA may be placed into expression vectors, which are then transfected into host cells such as E. coli cells, simian COS cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulin protein, to obtain the synthesis of monoclonal antibodies in the recombinant host cells. Recombinant production of antibodies will be described in more detail below.
[00146] The terms "antigen-binding portion" or "antigen-binding fragment" of an antibody (or simply "antibody portion"), as used herein, refers to one or more fragments of an antibody that retain the ability to specifically bind to an antigen such as CD20. It has been shown that the antigen-binding function of an antibody can be performed by fragments of a full-length antibody. Examples of binding fragments encompassed within the term "antigen-binding portion" of an antibody include (i) a Fab fragment, a monovalent fragment consisting of the VL, VH, CL and CHI domains; (ii) a F(ab')2 fragment, a bivalent fragment comprising two Fab fragments linked by a disulfide bridge at the hinge region; (iii) a Fd fragment consisting of the VH and CHI domains; (iv) a Fv fragment consisting of the VL and VH domains of a single arm of an antibody, (v) a domain antibody (dAb) fragment (Ward et al, Nature, 1989, 341, 544-546), which may consist of a VH or a VL domain; and (vi) an isolated complementarity determining region (CDR). Furthermore, although the two domains of the Fv fragment, VL and VH, are coded for by separate genes, they can be joined, using recombinant methods, by a synthetic linker that enables them to be made as a single protein chain in which the VL and VH regions pair to form monovalent molecules known as single chain Fv (scFv); see, for example, Bird et al, Science 1988, 242, 423-426; and Huston et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 1988, 85, 5879-5883). Such scFv chain antibodies are also intended to be encompassed within the terms "antigen-binding portion" or "antigen-binding fragment" of an antibody. These antibody fragments are obtained using conventional techniques known to those with skill in the art, and the fragments are screened for utility in the same manner as are intact antibodies.
[00147] The term "human antibody," as used herein, is intended to include antibodies having variable regions in which both the framework and CDR regions are derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences. Furthermore, if the antibody contains a constant region, the constant region also is derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences. The human antibodies of the invention may include amino acid residues not encoded by human germline immunoglobulin sequences (e.g., mutations introduced by random or site-specific mutagenesis in vitro or by somatic mutation in vivo). The term "human antibody", as used herein, is not intended to include antibodies in which CDR sequences derived from the germline of another mammalian species, such as a mouse, have been grafted onto human framework sequences.
[00148] The term "human monoclonal antibody" refers to antibodies displaying a single binding specificity which have variable regions in which both the framework and CDR regions are derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences. In one embodiment, the human monoclonal antibodies are produced by a hybridoma which includes a B cell obtained from a transgenic nonhuman animal, e.g., a transgenic mouse, having a genome comprising a human heavy chain transgene and a light chain transgene fused to an immortalized cell.
[00149] The term "recombinant human antibody", as used herein, includes all human antibodies that are prepared, expressed, created or isolated by recombinant means, such as (a) antibodies isolated from an animal (e.g., a mouse) that is transgenic or transchromosomal for human immunoglobulin genes or a hybridoma prepared therefrom (described further below), (b) antibodies isolated from a host cell transformed to express the human antibody, e.g., from a transfectoma, (c) antibodies isolated from a recombinant, combinatorial human antibody library, and (d) antibodies prepared, expressed, created or isolated by any other means that involve splicing of human immunoglobulin gene sequences to other DNA sequences. Such recombinant human antibodies have variable regions in which the framework and CDR regions are derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences. In certain embodiments, however, such recombinant human antibodies can be subjected to in vitro mutagenesis (or, when an animal transgenic for human Ig sequences is used, in vivo somatic mutagenesis) and thus the amino acid sequences of the VH and VL regions of the recombinant antibodies are sequences that, while derived from and related to human germline VH and VL sequences, may not naturally exist within the human antibody germline repertoire in vivo.
[00150] As used herein, "isotype" refers to the antibody class (e.g., IgM or IgGl) that is encoded by the heavy chain constant region genes.
[00151] The phrases "an antibody recognizing an antigen" and "an antibody specific for an antigen" are used interchangeably herein with the term "an antibody which binds specifically to an antigen." [00152] The term "human antibody derivatives" refers to any modified form of the human antibody, e.g., a conjugate of the antibody and another agent or antibody. The term "conjugate" or "immunoconjugate" refers to an antibody, or a fragment thereof, conjugated to a therapeutic moiety, such as a bacterial toxin, a cytotoxic drug or a radionuclide-containing toxin. Toxic moieties can be conjugated to antibodies of the invention using methods available in the art.
[00153] The terms "humanized antibody," "humanized antibodies," and "humanized" are intended to refer to antibodies in which CDR sequences derived from the germline of another mammalian species, such as a mouse, have been grafted onto human framework sequences. Additional framework region modifications may be made within the human framework sequences. Humanized forms of non-human (for example, murine) antibodies are chimeric antibodies that contain minimal sequence derived from non-human immunoglobulin. For the most part, humanized antibodies are human immunoglobulins (recipient antibody) in which residues from a hypervariable region of the recipient are replaced by residues from a 15 hypervariable region of a non-human species (donor antibody) such as mouse, rat, rabbit or nonhuman primate having the desired specificity, affinity, and capacity. In some instances, Fv framework region (FR) residues of the human immunoglobulin are replaced by corresponding non-human residues. Furthermore, humanized antibodies may comprise residues that are not found in the recipient antibody or in the donor antibody. These modifications are made to further refine antibody performance. In general, the humanized antibody will comprise substantially all of at least one, and typically two, variable domains, in which all or substantially all of the hypervariable loops correspond to those of a non-human immunoglobulin and all or substantially all of the FR regions are those of a human immunoglobulin sequence. The humanized antibody optionally also will comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin constant region (Fc), typically that of a human immunoglobulin. For further details, see Jones et al, Nature 1986, 321, 522-525; Riechmann et al, Nature 1988, 332, 323-329; and Presta, Curr. Op. Struct. Biol. 1992, 2, 593-596.
[00154] The term "chimeric antibody" is intended to refer to antibodies in which the variable region sequences are derived from one species and the constant region sequences are derived from another species, such as an antibody in which the variable region sequences are derived from a mouse antibody and the constant region sequences are derived from a human antibody. [00155] A "diabody" is a small antibody fragment with two antigen-binding sites. The fragment comprises a heavy chain variable domain (VH) connected to a light chain variable domain (VL) in the same polypeptide chain (VH-VL or VL-VH). By using a linker that is too short to allow pairing between the two domains on the same chain, the domains are forced to pair with the complementary domains of another chain and create two antigen-binding sites. Diabodies are described more fully in, e.g., European Patent No. EP 404,097, International Patent
Publication No. WO 93/11161; and Bolliger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 1993, 90, 6444- 6448.
[00156] The term "glycosylation" refers to a modified derivative of an antibody. An
aglycoslated antibody lacks glycosylation. Glycosylation can be altered to, for example, increase the affinity of the antibody for antigen. Such carbohydrate modifications can be accomplished by, for example, altering one or more sites of glycosylation within the antibody sequence. For example, one or more amino acid substitutions can be made that result in elimination of one or more variable region framework glycosylation sites to thereby eliminate glycosylation at that site. Aglycosylation may increase the affinity of the antibody for antigen, as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,714,350 and 6,350,861. Additionally or alternatively, an antibody can be made that has an altered type of glycosylation, such as a hypofucosylated antibody having reduced amounts of fucosyl residues or an antibody having increased bisecting GlcNac structures. Such altered glycosylation patterns have been demonstrated to increase the ability of antibodies. Such carbohydrate modifications can be accomplished by, for example, expressing the antibody in a host cell with altered glycosylation machinery. Cells with altered glycosylation machinery have been described in the art and can be used as host cells in which to express recombinant antibodies of the invention to thereby produce an antibody with altered glycosylation. For example, the cell lines Ms704, Ms705, and Ms709 lack the fucosyltransferase gene, FUT8 (alpha (1,6) fucosyltransferase), such that antibodies expressed in the Ms704, Ms705, and Ms709 cell lines lack fucose on their carbohydrates. The Ms704, Ms705, and Ms709 FUT8-/- cell lines were created by the targeted disruption of the FUT8 gene in CHO/DG44 cells using two replacement vectors (see e.g. U.S. Patent Publication No. 2004/0110704 or Yamane-Ohnuki, et al., Biotechnol. Bioeng., 2004, 87, 614-622). As another example, European Patent No. EP 1,176,195 describes a cell line with a functionally disrupted FUT8 gene, which encodes a fucosyl transferase, such that antibodies expressed in such a cell line exhibit hypofucosylation by reducing or eliminating the alpha 1,6 bond-related enzyme, and also describes cell lines which have a low enzyme activity for adding fucose to the N-acetylglucosamine that binds to the Fc region of the antibody or does not have the enzyme activity, for example the rat myeloma cell line YB2/0 (ATCC CRL 1662). International Patent Publication WO 03/035835 describes a variant CHO cell line, Lec 13 cells, with reduced ability to attach fucose to Asn(297)-linked carbohydrates, also resulting in hypofucosylation of antibodies expressed in that host cell (see also Shields, et al., J. Biol. Chem. 2002, 277, 26733-26740. International Patent Publication WO 99/54342 describes cell lines engineered to express glycoprotein-modifying glycosyl transferases (e.g., beta(l,4)-N-acetylglucosaminyltransferase III (GnTIII)) such that antibodies expressed in the engineered cell lines exhibit increased bisecting GlcNac structures which results in increased ADCC activity of the antibodies (see also Umana, et ah, Nat. Biotech. 1999, 17, 176-180).
Alternatively, the fucose residues of the antibody may be cleaved off using a fucosidase enzyme. For example, the fucosidase alpha-L-fucosidase removes fucosyl residues from antibodies as described in Tarentino, et ah, Biochem. 1975, 14, 5516-5523.
[00157] "Pegylation" refers to a modified antibody, or a fragment thereof, that typically is reacted with polyethylene glycol (PEG), such as a reactive ester or aldehyde derivative of PEG, under conditions in which one or more PEG groups become attached to the antibody or antibody fragment. Pegylation may, for example, increase the biological (e.g., serum) half life of the antibody. Preferably, the pegylation is carried out via an acylation reaction or an alkylation reaction with a reactive PEG molecule (or an analogous reactive water-soluble polymer). As used herein, the term "polyethylene glycol" is intended to encompass any of the forms of PEG that have been used to derivatize other proteins, such as mono (Ci-Cio) alkoxy- or aryloxy- poly ethylene glycol or polyethylene glycol-maleimide. The antibody to be pegylated may be an aglycosylated antibody. Methods for pegylation are known in the art and can be applied to the antibodies of the invention. See, for example, European Patent Nos. EP 0154316 and EP
0401384.
[00158] As used herein, an antibody that "specifically binds to human CD20" is intended to refer to an antibody that binds to human CD20 with a KD of 1 x 10 7 M or less, more preferably 5X 10 8 M or less, more preferably 1 x 10 8 M or less, more preferably 5X 10 9 M or less.
[00159] The term "radioisotope-labeled complex" refers to both non-covalent and covalent attachment of a radioactive isotope, such as 90Y, mIn, or 131I, to an antibody.
[00160] The term "biosimilar" means a biological product that is highly similar to a U.S.
licensed reference biological product notwithstanding minor differences in clinically inactive components, and for which there are no clinically meaningful differences between the biological product and the reference product in terms of the safety, purity, and potency of the product. Furthermore, a similar biological or "biosimilar" medicine is a biological medicine that is similar to another biological medicine that has already been authorized for use by the European
Medicines Agency. The term "biosimilar" is also used synonymously by other national and regional regulatory agencies. Biological products or biological medicines are medicines that are made by or derived from a biological source, such as a bacterium or yeast. They can consist of relatively small molecules such as human insulin or erythropoietin, or complex molecules such as monoclonal antibodies. For example, if the reference anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is rituximab, an anti-CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to rituximab is a "biosimilar to" rituximab or is a "biosimilar thereof rituximab.
BT Inhibitors
[00161] In an embodiment, the BTK inhibitor is a compound of Formula (I):
Figure imgf000041_0001
Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
wherein:
X is CH, N, O or S;
Y is C(R6), N, O or S;
Z is CH, N or bond;
A is CH or N;
Bi is N or C(R7);
B2 is N or C(R8);
B3 is N or C(R9);
Figure imgf000042_0001
Ri is Ri iC(=0), Ri2S(=0), Ri3S(=0)2 or (Ci_6)alkyl optionally substituted with Ri4;
R2 is H, (Ci_3)alkyl or (C3_7)cycloalkyl;
R3 is H, (Ci_6)alkyl or (C3_7)cycloalkyl); or
R2 and R3 form, together with the N and C atom they are attached to, a (C3_7)heterocycloalkyl optionally substituted with one or more fluorine, hydroxyl, (Ci_3)alkyl, (Ci_3)alkoxy or oxo; R4 is H or (Ci_3)alkyl;
R5 is H, halogen, cyano, (Ci_4)alkyl, (Ci_3)alkoxy, (C3_6)cycloalkyl, any alkyl group of which is optionally substituted with one or more halogen; or R5 is (C6-io)aryl or (C2_
6)heterocycloalkyl;
Re is H or (Ci_3)alkyl; or
R5 and R6 together may form a (C3_7)cycloalkenyl or (C2_6)heterocycloalkenyl, each optionally substituted with (Ci_3)alkyl or one or more halogens;
R7 is H, halogen, CF3, (Ci_3)alkyl or (Ci_3)alkoxy;
Rg is H, halogen, CF3, (Ci_3)alkyl or (Ci_3)alkoxy; or
R7 and Rg together with the carbon atoms they are attached to, form (C6-io)aryl or (Ci_
9)heteroaryl;
R9 is H, halogen, (Ci_3)alkyl or (Ci_3)alkoxy;
Rio is H, halogen, (Ci_3)alkyl or (Ci_3)alkoxy;
R11 is independently selected from the group consisting of (Ci_6)alkyl, (C2_6)alkenyl and (C2_ 6)alkynyl, where each alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (Ci_4)alkyl, (C3_7)cycloalkyl, [(Ci_4)alkyl]amino, di[(Ci_4)alkyl]amino, (Ci_3)alkoxy, (C3_7)cycloalkoxy, (Ce-io)aryl and (C3_ 7)heterocycloalkyl; or Rn is (Ci_3)alkyl-C(0)-S-(Ci_3)alkyl; or
Rii is (Ci_5)heteroaryl optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen or cyano;
Ri2 and Ri3 are independently selected from the group consisting of (C2_6)alkenyl or (C2- 6)alkynyl, both optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (Ci_4)alkyl, (C3_7)cycloalkyl, [(Ci_4)alkyl]amino, di[(Ci_4)alkyl]amino, (Ci_3)alkoxy, (C3_7)cycloalkoxy, (C6_io)aryl and (C3_7)heterocycloalkyl; or a (Ci_5)heteroaryl optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen and cyano; and
Ri4 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, (C2_6)alkenyl and (C2- 6)alkynyl, both optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (Ci_4)alkyl, (C3_7)cycloalkyl, (Ci_4)alkylamino, di[(Ci_4)alkyl]amino, (Ci_3)alkoxy, (C3_7)cycloalkoxy, (C6-io)aryl, (Ci_5)heteroaryl and (C3_7)heterocycloalkyl; with the proviso that:
0 to 2 atoms of X, Y, Z can simultaneously be a heteroatom;
when one atom selected from X, Y is O or S, then Z is a bond and the other atom selected from
X, Y can not be O or S;
when Z is C or N then Y is C(R6) or N and X is C or N;
0 to 2 atoms of Bls B2, B3, and B4 are N;
with the terms used having the following meanings:
(Ci_2)alkyl means an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, being methyl or ethyl,
(Ci_3)alkyl means a branched or unbranched alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms, being methyl, ethyl, propyl or isopropyl;
(Ci_4)alkyl means a branched or unbranched alkyl group having 1-4 carbon atoms, being methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, sec -butyl and tert-butyl, (Ci_3)alkyl groups being preferred;
(Ci_5)alkyl means a branched or unbranched alkyl group having 1-5 carbon atoms, for example methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl and isopentyl, (Ci_4)alkyl groups being preferred. (Ci_6)Alkyl means a branched or unbranched alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, for example methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, tert-butyl, n- pentyl and n-hexyl. (Ci_5)alkyl groups are preferred, (Ci_4)alkyl being most preferred;
(Ci_2)alkoxy means an alkoxy group having 1-2 carbon atoms, the alkyl moiety having the same meaning as previously defined;
(Ci_3)alkoxy means an alkoxy group having 1-3 carbon atoms, the alkyl moiety having the same meaning as previously defined. (Ci_2)alkoxy groups are preferred;
(Ci_4)alkoxy means an alkoxy group having 1-4 carbon atoms, the alkyl moiety having the same meaning as previously defined. (Ci_3)alkoxy groups are preferred, (Ci_2)alkoxy groups being most preferred;
(C2_4)alkenyl means a branched or unbranched alkenyl group having 2-4 carbon atoms, such as ethenyl, 2-propenyl, isobutenyl or 2-butenyl;
(C2_6)alkenyl means a branched or unbranched alkenyl group having 2-6 carbon atoms, such as ethenyl, 2-butenyl, and n-pentenyl, (C2_4)alkenyl groups being most preferred;
(C2_4)alkynyl means a branched or unbranched alkynyl group having 2-4 carbon atoms, such as ethynyl, 2-propynyl or 2-butynyl;
(C2_6)alkynyl means a branched or unbranched alkynyl group having 2-6 carbon atoms, such as ethynyl, propynyl, n-butynyl, n-pentynyl, isopentynyl, isohexynyl or n-hexynyl. (C2_4)alkynyl groups are preferred; (C3-6)cycloalkyl means a cycloalkyl group having 3-6 carbon atoms, being cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl;
(C3_7)cycloalkyl means a cycloalkyl group having 3-7 carbon atoms, being cyclopropyl,
cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl;
(C2_6)heterocycloalkyl means a heterocycloalkyl group having 2-6 carbon atoms, preferably 3-5 carbon atoms, and one or two heteroatoms selected from N, O and/or S, which may be attached via a heteroatom if feasible, or a carbon atom; preferred heteroatoms are N or O; also preferred are piperidine, morpholine, pyrrolidine and piperazine; with the most preferred
(C2_6)heterocycloalkyl being pyrrolidine; the heterocycloalkyl group may be attached via a heteroatom if feasible;
(C3_7)heterocycloalkyl means a heterocycloalkyl group having 3-7 carbon atoms, preferably 3-5 carbon atoms, and one or two heteroatoms selected from N, O and/or S. Preferred
heteroatoms are N or O; preferred (C3_7) heterocycloalkyl groups are azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, homopiperidinyl or morpholinyl; more preferred (C3_7)heterocycloalkyl groups are piperidine, morpholine and pyrrolidine; and the heterocycloalkyl group may be attached via a heteroatom if feasible;
(C3_7)cycloalkoxy means a cycloalkyl group having 3-7 carbon atoms, with the same meaning as previously defined, attached via a ring carbon atom to an exocyclic oxygen atom;
(C6-io)aryl means an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6-10 carbon atoms, such as phenyl, naphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl or indenyl; the preferred (C6-io)aryl group is phenyl;
(Ci_5)heteroaryl means a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic group having 1-5 carbon atoms and 1-4 heteroatoms selected from N, O and/or S; the (Ci_s)heteroaryl may optionally be substituted; preferred (C jheteroaryl groups are tetrazolyl, imidazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, triazinyl, thienyl or furyl, a more preferred (Ci_5)heteroaryl is pyrimidyl;
(Ci_9)heteroaryl means a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic group having 1-9 carbon atoms and 1-4 heteroatoms selected from N, O and/or S; the (Ci_9)heteroaryl may optionally be substituted; preferred (Ci_9)heteroaryl groups are quinoline, isoquinoline and indole;
[(Ci_4)alkyl]amino means an amino group, monosubstituted with an alkyl group containing 1-4 carbon atoms having the same meaning as previously defined; preferred [(Ci_4)alkyl]amino group is methylamino;
di[(Ci_4)alkyl]amino means an amino group, disubstituted with alkyl group(s), each containing 1- 4 carbon atoms and having the same meaning as previously defined; preferred di[(Ci_ 4)alkyl] amino group is dimethylamino;
halogen means fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine;
(Ci_3)alkyl-C(0)-S-(Ci_3)alkyl means an alkyl-carbonyl-thio-alkyl group, each of the alkyl
groups having 1 to 3 carbon atoms with the same meaning as previously defined;
(C3_7)cycloalkenyl means a cycloalkenyl group having 3-7 carbon atoms, preferably 5-7 carbon atoms; preferred (C3_7)cycloalkenyl groups are cyclopentenyl or cyclohexenyl; cyclohexenyl groups are most preferred;
(C2_6)heterocycloalkenyl means a heterocycloalkenyl group having 2-6 carbon atoms, preferably 3-5 carbon atoms; and 1 heteroatom selected from N, O and/or S; preferred (C2- 6)heterocycloalkenyl groups are oxycyclohexenyl and azacyclohexenyl group.
In the above definitions with multifunctional groups, the attachment point is at the last group.
When, in the definition of a substituent, is indicated that "all of the alkyl groups" of said
substituent are optionally substituted, this also includes the alkyl moiety of an alkoxy group. A circle in a ring of Formula (I) indicates that the ring is aromatic.
Depending on the ring formed, the nitrogen, if present in X or Y, may carry a hydrogen.
The term "substituted" means that one or more hydrogens on the designated atom/atoms is/are replaced with a selection from the indicated group, provided that the designated atom's normal valency under the existing circumstances is not exceeded, and that the substitution results in a stable compound. Combinations of substituents and/or variables are permissible only if such combinations result in stable compounds. "Stable compound" or "stable structure" is defined as a compound or structure that is sufficiently robust to survive isolation to a useful degree of purity from a reaction mixture, and formulation into a drug product containing an efficacious active pharmaceutical ingredient.
The term "optionally substituted" means optional substitution with the specified groups, radicals or moieties.
[00162] In an embodiment of Formula (I), Bi is C(R7); B2 is C(R8); B3 is C(R9); B4 is C(Rio); R7, R9, and R10 are each H; and R8 is hydrogen or methyl.
[00163] In an embodiment of Formula (I), the ring containing X, Y and Z is selected from the group consisting of pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazyl, triazinyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl and isoxazolyl.
[00164] In an embodiment of Formula (I), the ring containing X, Y and Z is selected from the group consisting of pyridyl, pyrimidyl and pyridazyl.
[00165] In an embodiment of Formula (I), the ring containing X, Y and Z is selected from the group consisting of pyridyl and pyrimidyl.
[00166] In an embodiment of Formula (I), the ring containing X, Y and Z is pyridyl.
[00167] In an embodiment of Formula (I), R5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, fluorine, methyl, methoxy and trifluoromethyl.
[00168] In an embodiment of Formula (I), R5 is hydrogen.
[00169] In an embodiment of Formula (I), R2 and R3 together form a heterocycloalkyl ring selected from the group consisting of azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, homopiperidinyl and morpholinyl, optionally substituted with one or more of fluoro, hydroxyl, (Ci_3)alkyl and (Ci_ 3)alkoxy.
[00170] In an embodiment of Formula (I), R2 and R3 together form a heterocycloalkyl ring selected from the group consisting of azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl and piperidinyl.
[00171] In an embodiment of Formula (I), R2 and R3 together form a pyrrolidinyl ring.
[00172] In an embodiment of Formula (I), Ri is independently selected from the group consisting of (Ci_6)alkyl, (C2_6)alkenyl or (C2_6)alkynyl, each optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (Ci_4)alkyl, (C3_7)cycloalkyl, [(Ci_4)alkyl]amino, di[(Ci_4)alkyl] amino, (Ci_3)alkoxy, (C3_7)cycloalkoxy, (C6-io)aryl and (C3_ 7)heterocycloalkyl.
[00173] In an embodiment of Formula (I), Bls B2, B3 and B4 are CH; X is N; Y and Z are CH; R is CH3; A is N; R2, R3 and R4 are H; and Ri is CO-CH3.
[00174] In an embodiment of Formula (I), Bi, B2, B3 and B4 are CH; X and Y are N; Z is CH; R is CH3; A is N; R2, R3 and R4 are H; and Ri is CO-CH3.
[00175] In an embodiment of Formula (I), Bls B2, B3 and B4 are CH; X and Y are N; Z is CH; R is CH3; A is CH; R2 and R3 together form a piperidinyl ring; R4 is H; and Ri is CO-ethenyl.
[00176] In an embodiment of Formula (I), Bls B2, B3 and B4 are CH; X, Y and Z are CH; R5 is H; A is CH; R2 and R3 together form a pyrrolidinyl ring; R4 is H; and Ri is CO-propynyl.
[00177] In an embodiment of Formula (I), Bls B2, B3 and B4 are CH; X, Y and Z are CH; R5 is CH3; A is CH; R2 and R3 together form a piperidinyl ring; R4 is H; and Ri is CO-propynyl.
[00178] In an embodiment of Formula (I), Bb B2, B3 and B4 are CH; X and Y are N; Z is CH; R is H; A is CH; R2 and R3 together form a morpholinyl ring; R4 is H; and Ri is CO-ethenyl.
[00179] In an embodiment of Formula (I), Bb B2, B3 and B4 are CH; X and Y are N; Z is CH; R is CH3; A is CH; R2 and R3 together form a morpholinyl ring; R4 is H; and Ri is CO-propynyl.
[00180] In a preferred embodiment, the BTK inhibitor is a compound of Formula (II):
Figure imgf000048_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof. The compound of Formula (II) is also known as (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l-(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2- yl)imidazo[l,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N-(pyridin-2-yl)benzamide. In an embodiment, the BTK inhibitor is (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(l -(but-2-ynoyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrazin- 1 -yl)-N- (pyridin-2-yl)benzamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, cocrystal, or prodrug thereof. The preparation of this compound is described at Example 6 of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. US 2014/0155385 Al, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Briefly, the preparation of Formula (II) can be accomplished by the following procedure. 1 -[Bis(dimethylamino)methylene]- \H- 1 ,2,3-triazolo[4,5-¾]pyridinium 3- oxid hexafluorophosphate (also known as HATU, N-[(Dimethylamino)-lH-l,2,3-triazolo-[4,5- ¾]pyridin-l-ylmethylene]-N-methylmethanaminium hexafluorophosphate N-oxide, and 0-(Ί- azabenzotriazol-l-yl)-l,l,3,3-tetramethyluroniumhexafluorophosphate) (18.75 mg, 0.049 mmol) was added to a solution of (5)-4-(8-amino-3-(pyrrolidin-2-yl)imidazo[l,5-a]pyrazin-l-yl)-N- (pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (19.7 mg, 0.049 mmol), triethylamine (20 mg, 0.197 mmol, 0.027 mL) and 2-butynoic acid in dichloromethane (2 mL). The mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at room temperature. The mixture was washed with water dried over magnesium sulfate and
concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by preparative liquid chromatography. Fractions containing product were collected and reduced to dryness to afford 10.5 mg of Formula (II) (18.0% yield). Pharmaceutical Compositions
[00181] In selected embodiments, the invention provides pharmaceutical compositions for treating lymphoma and leukemia, including CLL and SLL.
[00182] The pharmaceutical compositions are typically formulated to provide a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor, including the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, prodrug, solvate, hydrate or derivative thereof. Where desired, the pharmaceutical compositions contain a pharmaceutically acceptable salt and/or coordination complex thereof, and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients, carriers, including inert solid diluents and fillers, diluents, including sterile aqueous solution and various organic solvents, permeation enhancers, solubilizers and adjuvants. Where desired, other active ingredients in addition to a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) may be mixed into a preparation or both components may be formulated into separate preparations for use in combination separately or at the same time.
[00183] In selected embodiments, the concentration of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) provided in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention is less than, for example, 100%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 19%, 18%, 17%, 16%, 15%, 14%, 13%, 12%, 11%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, 0.1%, 0.09%, 0.08%, 0.07%, 0.06%, 0.05%, 0.04%, 0.03%, 0.02%, 0.01%, 0.009%, 0.008%, 0.007%, 0.006%, 0.005%, 0.004%, 0.003%, 0.002%, 0.001%, 0.0009%, 0.0008%, 0.0007%, 0.0006%, 0.0005%, 0.0004%, 0.0003%, 0.0002% or 0.0001% w/w, w/v or v/v.
[00184] In selected embodiments, the concentration of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) provided in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention is independently greater than 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 19.75%, 19.50%, 19.25% 19%, 18.75%, 18.50%, 18.25% 18%, 17.75%, 17.50%, 17.25% 17%, 16.75%, 16.50%, 16.25% 16%, 15.75%, 15.50%, 15.25% 15%, 14.75%, 14.50%, 14.25% 14%, 13.75%, 13.50%, 13.25% 13%, 12.75%, 12.50%, 12.25% 12%, 11.75%, 11.50%, 11.25% 11%, 10.75%, 10.50%, 10.25% 10%, 9.75%, 9.50%, 9.25% 9%, 8.75%, 8.50%, 8.25% 8%, 7.75%, 7.50%, 7.25% 7%, 6.75%, 6.50%, 6.25% 6%, 5.75%, 5.50%, 5.25% 5%, 4.75%, 4.50%, 4.25%, 4%, 3.75%, 3.50%, 3.25%, 3%, 2.75%, 2.50%, 2.25%, 2%, 1.75%, 1.50%, 125%, 1%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, 0.1%, 0.09%, 0.08%, 0.07%, 0.06%, 0.05%, 0.04%, 0.03%, 0.02%, 0.01%, 0.009%, 0.008%, 0.007%, 0.006%, 0.005%, 0.004%, 0.003%, 0.002%, 0.001%, 0.0009%, 0.0008%, 0.0007%, 0.0006%, 0.0005%, 0.0004%, 0.0003%, 0.0002% or 0.0001% w/w, w/v, or v/v.
[00185] In selected embodiments, the concentration of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is independently in the range from approximately 0.0001% to approximately 50%, approximately 0.001% to approximately 40%, approximately 0.01% to approximately 30%, approximately 0.02% to approximately 29%, approximately 0.03% to approximately 28%, approximately 0.04% to approximately 27%, approximately 0.05% to approximately 26%, approximately 0.06% to approximately 25%, approximately 0.07% to approximately 24%, approximately 0.08% to approximately 23%, approximately 0.09% to approximately 22%, approximately 0.1% to approximately 21%, approximately 0.2% to approximately 20%, approximately 0.3% to approximately 19%, approximately 0.4% to approximately 18%, approximately 0.5% to approximately 17%, approximately 0.6% to approximately 16%, approximately 0.7% to approximately 15%, approximately 0.8% to approximately 14%, approximately 0.9% to approximately 12% or approximately 1% to approximately 10% w/w, w/v or v/v.
[00186] In selected embodiments, the concentration of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is independently in the range from approximately 0.001% to approximately 10%, approximately 0.01% to approximately 5%, approximately 0.02% to approximately 4.5%, approximately 0.03% to approximately 4%, approximately 0.04% to approximately 3.5%, approximately 0.05% to approximately 3%, approximately 0.06% to approximately 2.5%, approximately 0.07% to approximately 2%, approximately 0.08% to approximately 1.5%, approximately 0.09% to approximately 1%, approximately 0.1% to approximately 0.9% w/w, w/v or v/v.
[00187] In selected embodiments, the amount of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is independently equal to or less than 10 g, 9.5 g, 9.0 g, 8.5 g, 8.0 g, 7.5 g, 7.0 g, 6.5 g, 6.0 g, 5.5 g, 5.0 g, 4.5 g, 4.0 g, 3.5 g, 3.0 g, 2.5 g, 2.0 g, 1.5 g, 1.0 g, 0.95 g, 0.9 g, 0.85 g, 0.8 g, 0.75 g, 0.7 g, 0.65 g, 0.6 g, 0.55 g, 0.5 g, 0.45 g, 0.4 g, 0.35 g, 0.3 g, 0.25 g, 0.2 g, 0.15 g, 0.1 g, 0.09 g, 0.08 g, 0.07 g, 0.06 g, 0.05 g, 0.04 g, 0.03 g, 0.02 g, 0.01 g, 0.009 g, 0.008 g, 0.007 g, 0.006 g, 0.005 g, 0.004 g, 0.003 g, 0.002 g, 0.001 g, 0.0009 g, 0.0008 g, 0.0007 g, 0.0006 g, 0.0005 g, 0.0004 g, 0.0003 g, 0.0002 g or 0.0001 g.
[00188] In selected embodiments, the amount of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is independently more than 0.0001 g, 0.0002 g, 0.0003 g, 0.0004 g, 0.0005 g, 0.0006 g, 0.0007 g, 0.0008 g, 0.0009 g, 0.001 g, 0.0015 g, 0.002 g, 0.0025 g, 0.003 g, 0.0035 g, 0.004 g, 0.0045 g, 0.005 g, 0.0055 g, 0.006 g, 0.0065 g, 0.007 g, 0.0075 g, 0.008 g, 0.0085 g, 0.009 g, 0.0095 g, 0.01 g, 0.015 g, 0.02 g, 0.025 g, 0.03 g, 0.035 g, 0.04 g, 0.045 g, 0.05 g, 0.055 g, 0.06 g, 0.065 g, 0.07 g, 0.075 g, 0.08 g, 0.085 g, 0.09 g, 0.095 g, 0.1 g, 0.15 g, 0.2 g, 0.25 g, 0.3 g, 0.35 g, 0.4 g, 0.45 g, 0.5 g, 0.55 g, 0.6 g, 0.65 g, 0.7 g, 0.75 g, 0.8 g, 0.85 g, 0.9 g, 0.95 g, 1 g, 1.5 g, 2 g, 2.5, 3 g, 3.5, 4 g, 4.5 g, 5 g, 5.5 g, 6 g, 6.5 g, 7 g, 7.5 g, 8 g, 8.5 g, 9 g, 9.5 g or 10 g.
[00189] The BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) are effective over a wide dosage range. For example, in the treatment of adult humans, dosages independently ranging from 0.01 to 1000 mg, from 0.5 to 100 mg, from 1 to 50 mg per day, and from 5 to 40 mg per day are examples of dosages that may be used. The exact dosage will depend upon the route of administration, the form in which the compound is administered, the gender and age of the subject to be treated, the body weight of the subject to be treated, and the preference and experience of the attending physician.
[00190] Described below are non- limiting exemplary pharmaceutical compositions and methods for preparing the same.
Pharmaceutical Compositions for Oral Administration
[00191] In selected embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for oral administration containing a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II), and a pharmaceutical excipient suitable for oral administration.
[00192] In selected embodiments, the invention provides a solid pharmaceutical composition for oral administration containing: (i) an effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II), in combination and (ii) a pharmaceutical excipient suitable for oral administration. In selected embodiments, the composition further contains (iii) an effective amount of at least one additional active ingredient. [00193] In selected embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition may be a liquid pharmaceutical composition suitable for oral consumption. Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention suitable for oral administration can be presented as discrete dosage forms, such as capsules, cachets, or tablets, or liquids or aerosol sprays each containing a predetermined amount of an active ingredient as a powder or in granules, a solution, or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid, an oil-in-water emulsion, or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion. Such dosage forms can be prepared by any of the methods of pharmacy, but all methods include the step of bringing the active ingredient(s) into association with the carrier, which constitutes one or more necessary ingredients. In general, the compositions are prepared by uniformly and intimately admixing the active ingredient(s) with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product into the desired presentation. For example, a tablet can be prepared by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients.
Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as powder or granules, optionally mixed with an excipient such as, but not limited to, a binder, a lubricant, an inert diluent, and/or a surface active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
[00194] The invention further encompasses anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms since water can facilitate the degradation of some compounds. For example, water may be added (e.g., 5%) in the pharmaceutical arts as a means of simulating long-term storage in order to determine characteristics such as shelf-life or the stability of formulations over time.
Anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention can be prepared using anhydrous or low moisture containing ingredients and low moisture or low humidity conditions. Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention which contain lactose can be made anhydrous if substantial contact with moisture and/or humidity during manufacturing, packaging, and/or storage is expected. An anhydrous pharmaceutical composition may be prepared and stored such that its anhydrous nature is maintained.
Accordingly, anhydrous compositions may be packaged using materials known to prevent exposure to water such that they can be included in suitable formulary kits. Examples of suitable packaging include, but are not limited to, hermetically sealed foils, plastic or the like, unit dose containers, blister packs, and strip packs. [00195] The BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) can be combined in an intimate admixture with a pharmaceutical carrier according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques. The carrier can take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration. In preparing the compositions for an oral dosage form, any of the usual pharmaceutical media can be employed as carriers, such as, for example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, coloring agents, and the like in the case of oral liquid preparations (such as suspensions, solutions, and elixirs) or aerosols; or carriers such as starches, sugars, micro-crystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, and disintegrating agents can be used in the case of oral solid preparations, in some embodiments without employing the use of lactose. For example, suitable carriers include powders, capsules, and tablets, with the solid oral preparations. If desired, tablets can be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques.
[00196] Binders suitable for use in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, corn starch, potato starch, or other starches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), polyvinyl pyrrolidone, methyl cellulose, pre- gelatinized starch, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, and mixtures thereof.
[00197] Examples of suitable fillers for use in the pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, talc, calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), microcrystalline cellulose, powdered cellulose, dextrates, kaolin, mannitol, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre-gelatinized starch, and mixtures thereof.
[00198] Disintegrants may be used in the compositions of the invention to provide tablets that disintegrate when exposed to an aqueous environment. Too much of a disintegrant may produce tablets which disintegrate in the bottle. Too little may be insufficient for disintegration to occur, thus altering the rate and extent of release of the active ingredients from the dosage form. Thus, a sufficient amount of disintegrant that is neither too little nor too much to detrimentally alter the release of the active ingredient(s) may be used to form the dosage forms of the compounds disclosed herein. The amount of disintegrant used may vary based upon the type of formulation and mode of administration, and may be readily discernible to those of ordinary skill in the art. About 0.5 to about 15 weight percent of disintegrant, or about 1 to about 5 weight percent of disintegrant, may be used in the pharmaceutical composition. Disintegrants that can be used to form pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, agar-agar, alginic acid, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato or tapioca starch, other starches, pre-gelatinized starch, other starches, clays, other algins, other celluloses, gums or mixtures thereof.
[00199] Lubricants which can be used to form pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil, and soybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethylaureate, agar, or mixtures thereof. Additional lubricants include, for example, a syloid silica gel, a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica, or mixtures thereof. A lubricant can optionally be added, in an amount of less than about 1 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition.
[00200] When aqueous suspensions and/or elixirs are desired for oral administration, the essential active ingredient therein may be combined with various sweetening or flavoring agents, coloring matter or dyes and, if so desired, emulsifying and/or suspending agents, together with such diluents as water, ethanol, propylene glycol, glycerin and various combinations thereof.
[00201] The tablets can be uncoated or coated by known techniques to delay disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period. For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate can be employed. Formulations for oral use can also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent, for example, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin, or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium, for example, peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil.
[00202] Surfactants which can be used to form pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, hydrophilic surfactants, lipophilic surfactants, and mixtures thereof. That is, a mixture of hydrophilic surfactants may be employed, a mixture of lipophilic surfactants may be employed, or a mixture of at least one hydrophilic surfactant and at least one lipophilic surfactant may be employed.
[00203] A suitable hydrophilic surfactant may generally have an HLB value of at least 10, while suitable lipophilic surfactants may generally have an HLB value of or less than about 10. An empirical parameter used to characterize the relative hydrophilicity and hydrophobicity of non- ionic amphiphilic compounds is the hydrophilic-lipophilic balance ("HLB" value). Surfactants with lower HLB values are more lipophilic or hydrophobic, and have greater solubility in oils, while surfactants with higher HLB values are more hydrophilic, and have greater solubility in aqueous solutions. Hydrophilic surfactants are generally considered to be those compounds having an HLB value greater than about 10, as well as anionic, cationic, or zwitterionic compounds for which the HLB scale is not generally applicable. Similarly, lipophilic (i.e., hydrophobic) surfactants are compounds having an HLB value equal to or less than about 10. However, HLB value of a surfactant is merely a rough guide generally used to enable formulation of industrial, pharmaceutical and cosmetic emulsions.
[00204] Hydrophilic surfactants may be either ionic or non-ionic. Suitable ionic surfactants include, but are not limited to, alkylammonium salts; fusidic acid salts; fatty acid derivatives of amino acids, oligopeptides, and polypeptides; glyceride derivatives of amino acids,
oligopeptides, and polypeptides; lecithins and hydrogenated lecithins; lysolecithins and hydrogenated lysolecithins; phospholipids and derivatives thereof; lysophospholipids and derivatives thereof; carnitine fatty acid ester salts; salts of alkylsulfates; fatty acid salts; sodium docusate; acylactylates; mono- and di-acetylated tartaric acid esters of mono- and di-glycerides; succinylated mono- and di-glycerides; citric acid esters of mono- and di-glycerides; and mixtures thereof.
[00205] Within the aforementioned group, ionic surfactants include, by way of example:
lecithins, lysolecithin, phospholipids, lysophospholipids and derivatives thereof; carnitine fatty acid ester salts; salts of alkylsulfates; fatty acid salts; sodium docusate; acylactylates; mono- and di-acetylated tartaric acid esters of mono- and di-glycerides; succinylated mono- and di- glycerides; citric acid esters of mono- and di-glycerides; and mixtures thereof. [00206] Ionic surfactants may be the ionized forms of lecithin, lysolecithin,
phosphatidylcholine, phosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylglycerol, phosphatidic acid, phosphatidylserine, lysophosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidylethanolamine,
lysophosphatidylglycerol, lysophosphatidic acid, lysophosphatidylserine, PEG- phosphatidylethanolamine, PVP-phosphatidylethanolamine, lactylic esters of fatty acids, stearoyl-2-lactylate, stearoyl lactylate, succinylated monoglycerides, mono/diacetylated tartaric acid esters of mono/diglycerides, citric acid esters of mono/diglycerides, cholylsarcosine, caproate, caprylate, caprate, laurate, myristate, palmitate, oleate, ricinoleate, linoleate, linolenate, stearate, lauryl sulfate, teracecyl sulfate, docusate, lauroyl carnitines, palmitoyl carnitines, myristoyl carnitines, and salts and mixtures thereof.
[00207] Hydrophilic non-ionic surfactants may include, but not limited to, alkylglucosides; alkylmaltosides; alkylthioglucosides; lauryl macrogolglycerides; polyoxyalkylene alkyl ethers such as polyethylene glycol alkyl ethers; polyoxyalkylene alkylphenols such as polyethylene glycol alkyl phenols; polyoxyalkylene alkyl phenol fatty acid esters such as polyethylene glycol fatty acids monoesters and polyethylene glycol fatty acids diesters; polyethylene glycol glycerol fatty acid esters; polyglycerol fatty acid esters; polyoxyalkylene sorbitan fatty acid esters such as polyethylene glycol sorbitan fatty acid esters; hydrophilic transesterification products of a polyol with at least one member of the group consisting of glycerides, vegetable oils, hydrogenated vegetable oils, fatty acids, and sterols; polyoxyethylene sterols, derivatives, and analogues thereof; polyoxyethylated vitamins and derivatives thereof; polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block copolymers; and mixtures thereof; polyethylene glycol sorbitan fatty acid esters and hydrophilic transesterification products of a polyol with at least one member of the group consisting of triglycerides, vegetable oils, and hydrogenated vegetable oils. The polyol may be glycerol, ethylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, sorbitol, propylene glycol, pentaerythritol, or a saccharide.
[00208] Other hydrophilic-non-ionic surfactants include, without limitation, PEG- 10 laurate, PEG- 12 laurate, PEG-20 laurate, PEG-32 laurate, PEG-32 dilaurate, PEG- 12 oleate, PEG- 15 oleate, PEG-20 oleate, PEG-20 dioleate, PEG-32 oleate, PEG-200 oleate, PEG-400 oleate, PEG- 15 stearate, PEG-32 distearate, PEG-40 stearate, PEG- 100 stearate, PEG-20 dilaurate, PEG-25 glyceryl trioleate, PEG-32 dioleate, PEG-20 glyceryl laurate, PEG-30 glyceryl laurate, PEG-20 glyceryl stearate, PEG-20 glyceryl oleate, PEG-30 glyceryl oleate, PEG-30 glyceryl laurate, PEG-40 glyceryl laurate, PEG-40 palm kernel oil, PEG-50 hydrogenated castor oil, PEG-40 castor oil, PEG-35 castor oil, PEG-60 castor oil, PEG-40 hydrogenated castor oil, PEG-60 hydrogenated castor oil, PEG-60 corn oil, PEG-6 caprate/caprylate glycerides, PEG-8
caprate/caprylate glycerides, polyglyceryl-10 laurate, PEG-30 cholesterol, PEG-25 phyto sterol, PEG-30 soya sterol, PEG-20 trioleate, PEG-40 sorbitan oleate, PEG-80 sorbitan laurate, polysorbate 20, polysorbate 80, POE-9 lauryl ether, POE-23 lauryl ether, POE-10 oleyl ether, POE-20 oleyl ether, POE-20 stearyl ether, tocopheryl PEG- 100 succinate, PEG-24 cholesterol, polyglyceryl-lOoleate, Tween 40, Tween 60, sucrose monostearate, sucrose monolaurate, sucrose monopalmitate, PEG 10-100 nonyl phenol series, PEG 15-100 octyl phenol series, and poloxamers.
[00209] Suitable lipophilic surfactants include, by way of example only: fatty alcohols; glycerol fatty acid esters; acetylated glycerol fatty acid esters; lower alcohol fatty acids esters; propylene glycol fatty acid esters; sorbitan fatty acid esters; polyethylene glycol sorbitan fatty acid esters; sterols and sterol derivatives; polyoxyethylated sterols and sterol derivatives; polyethylene glycol alkyl ethers; sugar esters; sugar ethers; lactic acid derivatives of mono- and di-glycerides;
hydrophobic transesterification products of a polyol with at least one member of the group consisting of glycerides, vegetable oils, hydrogenated vegetable oils, fatty acids and sterols; oil- soluble vitamins/vitamin derivatives; and mixtures thereof. Within this group, preferred lipophilic surfactants include glycerol fatty acid esters, propylene glycol fatty acid esters, and mixtures thereof, or are hydrophobic transesterification products of a polyol with at least one member of the group consisting of vegetable oils, hydrogenated vegetable oils, and triglycerides.
[00210] In an embodiment, the composition may include a solubilizer to ensure good
solubilization and/or dissolution of the compound of the present invention and to minimize precipitation of the compound of the present invention. This can be especially important for compositions for non-oral use, such as for compositions for injection. A solubilizer may also be added to increase the solubility of the hydrophilic drug and/or other components, such as surfactants, or to maintain the composition as a stable or homogeneous solution or dispersion.
[00211] Examples of suitable solubilizers include, but are not limited to, the following: alcohols and polyols, such as ethanol, isopropanol, butanol, benzyl alcohol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butanediols and isomers thereof, glycerol, pentaerythritol, sorbitol, mannitol, transcutol, dimethyl isosorbide, polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, polyvinylalcohol,
hydroxypropyl methylcellulose and other cellulose derivatives, cyclodextrins and cyclodextrin derivatives; ethers of polyethylene glycols having an average molecular weight of about 200 to about 6000, such as tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol PEG ether (glycofurol) or methoxy PEG; amides and other nitrogen-containing compounds such as 2-pyrrolidone, 2-piperidone, £-caprolactam, N- alkylpyrrolidone, N-hydroxyalkylpyrrolidone, N-alkylpiperidone, N-alkylcaprolactam, dimethylacetamide and polyvinylpyrrolidone; esters such as ethyl propionate, tributylcitrate, acetyl triethylcitrate, acetyl tributyl citrate, triethylcitrate, ethyl oleate, ethyl caprylate, ethyl butyrate, triacetin, propylene glycol monoacetate, propylene glycol diacetate, .epsilon.- caprolactone and isomers thereof, δ-valerolactone and isomers thereof, β-butyrolactone and isomers thereof; and other solubilizers known in the art, such as dimethyl acetamide, dimethyl isosorbide, N-methyl pyrrolidones, monooctanoin, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, and water.
[00212] Mixtures of solubilizers may also be used. Examples include, but not limited to, triacetin, triethylcitrate, ethyl oleate, ethyl caprylate, dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, N-hydroxyethylpyrrolidone, polyvinylpyrrolidone, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose,
hydroxypropyl cyclodextrins, ethanol, polyethylene glycol 200-100, glycofurol, transcutol, propylene glycol, and dimethyl isosorbide. Particularly preferred solubilizers include sorbitol, glycerol, triacetin, ethyl alcohol, PEG-400, glycofurol and propylene glycol.
[00213] The amount of solubilizer that can be included is not particularly limited. The amount of a given solubilizer may be limited to a bioacceptable amount, which may be readily determined by one of skill in the art. In some circumstances, it may be advantageous to include amounts of solubilizers far in excess of bioacceptable amounts, for example to maximize the concentration of the drug, with excess solubilizer removed prior to providing the composition to a patient using conventional techniques, such as distillation or evaporation. Thus, if present, the solubilizer can be in a weight ratio of 10%, 25%, 50%>, 100%, or up to about 200% by weight, based on the combined weight of the drug, and other excipients. If desired, very small amounts of solubilizer may also be used, such as 5%, 2%, 1% or even less. Typically, the solubilizer may be present in an amount of about 1% to about 100%, more typically about 5% to about 25% by weight. [00214] The composition can further include one or more pharmaceutically acceptable additives and excipients. Such additives and excipients include, without limitation, detackifiers, anti- foaming agents, buffering agents, polymers, antioxidants, preservatives, chelating agents, viscomodulators, tonicifiers, flavorants, colorants, odorants, opacifiers, suspending agents, binders, fillers, plasticizers, lubricants, and mixtures thereof.
[00215] In addition, an acid or a base may be incorporated into the composition to facilitate processing, to enhance stability, or for other reasons. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable bases include amino acids, amino acid esters, ammonium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium hydrogen carbonate, aluminum hydroxide, calcium carbonate, magnesium hydroxide, magnesium aluminum silicate, synthetic aluminum silicate, synthetic hydrocalcite, magnesium aluminum hydroxide, diisopropylethylamine, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, triethanolamine, triethylamine, triisopropanolamine, trimethylamine, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane (TRIS) and the like. Also suitable are bases that are salts of a pharmaceutically acceptable acid, such as acetic acid, acrylic acid, adipic acid, alginic acid, alkanesulfonic acid, amino acids, ascorbic acid, benzoic acid, boric acid, butyric acid, carbonic acid, citric acid, fatty acids, formic acid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, hydroquinosulfonic acid, isoascorbic acid, lactic acid, maleic acid, oxalic acid, para-bromophenylsulfonic acid, propionic acid, /?-toluenesulfonic acid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, succinic acid, tannic acid, tartaric acid, thioglycolic acid, toluenesulfonic acid, uric acid, and the like. Salts of polyprotic acids, such as sodium phosphate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, and sodium dihydrogen phosphate can also be used. When the base is a salt, the cation can be any convenient and pharmaceutically acceptable cation, such as ammonium, alkali metals and alkaline earth metals. Examples may include, but are not limited to, sodium, potassium, lithium, magnesium, calcium and ammonium.
[00216] Suitable acids are pharmaceutically acceptable organic or inorganic acids. Examples of suitable inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydriodic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, boric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like. Examples of suitable organic acids include acetic acid, acrylic acid, adipic acid, alginic acid, alkanesulfonic acids, amino acids, ascorbic acid, benzoic acid, boric acid, butyric acid, carbonic acid, citric acid, fatty acids, formic acid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, hydroquinosulfonic acid, isoascorbic acid, lactic acid, maleic acid, methanesulfonic acid, oxalic acid, para-bromophenylsulfonic acid, propionic acid, p- toluenesulfonic acid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, succinic acid, tannic acid, tartaric acid, thioglycolic acid, toluenesulfonic acid and uric acid.
Pharmaceutical Compositions for Injection
[00217] In selected embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for injection containing a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II), and a pharmaceutical excipient suitable for injection. Components and amounts of agents in the compositions are as described herein.
[00218] The forms in which the compositions of the present invention may be incorporated for administration by injection include aqueous or oil suspensions, or emulsions, with sesame oil, corn oil, cottonseed oil, or peanut oil, as well as elixirs, mannitol, dextrose, or a sterile aqueous solution, and similar pharmaceutical vehicles.
[00219] Aqueous solutions in saline are also conventionally used for injection. Ethanol, glycerol, propylene glycol and liquid polyethylene glycol (and suitable mixtures thereof), cyclodextrin derivatives, and vegetable oils may also be employed. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating, such as lecithin, for the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. The prevention of the action of microorganisms can be brought about by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid and thimerosal.
[00220] Sterile injectable solutions are prepared by incorporating a a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) in the required amounts in the appropriate solvent with various other ingredients as enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the various sterilized active ingredients into a sterile vehicle which contains the basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, certain desirable methods of preparation are vacuum-drying and freeze-drying techniques which yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof. Pharmaceutical Compositions for Topical Delivery
[00221] In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for transdermal delivery containing the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and a pharmaceutical excipient suitable for transdermal delivery.
[00222] Compositions of the present invention can be formulated into preparations in solid, semi-solid, or liquid forms suitable for local or topical administration, such as gels, water soluble jellies, creams, lotions, suspensions, foams, powders, slurries, ointments, solutions, oils, pastes, suppositories, sprays, emulsions, saline solutions, dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO)-based solutions. In general, carriers with higher densities are capable of providing an area with a prolonged exposure to the active ingredients. In contrast, a solution formulation may provide more immediate exposure of the active ingredient to the chosen area.
[00223] The pharmaceutical compositions also may comprise suitable solid or gel phase carriers or excipients, which are compounds that allow increased penetration of, or assist in the delivery of, therapeutic molecules across the stratum corneum permeability barrier of the skin. There are many of these penetration-enhancing molecules known to those trained in the art of topical formulation. Examples of such carriers and excipients include, but are not limited to, humectants (e.g., urea), glycols (e.g., propylene glycol), alcohols (e.g., ethanol), fatty acids (e.g., oleic acid), surfactants (e.g., isopropyl myristate and sodium lauryl sulfate), pyrrolidones, glycerol monolaurate, sulfoxides, terpenes (e.g., menthol), amines, amides, alkanes, alkanols, water, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars, starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, and polymers such as polyethylene glycols.
[00224] Another exemplary formulation for use in the methods of the present invention employs transdermal delivery devices ("patches"). Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) in controlled amounts, either with or without another active pharmaceutical ingredient.
[00225] The construction and use of transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,023,252; 4,992,445 and 5,001 , 139. Such patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of
pharmaceutical agents. Other Pharmaceutical Compositions
[00226] Pharmaceutical compositions may also be prepared from compositions described herein and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients suitable for sublingual, buccal, rectal, intraosseous, intraocular, intranasal, epidural, or intraspinal administration. Preparations for such pharmaceutical compositions are well-known in the art. See, e.g., Anderson, et al. eds.,
Handbook of Clinical Drug Data, Tenth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002; and Pratt and Taylor, eds., Principles of Drug Action, Third Edition, Churchill Livingston, N.Y., 1990.
[00227] Administration of the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) or pharmaceutical composition of these compounds can be effected by any method that enables delivery of the compounds to the site of action. These methods include oral routes, intraduodenal routes, parenteral injection (including intravenous, intraarterial, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravascular, intraperitoneal or infusion), topical {e.g., transdermal application), rectal administration, via local delivery by catheter or stent or through inhalation. The combination of compounds can also be administered intraadiposally or intrathecally.
[00228] Exemplary parenteral administration forms include solutions or suspensions of active compound in sterile aqueous solutions, for example, aqueous propylene glycol or dextrose solutions. Such dosage forms can be suitably buffered, if desired.
[00229] The invention also provides kits. The kits include the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II), either alone or in combination in suitable packaging, and written material that can include instructions for use, discussion of clinical studies and listing of side effects. Such kits may also include information, such as scientific literature references, package insert materials, clinical trial results, and/or summaries of these and the like, which indicate or establish the activities and/or advantages of the composition, and/or which describe dosing, administration, side effects, drug interactions, or other information useful to the health care provider. Such information may be based on the results of various studies, for example, studies using experimental animals involving in vivo models and studies based on human clinical trials. The kit may further contain another active pharmaceutical ingredient. Suitable packaging and additional articles for use {e.g., measuring cup for liquid preparations, foil wrapping to minimize exposure to air, and the like) are known in the art and may be included in the kit. Kits described herein can be provided, marketed and/or promoted to health providers, including physicians, nurses, pharmacists, formulary officials, and the like. Kits may also, in selected embodiments, be marketed directly to the consumer. In an embodiment, the invention provides a kit comprising a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) for use in the treatment of CLL or SLL, hematological malignancies, or any of the other cancers described herein.
Dosages and Dosing Regimens
[00230] The amounts of BTK inhibitors administered will be dependent on the mammal being treated, the severity of the disorder or condition, the rate of administration, the disposition of the compounds and the discretion of the prescribing physician. However, an effective dosage is in the range of about 0.001 to about 100 mg per kg body weight per day, such as about 1 to about 35 mg/kg/day, in single or divided doses. For a 70 kg human, this would amount to about 0.05 to 7 g/day, such as about 0.05 to about 2.5 g/day. In some instances, dosage levels below the lower limit of the aforesaid range may be more than adequate, while in other cases still larger doses may be employed without causing any harmful side effect - e.g., by dividing such larger doses into several small doses for administration throughout the day.
[00231] In some embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered in a single dose. Typically, such administration will be by injection - e.g., intravenous injection, in order to introduce the agents quickly. However, other routes may be used as appropriate. A single dose of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) may also be used for treatment of an acute condition.
[00232] In some embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered in multiple doses. Dosing may be once, twice, three times, four times, five times, six times, or more than six times per day. Dosing may be once a month, once every two weeks, once a week, or once every other day. In other embodiments, a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered about once per day to about 6 times per day. In some embodiments a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered once daily, while in other embodiments a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered twice daily, and in other embodiments a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered three times daily. [00233] Administration of the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) may continue as long as necessary. In some embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered for more than 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 14, or 28 days. In some embodiments, the the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered for less than 28, 14, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 day. In some embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered chronically on an ongoing basis - e.g., for the treatment of chronic effects. In another embodiment the administration of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) continues for less than about 7 days. In yet another embodiment the administration continues for more than about 6, 10, 14, 28 days, two months, six months, or one year. In some embodiments, continuous dosing is achieved and maintained as long as necessary.
[00234] In some embodiments, an effective dosage of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is in the range of about 1 mg to about 500 mg, about 10 mg to about 300 mg, about 20 mg to about 250 mg, about 25 mg to about 200 mg, about 10 mg to about 200 mg, about 20 mg to about 150 mg, about 30 mg to about 120 mg, about 10 mg to about 90 mg, about 20 mg to about 80 mg, about 30 mg to about 70 mg, about 40 mg to about 60 mg, about 45 mg to about 55 mg, about 48 mg to about 52 mg, about 50 mg to about 150 mg, about 60 mg to about 140 mg, about 70 mg to about 130 mg, about 80 mg to about 120 mg, about 90 mg to about 110 mg, about 95 mg to about 105 mg, about 150 mg to about 250 mg, about 160 mg to about 240 mg, about 170 mg to about 230 mg, about 180 mg to about 220 mg, about 190 mg to about 210 mg, about 195 mg to about 205 mg, or about 198 to about 202 mg. In some embodiments, an effective dosage of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is about 25 mg, about 50 mg, about 75 mg, about 100 mg, about 125 mg, about 150 mg, about 175 mg, about 200 mg, about 225 mg, about 250 mg, about 275 mg, about 300 mg, about 325 mg, about 350 mg, about 375 mg, about 400 mg, about 425 mg, about 450 mg, about 475 mg, or about 500 mg. In some embodiments, an effective dosage of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is 25 mg, 50 mg, 75 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg, 175 mg, 200 mg, 225 mg, 250 mg, 275 mg, 300 mg, 325 mg, 350 mg, 375 mg, 400 mg, 425 mg, 450 mg, 475 mg, or 500 mg.
[00235] In some embodiments, an effective dosage of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is in the range of about 0.01 mg/kg to about 4.3 mg/kg, about 0.15 mg/kg to about 3.6 mg/kg, about 0.3 mg/kg to about 3.2 mg/kg, about 0.35 mg/kg to about 2.85 mg/kg, about 0.15 mg/kg to about 2.85 mg/kg, about 0.3 mg to about 2.15 mg/kg, about 0.45 mg/kg to about 1.7 mg/kg, about 0.15 mg/kg to about 1.3 mg/kg, about 0.3 mg/kg to about 1.15 mg/kg, about 0.45 mg/kg to about 1 mg/kg, about 0.55 mg/kg to about 0.85 mg/kg, about 0.65 mg/kg to about 0.8 mg/kg, about 0.7 mg/kg to about 0.75 mg/kg, about 0.7 mg/kg to about 2.15 mg/kg, about 0.85 mg/kg to about 2 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about 1.85 mg/kg, about 1.15 mg/kg to about 1.7 mg/kg, about 1.3 mg/kg mg to about 1.6 mg/kg, about 1.35 mg/kg to about 1.5 mg/kg, about 2.15 mg/kg to about 3.6 mg/kg, about 2.3 mg/kg to about 3.4 mg/kg, about 2.4 mg/kg to about 3.3 mg/kg, about 2.6 mg/kg to about 3.15 mg/kg, about 2.7 mg/kg to about 3 mg/kg, about 2.8 mg/kg to about 3 mg/kg, or about 2.85 mg/kg to about 2.95 mg/kg. In some embodiments, an effective dosage of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is about 0.35 mg/kg, about 0.7 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg, about 1.4 mg/kg, about 1.8 mg/kg, about 2.1 mg/kg, about 2.5 mg/kg, about 2.85 mg/kg, about 3.2 mg/kg, or about 3.6 mg/kg.
[00236] In some embodiments, a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is adminstered at a dosage of 10 to 400 mg BID, including a dosage of 25 mg, 50 mg, 75 mg, 100 mg, 150 mg, 175 mg, 200 mg, 225 mg, 250 mg, 275 mg, 300 mg, 325 mg, 350 mg, 375 mg, and 400 mg BID.
[00237] An effective amount of the combination of the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) may be administered in either single or multiple doses by any of the accepted modes of administration of agents having similar utilities, including rectal, buccal, sublingual, intranasal and transdermal routes, by intra-arterial injection, intravenously, intraperitoneally, parenterally, intramuscularly, subcutaneously, orally, topically, or as an inhalant.
Methods of Treating Hematological Malignancies, Cancers, and Other Diseases
[00238] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating SLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating SLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
[00239] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, in a dosing regimen selected from the group consisting of 100 mg QD, 175 mg QD, 250 mg QD, 400 mg QD, and 100 mg BID. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, in a dosing regimen selected from the group consisting of 100 mg QD, 175 mg QD, 250 mg QD, 400 mg QD, and 100 mg BID.
[00240] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a use of a composition of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating CLL, wherein the treating comprises the step of administering one or more doses of Formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a use of a composition of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating SLL, wherein the treating comprises the step of administering one or more doses of Formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a use of a composition of Formula (I), or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating CLL, wherein the treating comprises the step of administering one or more doses of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a use of a composition of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating SLL, wherein the treating comprises the step of administering one or more doses of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
[00241] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a mammal that comprises the step of administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating SLL in a mammal that comprises the step of administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a mammal that comprises the step of administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating SLL in a mammal that comprises the step of
administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof. In an embodiment, the mammal in any of the foregoing embodiments is selected from the group consisting of a human, a canine, a feline, or an equine. In an embodiment, the mammal in any of the foregoing embodiments is a companion animal.
[00242] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a subtype of CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof. A number of subtypes of CLL have been characterized. CLL is often classified for immunoglobulin heavy-chain variable-region (IgVfj) mutational status in leukemic cells. R. N. Damle, et al, Blood 1999, 94, 1840-47; T. J. Hamblin, et al, Blood 1999, 94, 1848-54. Patients with IgVH mutations generally survive longer than patients without IgVH mutations. ZAP70 expression (positive or negative) is also used to characterize CLL. L. Z. Rassenti, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2004, 351, 893-901. The methylation of ZAP-70 at CpG3 is also used to characterize CLL, for example by pyrosequencing. R. Claus, et al, J. Clin. Oncol. 2012, 30, 2483-91; J. A. Woyach, et al, Blood 2014, 123, 1810-17. CLL is also classfied by stage of disease under the Binet or Rai criteria. J. L. Binet, et al, Cancer 1977, 40, 855-64; K. R. Rai, T. Han, Hematol. Oncol. Clin. North Am. 1990, 4, 447-56. Other common mutations, such as 1 lp deletion, 13q deletion, and 17p deletion can be assessed using well-known techniques such as fluorescence in situ hybridization (FISH). In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a CLL in a human that comprises the step of
administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, wherein the CLL is selected from the group consisting of IgVH mutation negative CLL, ZAP-70 positive CLL, ZAP-70 methylated at CpG3 CLL, CD38 positive CLL, chronic lymphocytic leukemia characterized by a 17p 13.1 (17p) deletion, and CLL characterized by a 1 lq22.3 (11 q) deletion.
[00243] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, wherein the CLL has undergone a Richter's transformation. Methods of assessing Richter's transformation, which is also known as Richter's syndrome, are described in P. Jain and S. O'Brien, Oncology, 2012, 26, 1146-52. Richter's transformation is a subtype of CLL that is observed in 5-10% of patients. It involves the development of aggressive lymphoma from CLL and has a generally poor prognosis.
[00244] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a subtype of CLL in a human, comprising the step of administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, wherein the subtype of CLL is a subtype of CLL that increases monocytes and NK cells in peripheral blood when measured after a period of treatment with Formula (II) selected from the group consisting of about 14 days, about 28 days, about 56 days, about 1 month, about 2 months, about 3 months, about 6 months, and about 1 year, and wherein the term "about" refers to a measurement interval of +/- 2 days.
[00245] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia in a patient, wherein the chronic lymphocytic leukemia is chronic lymphocytic leukemia in a patient sensitive to lymphocytosis. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia in a patient, wherein the chronic lymphocytic leukemia is chronic lymphocytic leukemia in a patient exhibiting lymphocytosis caused by a disorder selected from the group consisting of a viral infection, a bacterial infection, a protozoal infection, or a post-splenectomy state. In an embodiment, the viral infection in any of the foregoing embodiments is selected from the group consisting of infectious mononucleosis, hepatitis, and cytomegalovirus. In an embodiment, the bacterial infection in any of the foregoing embodiments is selected from the group consisting of pertussis, tuberculosis, and brucellosis.
[00246] The methods described above may be used as first-line cancer therapy, or after treatment with conventional chemotherapic active pharmaceutical ingredients, including cyclophosphamide, fludarabine, cyclophosphamide and fludarabine (FC chemotherapy), and chlorambucil. The methods described above may also be supplemented with immunotherapeutic monoclonal antibodies such as the anti-CD52 monoclonal antibody alemtuzumab. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating CLL in a human that comprises the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, and further comprises the step of administering to said human an active pharmaceutical ingredient selected from the group consisting of cyclophosphamide, fludarabine,
cyclophosphamide, chlorambucil, salts, esters, prodrugs, cocrystals, solvates, or hydrates thereof, and combinations thereof, and alemtuzumab, antigen-binding fragments, derivatives, conjugates, variants, and radioisotope-labeled complexes thereof.
[00247] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating hematological malgnancies in a human comprising the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof. Hematological malignancies include CLL and SLL, as well as other cancers of the blood, including B cell malignancies. In an
embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a hematological malignancy selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM), Burkitt's lymphoma, multiple myeloma, or myelofibrosis in a human that comprises the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
[00248] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a NHL selected from the group consisting of indolent NHL and aggressive NHL comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
[00249] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a DLBCL selected from the group consisting of activated B-cell like diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL-ABC) and germinal center B-cell like diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL-GCB), comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
[00250] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating an MCL selected from the group consisting of mantle zone MCL, nodular MCL, diffuse MCL, and blastoid MCL (also known as blastic variant MCL), comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
[00251] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a B-ALL selected from the group consisting of early pre-B cell B-ALL, pre-B cell B-ALL, and mature B cell B-ALL (also known as Burkitt's leukemia), comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
[00252] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a Burkitt's lymphoma selected from the group consisting of sporadic Burkitt's lymphoma, endemic Burkitt's lymphoma, and human immunodeficiency virus-associated Burkitt's lymphoma, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
[00253] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a multiple myeloma selected from the group consisting of hyperdiploid multiple myeloma and non-hyperdiploid multiple myeloma, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
[00254] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a myelofibrosis selected from the group consisting of primary myelofibrosis (also known as chronic idiopathic myelofibrosis) and myelofibrosis secondary to polycythemia vera or essential
thrombocythaemia, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
[00255] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a subtype of a hematological malignancy in a human, comprising the step of administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, wherein the subtype of a hematological malignancy is a subtype of a hematological malignancy that increases monocytes and NK cells in peripheral blood when measured after a period of treatment with Formula (II) selected from the group consisting of about 14 days, about 28 days, about 56 days, about 1 month, about 2 months, about 3 months, about 6 months, and about 1 year, wherein the term "about" refers to a measurement interval of +/- 2 days, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM), Burkitt's lymphoma, multiple myeloma, or myelofibrosis.
Methods of Treating Cancers in Patients Sensitive to Thrombosis
[00256] In selected embodiments, the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, cocrystal, hydrate, solvate, or prodrug thereof. In an embodiment, the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, cocrystal, hydrate, solvate, or prodrug thereof. In an embodiment, the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, cocrystal, hydrate, solvate, or prodrug thereof, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient.
[00257] In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and the anticoagulant or the antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient are administered sequentially. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and the anticoagulant or the antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient are administered concomitantly. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered before the anticoagulant or the antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered after the anticoagulant or the antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient.
[00258] In selected embodiments, the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (II), and wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of CLL, SLL, NHL, DLBCL, FL, MCL, Hodgkin's lymphoma, B-ALL, WM, Burkitt's lymphoma, multiple myeloma, or myelofibrosis that comprises the step of administering a therapeutically effective amount of a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof.
[00259] In selected embodiments, the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (II), and wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of acute myeloid leukemia, squamous cell carcinoma including chronic myelocytic leukemia, bladder cancer, head and neck tumor, pancreatic ductal adenocarcinoma (PDA), pancreatic cancer, colon carcinoma, mammary carcinoma, breast cancer, fibrosarcoma, mesothelioma cancer, renal cell carcinoma, lung carcinoma, thyoma, prostate cancer, colorectal cancer, ovarian cancer, thymus cancer, brain cancer, squamous cell cancer, skin cancer, eye cancer, retinoblastoma, melanoma, intraocular melanoma, oral cavity and oropharyngeal cancers, gastric cancer, stomach cancer, cervical cancer, renal cancer, kidney cancer, liver cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, colorectal cancer, esophageal cancer, testicular cancer, gynecological cancer, thyroid cancer, aquired immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS)-related cancers (e.g., lymphoma and Kaposi's sarcoma), viral-induced cancer, glioblastoma, esophogeal tumors, hematological neoplasms, non-small-cell lung cancer, esophagus tumor, hepatitis C virus infection, hepatocellular carcinoma, metastatic colon cancer, multiple myeloma, ovary tumor, pancreas tumor, renal cell carcinoma, small-cell lung cancer, and stage IV melanoma.
[00260] In an embodiment, the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (I) or Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, cocrystal, hydrate, solvate, or prodrug thereof, wherein the cancer is a hematogolical malignancy, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of chronic lymphocytic leukemia, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia, and non-Hodgkin's lymphoma.
[00261] In an embodiment, the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (II), or a
pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, cocrystal, hydrate, solvate, or prodrug thereof, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient, wherein the cancer is a hematological malignancy, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of chronic lymphocytic leukemia, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia, and non-Hodgkin's lymphoma.
[00262] Preferred anti-platelet and anticoagulant agents for use in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, cyclooxygenase inhibitors (e.g., aspirin), adenosine diphosphate (ADP) receptor inhibitors (e.g., clopidogrel and ticlopidine), phosphodiesterase inhibitors (e.g., cilostazol), glycoprotein Ilb/IIIa inhibitors (e.g., abciximab, eptifibatide, and tirofiban), adenosine reuptake inhibitors (e.g., dipyridamole), and acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin). Examples of anti-platelet active pharmaceutical ingredients for use in the methods of the present invention include acenocoumarol, anagrelide, anagrelide hydrochloride, abciximab, aloxiprin, antithrombin, apixaban, argatroban, aspirin, aspirin with extended-release dipyridamole, beraprost, betrixaban, bivalirudin, carbasalate calcium, cilostazol, clopidogrel, clopidogrel bisulfate, cloricromen, dabigatran etexilate, darexaban, dalteparin, dalteparin sodium, defibrotide, dicumarol, diphenadione, dipyridamole, ditazole, desirudin, edoxaban, enoxaparin, enoxaparin sodium, eptifibatide, fondaparinux, fondaparinux sodium, heparin, heparin sodium, heparin calcium, idraparinux, idraparinux sodium, iloprost, indobufen, lepirudin, low molecular weight heparin, melagatran, nadroparin, otamixaban, parnaparin, phenindione, phenprocoumon, prasugrel, picotamide, prostacyclin, ramatroban, reviparin, rivaroxaban, sulodexide, terutroban, terutroban sodium, ticagrelor, ticlopidine, ticlopidine hydrochloride, tinzaparin, tinzaparin sodium, tirofiban, tirofiban hydrochloride, treprostinil, treprostinil sodium, triflusal, vorapaxar, warfarin, warfarin sodium, ximelagatran, salts thereof, solvates thereof, hydrates thereof, cocrystals thereof, prodrugs thereof, and combinations thereof.
[00263] In an embodiment, the invention provides a method of treating a cancer in a human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is Formula (II), or a
pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, cocrystal, hydrate, solvate, or prodrug thereof, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient, wherein the anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient is selected from the group consisting of acenocoumarol, anagrelide, anagrelide hydrochloride, abciximab, aloxiprin, antithrombin, apixaban, argatroban, aspirin, aspirin with extended-release dipyridamole, beraprost, betrixaban, bivalirudin, carbasalate calcium, cilostazol, clopidogrel, clopidogrel bisulfate, cloricromen, dabigatran etexilate, darexaban, dalteparin, dalteparin sodium, defibrotide, dicumarol, diphenadione, dipyridamole, ditazole, desirudin, edoxaban, enoxaparin, enoxaparin sodium, eptifibatide, fondaparinux, fondaparinux sodium, heparin, heparin sodium, heparin calcium, idraparinux, idraparinux sodium, iloprost, indobufen, lepirudin, low molecular weight heparin, melagatran, nadroparin, otamixaban, parnaparin, phenindione, phenprocoumon, prasugrel, picotamide, prostacyclin, ramatroban, reviparin, rivaroxaban, sulodexide, terutroban, terutroban sodium, ticagrelor, ticlopidine, ticlopidine hydrochloride, tinzaparin, tinzaparin sodium, tirofiban, tirofiban hydrochloride, treprostinil, treprostinil sodium, triflusal, vorapaxar, warfarin, warfarin sodium, ximelagatran, salts thereof, solvates thereof, hydrates thereof, cocrystals thereof, prodrugs thereof, and combinations thereof. Combinations of BTK Inhibitors and Anti-CD20 Antibodies
[00264] The BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) and Formula (II) may also be safely co-administered with immunotherapeutic antibodies such as the anti-CD20 antibodies rituximab, obinutuzumab, ofatumumab, veltuzumab, tositumomab, and ibritumomab, and or antigen-binding fragments, derivatives, conjugates, variants, and radioisotope-labeled complexes thereof, which may be given alone or with conventional chemotherapeutic active pharmaceutical ingredients such as those described herein. The CD20 antigen also called human B-lymphocyte-restricted differentiation antigen, Bp35, or Bl) is found on the surface of normal "pre-B" and mature B lymphocytes, including malignant B lymphocytes. L. M. Nadler, et al, J. Clin. Invest. 1981, 67, 134-40; P. Stashenko, et al., J. Immunol. 1980, 139, 3260-85. The CD20 antigen is a glycosylated integral membrane protein with a molecular weight of approximately 35 kD. T. F. Tedder, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 1988, 85, 208-12. CD20 is also expressed on most B cell non-Hodgkin's lymphoma cells, but is not found on hematopoietic stem cells, pro-B cells, normal plasma cells, or other normal tissues. Anti-CD20 antibodies are currently used as therapies for many hematological malignancies, including indolent NHL, aggressive NHL, and CLL/SLL. S. H. Lim, et. al., Haematologica 2010, 95, 135-43; S. A. Beers, et. al, Sem.
Hematol. 2010, 47, 107-14; C. Klein, et al, mAbs 2013, 5, 22-33.
[00265] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering to said human a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, and further comprising the step of administering an anti-CD20 antibody, wherein the anti-CD20 antibody is a monoclonal antibody or an antigen-binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering to said human a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, and further comprising the step of administering an anti-CD20 antibody, wherein the anti-CD20 antibody is an anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody or an antigen-binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof, and wherein the anti-CD20 antibody specifically binds to human CD20 with a KD selected from the group consisting of 1 x 10 7 M or less, 5X 10 8 M or less, 1 x 10 8 M or less, and 5^ 10 9 M or less.
[00266] In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating CLL or SLL in a human comprising the step of administering to said human a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, and further comprising the step of administering an anti-CD20 antibody, wherein the anti-CD20 antibody is a monoclonal antibody or an antigen-binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof. In an embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating CLL or SLL in a human comprising the step of administering to said human a BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester, prodrug, cocrystal, solvate or hydrate thereof, and further comprising the step of administering an anti-CD20 antibody, wherein the anti-CD20 antibody is an anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof, and wherein the anti-CD20 antibody specifically binds to human CD20 with a KD selected from the group consisting of l x l0~7 M or less, 5x l0~8 M or less, l x l0~8 M or less, and 5x l0~9 M or less.
[00267] In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody are administered sequentially. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody are administered concomitantly. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered before the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) is administered after the anticoagulant or the antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient. In selected embodiments, the BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody are administered over the same time period, and the BTK inhibitor administration continues after the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody administration is completed.
[00268] In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is rituximab, or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof.
Rituximab is a chimeric murine-human monoclonal antibody directed against CD20, and its structure comprises an IgGl kappa immunoglobulin containing murine light- and heavy-chain variable region sequences and human constant region sequences. Rituximab is composed of two heavy chains of 451 amino acids and two light chains of 213 amino acids. The amino acid sequence for the heavy chains of rituximab is set forth in SEQ ID NO:l . The amino acid sequence for the light chains of rituximab is set forth in SEQ ID NO:2. Rituximab is
commercially available, and its properties and use in cancer and other diseases is described in more detail in W. Rastetter, et al., Ann. Rev. Med. 2004, 55, 477-503, and in G. L. Plosker and D. P. Figgett, Drugs, 2003, 63, 803-43. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is an anti-CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to rituximab. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO: 1. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:2. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:l . In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:2. In an embodiment, the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO: 1. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:2. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO: 1. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:2.
[00269] In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is obinutuzumab, or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof.
Obinutuzumab is also known as afutuzumab or GA-101. Obinutuzumab is a humanized monoclonal antibody directed against CD20. The amino acid sequence for the heavy chains of obinutuzumab is set forth in SEQ ID NO:3. The amino acid sequence for the light chains of obinutuzumab is set forth in SEQ ID NO:4. Obinutuzumab is commercially available, and its properties and use in cancer and other diseases is described in more detail in T. Robak, Curr. Opin. Investig. Drugs 2009, 10, 588-96. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is an anti-CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to obinutuzumab. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:3. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:4. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:3. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:4. In an embodiment, the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:3. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:4. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:3. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:4. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody
obinutuzumab is an immunoglobulin Gl, anti-(human B-lymphocyte antigen CD20 (membrane- spanning 4-domains subfamily A member 1, B-lymphocyte surface antigen Bl, Leu- 16 or Bp35)), humanized mouse monoclonal obinutuzumab des-CH3107-K-yl heavy chain (222-219')- disulfide with humanized mouse monoclonal obinutuzumab κ light chain dimer (228-228" :231- 231")-bisdisulfide antibody.
[00270] In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is ofatumumab, or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof.
Ofatumumab is described in B. D. Cheson, J. Clin. Oncol. 2010, 28, 3525-30. The crystal structure of the Fab fragment of ofatumumab has been reported in Protein Data Bank reference 3GIZ and in J. Du, et al., Mol. Immunol. 2009, 46, 2419-2423. Ofatumumab is commercially available, and its preparation, properties, and use in cancer and other diseases is described in more detail in U.S. Patent No. 8,529,202 B2, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is an anti-CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to ofatumumab. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:5. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:6. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:5. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:6. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:5. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:6. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:5. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a variable light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:6. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:7. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:8. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:7. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:8. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:7. In an embodiment, the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:8. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:7. In an embodiment, the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody has a Fab fragment light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:8. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ofatumumab is an immunoglobulin Gl, anti-(human B-lymphocyte antigen CD20 (membrane-spanning 4-domains subfamily A member 1, B-lymphocyte surface antigen Bl, Leu-16 or Bp35)); human monoclonal ofatumumab-CD20 γΐ heavy chain (225-214')-disulfide with human monoclonal ofatumumab- CD20 K light chain, dimer (231-231":234-234")-bisdisulfide antibody.
[00271] In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is veltuzumab, or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof.
Veltuzumab is also known as hA20. Veltuzumab is described in D. M. Goldenberg, et ah, Leuk. Lymphoma 2010, 51, 747-55. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is an anti- CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to veltuzumab. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO:9. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO: 10. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO:9. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO: 10. In an embodiment, the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO:9. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO: 10. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO:9. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO: 10. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody ofatumumab is an immunoglobulin Gl, anti-(human B-lymphocyte antigen CD20 (membrane- spanning 4-domains subfamily A member 1, Leu- 16, Bp35)); [218- arginine,360-glutamic acid,362-methionine]humanized mouse monoclonal hA20 γΐ heavy chain (224-213 ')-disulfide with humanized mouse monoclonal hA20 κ light chain (230-230":233-233")-bisdisulfide dimer
[00272] In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is tositumomab, or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is 131I-labeled tositumomab. In an
embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is an anti-CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to tositumomab. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO: 11. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO: 12. In an embodiment, the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO: 11. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO: 12. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO: 11. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO: 12. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO: 11. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO: 12.
[00273] In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is ibritumomab, or an antigen- binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof. The active form of ibritumomab used in therapy is ibritumomab tiuxetan. When used with ibritumomab, the chelator tiuxetan (diethylene triamine pentaacetic acid) is complexed with a radioactive isotope such as 90Y or mIn. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody is ibritumomab tiuxetan, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof. In an embodiment, the anti- CD20 monoclonal antibody is an anti-CD20 biosimilar monoclonal antibody approved by drug regulatory authorities with reference to tositumomab. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO: 13. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 90% to SEQ ID NO: 14. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO: 13. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 95% to SEQ ID NO: 14. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO: 13. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 98% to SEQ ID NO: 14. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a heavy chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO: 13. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody has a light chain sequence identity of greater than 99% to SEQ ID NO: 14.
[00274] In an embodiment, an anti-CD20 antibody selected from the group consisting of obinutuzumab, ofatumumab, veltuzumab, tositumomab, and ibritumomab, and or antigen- binding fragments, derivatives, conjugates, variants, and radioisotope-labeled complexes thereof, is administered to a subject by infusion in a dose selected from the group consisting of about 100 mg, about 200 mg, about 300 mg, about 400 mg, about 500 mg, about 600 mg, about 700 mg, about 800 mg, about 900 mg, about 1000 mg, about 1100 mg, about 1200 mg, about 1300 mg, about 1400 mg, about 1500 mg, about 1600 mg, about 1700 mg, about 1800 mg, about 1900 mg, and about 2000 mg. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 antibody is admininstered weekly. In an embodiment, the anti-CD20 antibody is admininstered monthly. In an embodiment, the anti- CD20 antibody is administered at a lower initial dose, which is escalated when administered at subsequent intervals admininstered monthly. For example, the first infusion can deliver 300 mg of anti-CD20 antibody, and subsequent weekly doses could deliver 2,000 mg of anti-CD20 antibody for eight weeks, followed by monthly doses of 2,000 mg of anti-CD20 antibody.
During any of the foregoing embodiments, the BTK inhibitors of Formula (I) or Formula (II) may be administered daily, twice daily, or at different intervals as described above, at the dosages described above.
[00275] In an embodiment, the invention provides a kit comprising a composition comprising a BTK inhibitor of Formula (I) or Formula (II) and a composition comprising an anti-CD20 antibody selected from the group consisting of rituximab, obinutuzumab, ofatumumab, veltuzumab, tositumomab, and ibritumomab, or an antigen-binding fragment, derivative, conjugate, variant, or radioisotope-labeled complex thereof, for use in the treatment of CLL or SLL, hematological malignancies, B cell malignanciesor, or any of the other diseases described herein. The compositions are typically both pharmaceutical compositions. The kit is for use in co-administration of the anti-CD20 antibody and the BTK inhibitor, either simultaneously or separately, in the treatment of CLL or SLL, hematological malignancies, B cell malignancies, or any of the other diseases described herein.
EXAMPLES
[00276] The embodiments encompassed herein are now described with reference to the following examples. These examples are provided for the purpose of illustration only and the disclosure encompassed herein should in no way be construed as being limited to these examples, but rather should be construed to encompass any and all variations which become evident as a result of the teachings provided herein.
Example 1 - Preclinical Study of a Second Generation BTK Inhibitor for Use in CLL/SLL
[00277] The BTK inhibitor ibrutinib ((1 -[(3i?)-3-[4-amino-3-(4-phenoxyphenyl)- 1H- pyrazolo[3,4-<i]pyrimidin-l-yl]piperidin-l-yl]prop-2-en-l-one) is a first-generation BTK inhibitor. In clinical testing as a monotherapy in subjects with hematologic malignancies, ibrutinib was generally well tolerated at dose levels through 840 mg (the highest dose tested). R. H. Advani, et al., J. Clin. Oncol. 2013, 31, 88-94; J. C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 32-42; M. L. Wang, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 507-16. No maximum tolerated dose (MTD) was apparent within the tested dose range. Furthermore, subjects typically found the drug tolerable over periods extending to > 2 years. No subject had tumor lysis syndrome. No overt pattern of myelosuppression was associated with ibrutinib treatment. No drug-related reductions in circulating CD4 T cells or serum immunoglobulins were noted. Adverse events with an apparent relationship to study drug included diarrhea and rash.
[00278] In subjects with heavily pretreated non-Hodgkin lymphoma (NHL), ibrutinib showed substantial antitumor activity, inducing durable regressions of lymphadenopathy and
splenomegaly in most subjects. Improvements in disease-associated anemia and
thrombocytopenia were observed. The pattern of changes in subjects with CLL was notable. Single-agent ibrutinib caused rapid and substantial reductions in lymph node size concomitant with a redistribution of malignant sites into the peripheral blood. An asymptomatic absolute lymphocyte count (ALC) increase was observed that was maximal during the first few months of treatment and generally decreased thereafter but could be persistent in some subjects or could be seen repeatedly in subjects who had interruption and resumption of drug therapy.
[00279] Collectively, these data with ibrutinib support the potential benefits of selective BTK inhibition in the treatment of subjects with relapsed lymphoid cancers. However, while highly potent in inhibiting BTK, ibrutinib has also shown in vitro activity against other kinases with a cysteine in the same position as Cys481 in BTK to which the drug covalently binds. For example, ibrutinib inhibits epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), which may be the cause of ibrutinib-related diarrhea and rash. In addition, it is a substrate for both cytochrome P450 (CYP) enzymes 3A4/5 and 2D6, which increases the possibility of drug-drug interactions. These liabilities support the development of alternative BTK inhibitors for use in the therapy of lymphoid cancer.
[00280] The preclinical selectivity and potency characteristics of the second-generation BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) were compared to the first-generation BTK inhibitor ibrutinib. In Table 1 , a kinome screen (performed Life Technologies or based on literature data) is shown that compares these compounds. TABLE 1. Kinome Screen for BTK Inhibitors (IC
Figure imgf000084_0001
[00281] The results shown in Table 1 are obtained from a 10 point biochemical assay generated from 10 point concentration curves. The BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) shows much greater selectivity for BTK compared to other kinases than ibrutinib.
[00282] A comparison of the in vivo potency results for the BTK inhibitors of Formula (II) and ibrutinib is shown in FIG. 1. CD86 and CD69 are cell surface proteins that are BCR activation markers. To obtain the in vivo potency results, mice were gavaged at increasing drug
concentration and sacrificed at one time point (3 h post-dose). BCR was stimulated with IgM and the expression of activation marker CD69 and CD86 are monitored by flow cytometry and to determine EC50 values.
[00283] Formula (II) is currently being evaluated in an ongoing study of canine spontaneous B- cell lymphoma. Six dogs have been treated with Formula (II) using 2.5 mg/kg once daily oral administration for an average of 22 days (range 14 to 42 days). To date, partial remission (PR), per Veterinary Cooperative Oncology Group criteria for assessment of response in peripheral nodal lymphoma, has been observed in 2 of 6 dogs. D. M. Vali, et al, Vet. Comp. Oncol. 8, 28- 37 (2010). No drug-related adverse events have been reported to date in this study. These findings are preliminary and similar to the clinical responses {i.e., 3 dogs with PR out of 8 dogs treated) observed with ibrutinib in dogs with spontaneous B-cell lymphoma. L. A. Honigberg, et al, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA, 107, 13075-13080 (2010). [00284] In vitro and in vivo safety pharmacology studies with Formula (II) have demonstrated a favorable nonclinical safety profile. When screened at 10 μΜ in binding assays evaluating interactions with 80 known pharmacologic targets such as G-protein-coupled receptors, nuclear receptors, proteases, and ion channels, Formula (II) shows significant activity only against the A3 adenosine receptor; follow-up dose-response experiments indicated a IC50 of 2.7 μΜ, suggesting a low clinical risk of off-target effects. Formula (II) at 10 μΜ showed no inhibition of in vitro EGFR phosphorylation in an A431 human epidermoid cancer cell line whereas ibrutinib had an IC50 of 66 nM. The in vitro effect of Formula (II) on human ether-a-go-go- related gene (hERG) channel activity was investigated in vitro in human embryonic kidney cells stably transfected with hERG. Formula (II) inhibited hERG channel activity by 25% at 10 μΜ, suggesting a low clinical risk that Formula (II) would induce clinical QT prolongation as predicted by this assay. Formula (II) was well tolerated in standard in vivo Good Laboratory Practices (GLP) studies of pharmacologic safety. A functional observation battery in rats at doses of through 300 mg/kg (the highest dose level) revealed no adverse effects on
neurobehavioral effects or body temperature at any dose level. A study of respiratory function in rats also indicated no treatment-related adverse effects at doses through 300 mg/kg (the highest dose level). In a cardiovascular function study in awake telemeterized male beagle dogs, single doses of Formula (II) at dose levels through 30 mg/kg (the highest dose level) induced no meaningful changes in body temperature, cardiovascular, or electrocardiographic (ECG) (including QT interval) parameters. The results suggest that Formula (II) is unlikely to cause serious off-target effects or adverse effects on critical organ systems.
[00285] The drug-drug interaction potential of Formula (II) was also evaluated. In vitro experiments evaluating loss of parent drug as catalyzed by CYPs indicated that Formula (II) is metabolized by CYP3A4. In vitro metabolism studies using mouse, rat, dog, rabbit, monkey, and human hepatocytes incubated with 14C-labeled Formula (II) indicated two mono-oxidized metabolites and a glutathione conjugate. No unique human metabolite was identified.
Preliminary evaluations of metabolism in the plasma, bile, and urine of rats, dogs, and monkeys indicated metabolic processes of oxidation, glutathione binding, and hydrolysis. It was shown that Formula (II) binds to glutathione but does not deplete glutathione in vitro. Nonclinical CYP interaction studies data indicate that Formula (II) is very unlikely to cause clinical drug-drug interactions through alteration of the metabolism of drugs that are substrates for CYP enzymes. Example 2 - Clinical Study of a Second Generation BTK Inhibitor for Use in CLL/SLL
[00286] Clinical studies have shown that targeting the BCR signaling pathway by inhibiting BTK produces significant clinical benefit in patients with non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL). The second generation BTK inhibitor, Formula (II), achieves significant oral bioavailability and potency, and has favorable preclinical characteristics, as described above. The purpose of this study is to evaluate the safety and efficacy of the second generation BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) in treating subjects with chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL) and small lymphocytic lymphoma (SLL).
[00287] The design and conduct of this study is supported by an understanding of the history and current therapies for subjects with lymphoid cancers; knowledge of the activity and safety of a first-generation BTK inhibitor, ibrutinib, in subjects with hematologic cancers; and the available nonclinical information regarding Formula (II). The collective data support the following conclusions. BTK expression plays an important role in the biology of lymphoid neoplasms, which represent serious and life-threatening disorders with continuing unmet medical need. Clinical evaluation of Formula (II) as a potential treatment for these disorders has sound scientific rationale based on observations that the compound selectively abrogates BTK activity and shows activity in nonclinical models of lymphoid cancers. These data are supported by clinical documentation that ibrutinib, a first-generation BTK inhibitor, is clinically active in these diseases. Ibrutinib clinical data and Formula (II) nonclinical safety pharmacology and toxicology studies support the safety of testing Formula (II) in subjects with B cell malignancies.
[00288] The primary objectives of the clinical study are as follows: (1) establish the safety and the MTD of orally administered Formula (II) in subjects with CLL/SLL; (2) determine pharmacokinetics (PK) of orally administered Formula (II) and identification of its major metabolite(s); and (3) measure pharmacodynamic (PD) parameters including drug occupancy of BTK, the target enzyme, and effect on biologic markers of B cell function.
[00289] The secondary objective of the clinical study is to evaluate tumor responses in patients treated with Formula (II).
[00290] This study is a multicenter, open-label, nonrandomized, sequential group, dose escalation study. The following dose cohorts will be evaluated: Cohort 1 : 100 mg/day for 28 days (= 1 cycle)
Cohort 2: 175 mg/day for 28 days (= 1 cycle)
Cohort 3 : 250 mg/day for 28 days (= 1 cycle)
Cohort 4: 350 mg/day for 28 days (= 1 cycle)
Cohort 5 : 450 mg/day for 28 days (= 1 cycle)
Cohort 6: To be determined amount in mg/day for 28 days (= 1 cycle)
[00291] Each cohort will be enrolled sequentially with 6 subjects per cohort. If < 1 dose- limiting toxicity (DLT) is observed in the cohort during Cycle 1 , escalation to the next cohort will proceed. Subjects may be enrolled in the next cohort if 4 of the 6 subjects enrolled in the cohort completed Cycle 1 without experiencing a DLT, while the remaining 2 subjects are completing evaluation. If > 2 DLTs are observed during Cycle 1, dosing at that dose and higher will be suspended and the MTD will be established as the previous cohort. The MTD is defined as the largest daily dose for which fewer than 33% of the subjects experience a DLT during Cycle 1. Dose escalation will end when either the MTD is achieved or at 3 dose levels above full BTK occupancy, whichever occurs first. Full BTK occupancy is defined as Formula (II) active- site occupancy of > 80% (average of all subjects in cohort) at 24 hours postdose. Should escalation to Cohort 6 be necessary, the dose will be determined based on the aggregate data from Cohorts 1 to 5, which includes safety, efficacy, and PK/PD results. The dose for Cohort 6 will not exceed 900 mg/day.
[00292] Treatment with Formula (II) may be continued for > 28 days until disease progression or an unacceptable drug-related toxicity occurs. Subjects with disease progression will be removed from the study. All subjects who discontinue study drug will have a safety follow-up visit 30 (±7) days after the last dose of study drug unless they have started another cancer therapy within that timeframe. Radiologic tumor assessment will be done at screening and at the end of Cycle 2, Cycle 4, and Cycle 12 and at investigator discretion. Confirmation of complete response (CR) will require bone marrow analysis and radiologic tumor assessment. For subjects who remain on study for > 11 months, a mandatory bone marrow aspirate and biopsy is required in Cycle 12 concurrent with the radiologic tumor assessment. [00293] All subjects will have standard hematology, chemistry, and urinalysis safety panels done at screening. This study also includes pancreatic function assessment (serum amylase and serum lipase) due to the pancreatic findings in the 28-day GLP rat toxicity study. Once dosing commences, all subjects will be evaluated for safety once weekly for the first 4 weeks, every other week for Cycle 2, and monthly thereafter. Blood samples will be collected during the first week of treatment for PK/PD assessments. ECGs will be done at screening, and on Day 1-2, 8, 15, 22, 28 of Cycle 1, Day 15 and 28 of Cycle 2, and monthly thereafter through Cycle 6. ECGs are done in triplicate for screening only. Thereafter, single ECG tests are done unless a repeat ECG testing is required.
[00294] Dose-limiting toxicity is defined as any of the following events (if not related to disease progression): (1) any Grade > 3 non-hemato logic toxicity (except alopecia) persisting despite receipt of a single course of standard outpatient symptomatic therapy (e.g., Grade 3 diarrhea that responds to a single, therapeutic dose of Imodium® would not be considered a DLT); (2) grade > 3 prolongation of the corrected QT interval (QTc), as determined by a central ECG laboratory overread; (3) grade 4 neutropenia (absolute neutrophil count [ANC] < 500/μΕ) lasting > 7 days after discontinuation of therapy without growth factors or lasting > 5 days after discontinuation of therapy while on growth factors (i.e., Grade 4 neutropenia not lasting as long as specified will not be considered a DLT), (4) grade 4 thrombocytopenia (platelet count < 20,000/μΕ) lasting > 7 days after discontinuation of therapy or requiring transfusion (i.e., Grade 4 thrombocytopenia not lasting as long as specified will not be considered a DLT), and (5) dosing delay due to toxicity for > 7 consecutive days.
[00295] The efficacy parameters for the study include overall response rate, duration of response, and progression-free survival (PFS). The safety parameters for the study include DLTs and MTD, frequency, severity, and attribution of adverse events (AEs) based on the Common Terminology Criteria for Adverse Events (CTCAE v4.03) for non-hematologic AEs. M. Hallek, et al, Blood 2008, 111, 5446-5456.
[00296] The schedule of assessments is as follows, with all days stated in the following meaning the given day or +/- 2 days from the given day. A physical examination, including vital signs and weight, are performed at screening, during cycle 1 at 1, 8, 15, 22, and 28 days, during cycle 2 at 15 and 28 days, during cycles 3 to 24 at 28 days, and at follow up (after the last dose). The screening physical examination includes, at a minimum, the general appearance of the subject, height (screening only) and weight, and examination of the skin, eyes, ears, nose, throat, lungs, heart, abdomen, extremities, musculoskeletal system, lymphatic system, and nervous system. Symptom-directed physical exams are done thereafter. Vital signs (blood pressure, pulse, respiratory rate, and temperature) are assessed after the subject has rested in the sitting position. Eastern Cooperative Oncology Group (ECOG) status is assessed at screening, during cycle 1 at 1, 8, 15, 22, and 28 days, during cycle 2 at 15 and 28 days, during cycles 3 to 24 at 28 days, and at follow up, using the published ECOG performance status indications described in M. M. Oken, et ah, Am. J. Clin. Oncol. 1982, 5, 649-655. ECG testing is performed at screening, during cycle 1 at 1, 2, 8, 15, 22, and 28 days, during cycle 2 at 15 and 28 days, during cycles 3 to 24 at 28 days, and at follow up. The 12-lead ECG test will be done in triplicate (> 1 minute apart) at screening. The calculated QTc average of the 3 ECGs must be <480 ms for eligibility. On cycle 1, day 1 and cycle 1, day 8, single ECGs are done predose and at 1, 2, 4, and 6 h postdose. The single ECG on Cycle 1 Day 2 is done predose. On cycle 1, day 15, day 22, and day 28, a single ECG is done 2 hours post-dose. Starting with cycle 2, a single ECG is done per visit. Subjects should be in supine position and resting for at least 10 minutes before study- related ECGs. Two consecutive machine-read QTc > 500 ms or > 60 ms above baseline require central ECG review. Hematology, including complete blood count with differential and platelet and reticulocyte counts, is assesed at screening, during cycle 1 at 1, 8, 15, 22, and 28 days, during cycle 2 at 15 and 28 days, during cycles 3 to 24 at 28 days, and at follow up. Serum chemistry is assesed at screening, during cycle 1 at 1, 8, 15, 22, and 28 days, during cycle 2 at 15 and 28 days, during cycles 3 to 24 at 28 days, and at follow up. Serum chemistry includes albumin, alkaline phosphatase, ALT, AST, bicarbonate, blood urea nitrogen (BUN), calcium, chloride, creatinine, glucose, lactate dehydrogenase (LDH), magnesium, phosphate, potassium, sodium, total bilirubin, total protein, and uric acid. Cell counts and serum immunoglobulin are performed at screening, at cycle 2, day 28, and at every 6 months thereafter until last dose and include T/B/NK/monocyte cell counts (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD14, CD19, CD19, CD16/56, and others as needed) and serum immunoglobulin (IgG, IgM, IgA, and total immunoglobulin). Bone marrow aspirates are performed at cycle 12. Pharmacodynamics samples are drawn during cycle 1 at 1, 2, and 8 days, and at follow up. On days 1 and 8, pharmacodynamic samples are drawn pre-dose and 4 hours (±10 minutes) post-dose, and on day 2, pharmacodynamic samples are drawn pre-dose. Pharmacokinetics samples are drawn during cycle 1 at 1, 2, 8, 15, 22, and 28 days. Pharmacokinetic samples for Cycle 1 Day 1 are drawn pre-dose and at 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6 and 24 hours (before dose on Day 2) post-dose. Samples for Cycle 1 Day 8 are drawn pre-dose and at 0.5, 1, 2, 4, and 6 hours post-dose. On Cycle 1 Day 15, 22, and 28, a PK sample is drawn pre- dose and the second PK sample must be drawn before (up to 10 minutes before) the ECG acquisition, which is 2 hours postdose. Pretreatment radiologic tumor assessments are performed within 30 days before the first dose. A computed tomography (CT) scan (with contrast unless contraindicated) is required of the chest, abdomen, and pelvis. In addition, a positron emission tomography (PET) or PET/CT must done for subjects with SLL. Radiologic tumor assessments are mandatory at the end of Cycle 2 (-7 days), Cycle 4 (- 7days), and Cycle 12 (-7 days).
Otherwise, radiologic tumor assessments are done at investigator discretion. A CT (with contrast unless contraindicated) scan of the chest, abdomen, and pelvis is required for subjects with CLL. In addition, a PET/CT is required in subjects with SLL. Bone marrow and radiologic
assessments are both required for confirmation of a complete response (CR). Clinical assessments of tumor response should be done at the end of Cycle 6 and every 3 months thereafter. Molecular markers are measured at screening, and include interphase cytogenetics, stimulated karyotype, IgHV mutational status, Zap-70 methylation, and beta-2 microglobulin levels. Urinalysis is performed at screening, and includes pH, ketones, specific gravity, bilirubin, protein, blood, and glucose. Other assessments, including informed consent, eligibility, medical history, and pregnancy test are done at the time of screening.
[00297] The investigator rates the subject's response to treatment based on recent guidelines for CLL, as given in M. Hallek, et al, Blood 2008, 111, 5446-56, and for SLL, as given in B. D. Cheson, et al, J. Clin. Oncol. 2007, 25, 579-586. The response assessment criteria for CLL are summarized in Table 2.
TABLE 2. Response Assessment Criteria for CLL. Abbreviations: ANC = absolute neutrophil count; CR = complete remission; CRi = CR with incomplete blood count recovery; PR = partial remission.
Figure imgf000091_0001
a. Computed tomography (CT) scan of abdomen, pelvis, and chest is required for this evaluation b. Without need for exogenous growth factors
c. In the sum products of < 6 lymph nodes or in the largest diameter of the enlarged lymph node(s) detected before therapy and no increase in any lymph node or new enlarged lymph nodes
[00298] The response assessment criteria for SLL are summarized in Table 3.
TABLE 3. Response Assessment Criteria for SLL. Abbreviations: CR = complete remission, CT = computed tomography, FDG = [18F]fluorodeoxyglucose, PET = positron-emission tomography, PR = partial remission, SD = stable disease, SPD = sum of the product of the diameters.
Figure imgf000092_0001
[00299] The PK parameters of the study are as follows. The plasma PK of Formula (II) and a metabolite is characterized using noncompartmental analysis. The following PK parameters are calculated, whenever possible, from plasma concentrations of Formula (II): AUC(o-t): Area under the plasma concentration-time curve calculated using linear trapezoidal summation from time 0 to time t, where t is the time of the last measurable concentration (Ct),
AUC(o-24): Area under the plasma concentration-time curve from 0 to 24 hours, calculated using linear trapezoidal summation,
AUC(o-∞): Area under the plasma concentration-time curve from 0 to infinity, calculated using the formula: AUC(o_∞) = AUC(o-t) + Ct / λζ, where λζ is the apparent terminal elimination rate constant,
CmaX: Maximum observed plasma concentration,
maX: Time of the maximum plasma concentration (obtained without interpolation), t½: Terminal elimination half- life (whenever possible),
^: Terminal elimination rate constant (whenever possible),
Cl/F: Oral clearance.
[00300] The PD parameters of the study are as follows. The occupancy of BTK by Formula (II) are measured in peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) with the aid of a biotin-tagged Formula (II) analogue probe. The effect of Formula (II) on biologic markers of B cell function will also be evaluated.
[00301] The statistical analysis used in the study is as follows. No formal statistical tests of hypotheses are performed. Descriptive statistics (including means, standard deviations, and medians for continuous variables and proportions for discrete variables) are used to summarize data as appropriate.
[00302] The following definitions are used for the safety and efficacy analysis sets: Safety analysis set: All enrolled subjects who receive > 1 dose of study drug; Per-protocol (PP) analysis set: All enrolled subjects who receive > 1 dose of study drug and with > 1 tumor response assessment after treatment. The safety analysis set will be used for evaluating the safety parameters in this study. The PP analysis sets will be analyzed for efficacy parameters in this study.
[00303] No imputation of values for missing data is performed except for missing or partial start and end dates for adverse events and concomitant medication will be imputed according to prespecified, conservative imputation rules. Subjects lost to follow-up (or drop out) will be included in statistical analyses to the point of their last evaluation.
[00304] The safety endpoint analysis was performed as follows. Safety summaries will include summaries in the form of tables and listings. The frequency (number and percentage) of treatment emergent adverse events will be reported in each treatment group by Medical
Dictionary for Regulatory Activities (MedDRA) System Organ Class and Preferred Term.
Summaries will also be presented by the severity of the adverse event and by relationship to study drug. Laboratory shift tables containing counts and percentages will be prepared by treatment assignment, laboratory parameter, and time. Summary tables will be prepared for each laboratory parameter. Figures of changes in laboratory parameters over time will be generated. Vital signs, ECGs, and physical exams will be tabulated and summarized.
[00305] Additional analyses include summaries of subject demographics, baseline
characteristics, compliance, and concurrent treatments. Concomitant medications will be coded according to the World Health Organization (WHO) Drug Dictionary and tabulated.
[00306] The analysis of efficacy parameters was performed as follows. The point estimate of the overall response rate will be calculated for the PP analysis set. The corresponding 95% confidence interval also will be derived. The duration of overall response is measured from the time measurement criteria are met for CR or PR (whichever is first recorded) until the first date that recurrent or progressive disease is objectively documented (taking as reference for progressive disease the smallest measurements recorded since the treatment started). Kaplan- Meier methodology will be used to estimate event- free curves and corresponding quantiles (including the median). Progression-free survival is measured from the time of first study drug administration until the first date that recurrent or progressive disease is objectively documented (taking as reference for progressive disease the smallest measurements recorded since the treatment started). Kaplan-Meier methodology will be used to estimate the event- free curves and corresponding quantiles (including the median).
[00307] The study scheme is a seqential cohort escalation. Each cohort consists of six subjects. The sample size of the study is 24 to 36 subjects, depending on dose escalation into subsequent cohorts. Cohort 1 (N = 6) consists of Formula (II), 100 mg QD for 28 days. Cohort 2 (N = 6) consists of Formula (II), 175 mg QD for 28 days. Cohort 3 (N = 6) consists of Formula (II), 250 mg QD for 28 days. Cohort 4 (N = 6) consists of Formula (II), 350 mg QD for 28 days. Cohort 5 (N = 6) consists of Formula (II), 450 mg QD for 28 days. Cohort 6 (N = 6) consists of Formula (II), at a dose to be determined QD for 28 days. The dose level for Cohort 6 will be determined based on the safety and efficacy of Cohorts 1 to 5, and will not exceed 900 mg/day. Escalation will end with either the MTD cohort or three levels above full BTK occupancy, whichever is observed first. An additional arm of the study will explore 100 mg BID dosing. Treatment with oral Formula (II) may be continued for greater than 28 days until disease progression or an unacceptable drug-related toxicity occurs.
[00308] The inclusion criteria for the study are as follows: (1) men and women > 18 years of age with a confirmed diagnosis of CLL/SLL, which has relapsed after, or been refractory to, > 2 previous treatments for CLL/SLL; however, subjects with 17p deletion are eligible if they have relapsed after, or been refractory to, 1 prior treatment for CLL/SLL; (2) body weight > 60 kg, (3) ECOG performance status of < 2; (4) agreement to use contraception during the study and for 30 days after the last dose of study drug if sexually active and able to bear children; (5) willing and able to participate in all required evaluations and procedures in this study protocol including swallowing capsules without difficulty; or (6) ability to understand the purpose and risks of the study and provide signed and dated informed consent and authorization to use protected health information (in accordance with national and local subject privacy regulations).
[00309] The dosage form and strength of Formula (II) used in the clinical study is a hard gelatin capsules prepared using standard pharmaceutical grade excipients (microcrystalline cellulose) and containing 25 mg of Formula (II) each. The color of the capsules is Swedish orange. The route of administration is oral (per os, or PO). The dose regimen is once daily or twice daily, as defined by the cohort, on an empty stomach (defined as no food 2 hours before and 30 minutes after dosing). [00310] The baseline characteristics for the patients enrolled in the clinical study are given in Table 4.
TABLE 4. Relapsed/refractory CLL baseline characteristics.
Figure imgf000096_0001
[00311] The results of the clinical study in relapsed/refractory CLL patients are summarized in Table 5.
TABLE 5. Activity of Formula (II) in relapsed/refractory CLL. (PR = partial response; PR+L = partial response with lymphocytosis; SD = stable disease; PD = progressive disease.)
Figure imgf000096_0002
[00312] FIG. 2 shows the median % change in ALC and SPD from baseline in the clinical study of Formula (II), plotted in comparison to the results reported for ibrutinib in Figure 1A of J. C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 12-42. The results show that Formula (II) leads to a more rapid patient response in CLL than corresponding treatment with ibrutinib. This effect is illustrated, for example, by the median % change in SPD, which achieved the same status in the present study at 7 months of treatment with Formula (II) as compared to 18 months for ibrutinib. The % change in SPD observed in the different cohorts {i.e. by dose and dosing regimen) is shown in FIG. 3, and in all cases shows significant responses.
[00313] A Kaplan-Meier curve showing PFS from the clinical CLL study of Formula (II) is shown in FIG. 4. A comparison of survival curves was performed using the Log-Rank (Mantle- Cox) test, with a p-value of 0.0206 indicating that the survival curves are different. The number of patients at risk is shown in FIG. 5. Both FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 show the results for Formula (II) in comparison to the results reported for ibrutinib in J. C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 32-42. An improvement in survival and a reduction in risk are observed in CLL patients treated with Formula (II) in comparison to patients treated with ibrutinib.
[00314] Based on the data and comparisons shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. 5, the CLL study with Formula (II) showed that the efficacy of Formula (II) was surprisingly superior to that of ibrutinib.
[00315] In the literature study of ibrutinib, increased disease progression was associated with patients with high-risk cytogenetic lesions ( 17p 13.1 deletion or 1 lq22.3 deletion), as shown in Figure 3A in J. C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 32-42, which shows ibrutinib PFS including PFS broken down by genetic abnormality. The 17p and 1 lq deletions are validated high-risk characteristics of CLL, and the 17p deletion is the highest risk. In FIG. 6, the PFS is shown for Formula (II) in patients with the 17p deletion in comparison to the results obtained for ibrutinib in J. C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 32-42. A p-value of 0.0696 was obtained. In FIG. 7, the number of patients at risk with the 17p deletion is compared. To date, no 17p patients have progressed on Formula (II). [00316] The adverse events observed in the clinical study in relapsed/refractory CLL are given in Table 6. No DLTs were observed. The MTD was not reached. No treatment-related serious adverse events (SAEs) were observed. No prophylactic antivirals or antibiotics were needed.
TABLE 6. Treatment-related adverse events reported in the clinical study of Formula (II) in relapsed/refractory CLL. (Reported in > 5% of patients.)
Figure imgf000098_0001
[00317] The clinical study of Formula (II) thus showed other unexpectedly superior results compared to ibrutinib therapy. A lack of lymphocytosis was observed in the study.
Furthermore, only grade 1 AEs were observed, and these AEs were attributable to the high BTK selectivity of Formula (II).
[00318] BTK target occupany was measured for relapsed/refractory CLL patients with the results shown in FIG. 8. For 200 mg QD dosing of the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), approximately 94% - 99% BTK occupancy was observed, with superior 24 hour coverage and less inter-patient variability also observed. For 420 mg and 840 mg QD of the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib, 80% - 90% BTK occupancy was observed, with more inter-patient variability and capped occupancy. These results indicate that the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) achieves superior BTK occupancy in CLL patients than ibrutinib.
[00319] The effects of Formula (II) on cell subset percentages were also evaluated using flow cytometry analysis of peripheral blood, with the results shown in FIG. 9, FIG. 10, FIG. 11, FIG. 12, FIG. 13, and FIG. 14. PBMC samples from CLL patient samples drawn prior to (predose) and after 28 days of dosing with Formula (II) were compared for potential changes in cell subsets. PBMCs were stained with monoclonal antibodies conjugated to fluorescent tags (flourochromes) to identify cell subsets via flow cytometry. Non-viable cells were excluded from the analysis using the dye 7-aminoactinomycin D (7-AAD). To produce the metric of percent change, the following steps were taken. First, each cell subset was defined by hierarchical flow cytometry gating. Then, the change in frequency (between day 1 and day 28) was calculated for each cell subset. MDSC subsets were measured as a % of all myeloid cells. T cell subsets were measured as a % of all CD3+ cells, and NK cells were measured as a % of all live CD45+ cells. In FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the results show the % change in MDSC (monocytic) level over 28 days versus % ALC change at cycle 1 day 28 (C1D28) and at cycle 2 day 28 (C2D28). A cycle is 28 days. A trend is observed wherein patients with decreasing ALC % had increasing MDSC (monocytic) %. This may include patients who had quickly resolving lymphocytosis and those with no initial lymphocytosis. This provides evidence that treatment with Formula (II) mobilizes MDSCs and thus affects the CLL tumor microenvironment in marrow and lymph nodes, which is an unexpected indication of superior efficacy. In FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the results show the % change in NK cell level over 28 days versus % ALC change, measured at C1D28 or C2D28, and similar trends are observed wherein patients with decreasing ALC % had increasing NK cell %. This may include patients who had quickly resolving lymphocytosis and those having no initial lymphocytosis. The effects in FIG. 9 to FIG. 12 are observed in multiple cohorts, at doses including 100 mg BID, 200 mg QD, and 400 mg QD. In FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the effects on NK cells and MDSC cells are compared to a number of other markers versus % change in ALC at C1D28 and C2D28. These other markers include CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, CD4+/CD8+ T cell ratio, NK-T cells, PD-1+ CD4+ T cells, and PD-1+ CD8+ T cells. The effects on NK cells and MDSC cells are observed to be much more pronounced than on any of these other markers.
[00320] These results suggest that after Formula (II) administration, the CLL microenvironment undergoes a change wherein NK cells and monocytic MDSC subsets increase in frequency in the peripheral blood in patients with falling ALC counts, an important clinical parameter in CLL. The NK cell increase may reflect an overall increase in cytolytic activity against B-CLL resulting in the ALC % to drop. The increase in MDSC % in the blood may be due to a movement of these cells out of the lymph nodes, spleen, and bone marrow, which are all possible sites of CLL proliferation. Fewer MDSCs at the CLL proliferation centers would likely result in a reduced immunosuppressive microenvironment leading to an increase in cell-mediated immunity against the tumor, decreased tumor proliferation, and eventually lower ALC% in the circulation. [00321] Overall, Formula (II) shows superior efficacy as measured by ALC than first generation BTK inhibitors such as ibrutinib, or PI3K-5 inhibitors such as idelalisib. Formula (II) has better target occupancy and better pharmacokinetic and metabolic parameters than ibrutinib, leading to improved B cell apoptosis. Furthermore, unlike treatment with ibrutinib and PI3K-5 inhibitors, treatment with Formula (II) does not affect NK cell function. Finally, treatment with Formula (II) leads to a CLL tumor microenvironmental effect by excluding MDSC cells from the marrow and lymph nodes and reducing their number.
Example 3 - Effects of BTK Inhibitors on Thrombosis
[00322] Clinical studies have shown that targeting the BCR signaling pathway by inhibiting BTK produces significant clinical benefit (J. C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 12-42; M. L. Wang, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 507-16). However, in these studies, bleeding has been reported in up to 50% of ibrutinib-treated patients. Most bleeding events were of grade 1-2 (spontaneous bruising or petechiae) but, in 5% of patients, they were of grade 3 or higher after trauma. These results are reflected in the prescribing information for ibrutinib, where bleeding events of any grade, including bruising and petechiae, were reported in approximately half of patients treated with ibrutinib (IMBRUVICA package insert and prescribing information, revised July 2014, U.S. Food and Drug Administration).
[00323] Constitutive or aberrant activation of the BCR signaling cascade has been implicated in the propagation and maintenance of a variety of B cell malignancies. Small molecule inhibitors of BTK, a protein early in this cascade and specifically expressed in B cells, have emerged as a new class of targeted agents. There are several BTK inhibitors, including CC-292 and ibrutinib (PCI-32765), in clinical development. CC-292 refers to (N-(3-((5-fluoro-2-((4-(2- methoxyethoxy)phenyl)amino)pyrimidin-4-yl)amino)phenyl)acrylamide, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including a hydrochloride salt or besylate salt thereof. Importantly, early stage clinical trials have found ibrutinib to be particularly active in chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL) and mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), suggesting that this class of inhibitors may play a significant role in various types of cancers (Aalipour and Advani, Br. J. Haematol. 2013, 163, 436-43). However, their effects are not limited to leukemia or lymphomas as platelets also rely on the Tec kinases family members BTK and Tec for signal transduction in response to various thrombogenic stimuli (Oda, et al., Blood 2000, 95(5), 1663-70; Atkinson, et al. Blood 2003, 102(10), 3592-99). In fact, both Tec and BTK play an important role in the regulation of phosp ho lipase Cy2 (PLCy2) downstream of GPVI in human platelets. In addition, BTK is activated and undergoes tyrosine phosphorylation upon challenge of the platelet thrombin receptor, which requires the engagement of αΙΠ)β3 integrin and PI3K activity (Laffargue, et al, FEBSLett. 1999, 443(1), 66-70). It has also been implicated in GPIba-dependent thrombus stability at sites of vascular injury (Liu, et al, Blood 2006, 108(8), 2596-603). Thus, BTK and Tec are involved in several processes important in supporting the formation of a stable hemostatic plug, which is critical for preventing significant blood loss in response to vascular injury. Hence, the effects of the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) and ibrutinib were evaluated on human platelet-mediated thrombosis by utilizing the in vivo human thrombus formation in the VWF HA1 mice model described in Chen, et al. Nat. Biotechnol 2008, 26(1), 114-19.
[00324] Administration of anesthesia, insertion of venous and arterial catheters, fluorescent labeling and administration of human platelets (5 x 108/ml), and surgical preparation of the cremaster muscle in mice have been previously described (Chen, et al , Nat Biotechnol. 2008, 26(1), 114-19). Injury to the vessel wall of arterioles (-40-65 mm diameter) was performed using a pulsed nitrogen dye laser (440 nm, Photonic Instruments) applied through a 20 x water- immersion Olympus objective (LUMPlanFl, 0.5 numerical aperture (NA)) of a Zeiss Axiotech vario microscope. Human platelet and wall interactions were visualized by fluorescence microscopy using a system equipped with a Yokogawa CSU-22 spinning disk confocal scanner, iXON EM camera, and 488 nm and 561 nm laser lines to detect BCECF-labeled and rhodamine- labeled platelets, respectively (Revolution XD, Andor Technology). The extent of thrombus formation was assessed for 2 minutes after injury and the area (μιη2) of coverage determined (Image IQ, Andor Technology). For the Formula (II), CC-292, ibrutinib inhibition studies, the BTK inhibitors were added to purified human platelets for 30 minutes before administration.
[00325] The in vivo thrombus effects of the BTK inhibitors, Formula (II), CC-292, and ibrutinib, were evaluated on human platelet-mediated thrombosis by utilizing the in vivo human thrombus formation in the VWF HA1 mice model, which has been previously described (Chen, et al, Nat Biotechnol. 2008, 26(1), 114-19). Purified human platelets were preincubated with various concentrations of the BTK inhibitors (0.1 μΜ, 0.5 μΜ, or 1 μΜ) or DMSO and then administered to VWF HA1 mice, followed by laser-induced thrombus formation. The BTK inhibitor-treated human platelets were fluorescently labeled and infused continuously through a catheter inserted into the femoral artery. Their behavior in response to laser-induced vascular injury was monitored in real time using two-channel confocal intravital microscopy (Furie and Furie, J. Clin. Invest. 2005, 115(12), 2255-62). Upon induction of arteriole injury untreated platelets rapidly formed thrombi with an average thrombus size of 6,450 ± 292 mm2 (mean ± s.e.m.), as shown in FIG. 15, 16, and 17. Similarly, Formula (II) (1 μΜ) treated platelets formed a slightly smaller but not significantly different thrombi with an average thrombus size of 5733 ± 393 mm2 (mean ± s.e.m.). In contrast, a dramatic reduction in thrombus size occurred in platelets pretreated with 1 μΜ of ibrutinib, 2600 ± 246 mm2 (mean ± s.e.m.), resulting in a reduction in maximal thrombus size by approximately 61 % compared with control (P > 0.001) (FIG. 15 and 17). Similar results were obtained with platelets pretreated with 500 iiM of Formula (II) or ibrutimb: thrombus size of 5946 ± 283 mm2, and 2710 ± 325 mm2 respectively. These initial results may provide some mechanic background and explanation on the reported 44% bleeding related adverse event rates in the Phase III RESONATE™ study comparing ibrutinib with ofatumumab. The results obtained for CC-292 were similar to that for ibrutinib, as shown in FIG. 15, 16, and 17. The effect of the BTK inhibitor concentration is shown in FIG. 18. These results demonstrate the surprising advantage of the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II), which does not interfere with thrombus formation, while the BTK inhibitors CC-292 and ibrutinib interfere with thrombus formation.
[00326] The objective of this study was to evaluate in vivo thrombus formation in the presence of BTK inhibitors. In vivo testing of novel antiplatelet agents requires informative biomarkers. By utilizing a genetic modified mouse von Willebrand factor (VWFR1326H) model that supports human but not mouse platelet-mediated thrombosis, we evaluated the effects of Formula (II), CC-292, and ibrutinib on thrombus formation. These results show that Formula (II) had no significant effect on human platelet-mediated thrombus formation while ibrutinib was able to limit this process, resulting in a reduction in maximal thrombus size by 61% compared with control. CC-292 showed an effect similar to ibrutinib. These results, which show reduced thrombus formation for ibrutinib at physiologically relevant concentrations, may provide some mechanistic background for the Grade > 3 bleeding events (eg, subdural hematoma,
gastrointestinal bleeding, hematuria and postprocedural hemorrhage) that have been reported in < 6% of patients treated with ibrutinib. [00327] GPVI platelet aggregation was measured for Formula (II) and ibrutinib. Blood was obtained from untreated humans, and platelets were purified from plasma-rich protein by centrifugation. Cells were resuspended to a final concentration of 350,000/μί in buffer containing 145 mmol/L NaCl, 10 mmol/L HEPES, 0.5 mmol/L Na2HP04, 5 mmol/L KC1, 2 mmol/L MgCl2, 1 mmol/L CaCl2, and 0.1% glucose, at pH 7.4. Stock solutions of Convulxin (CVX) GPVI were prepared on the day of experimentation and added to platelet suspensions 5 minutes (37 °C, 1200 rpm) before the induction of aggregation. Aggregation was assessed with a Chronolog Lumi-Aggregometer (model 540 VS; Chronolog, Havertown, PA) and permitted to proceed for 6 minutes after the addition of agonist. The results are reported as maximum percent change in light transmittance from baseline with platelet buffer used as a reference. The results are shown in FIG. 19.
[00328] In FIG. 20, the results of CVX-induced (250 ng/mL) human platelet aggregation results before and 15 minutes after administration of the BTK inhibitors to 6 healthy individuals are shown.
[00329] The results depicted in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 indicate that the BTK inhibitor ibrutinib significantly inhibits GPVI platelet aggregation, while the BTK inhibitor of Formula (II) does not, further illustrating the surprising benefits of the latter compound.
Example 4 - Effects of BTK Inhibition on Antibody-Dependent NK Cell Mediated Cytotoxicity
[00330] Rituximab-combination chemotherapy is today's standard of care in CD20+ B-cell malignancies. Previous studies investigated and determined that ibrutinib antagonizes rituximab antibody-dependent cell mediated cytotoxicity (ADCC) mediated by NK cells. This may be due to ibrutinib 's secondary irreversible binding to interleukin-2 inducible tyrosine kinase (ITK) which is required for FcR-stimulated NK cell function including calcium mobilization, granule release, and overall ADCC. H. E. Kohrt, et al, Blood 2014, 123, 1957-60.
[00331] In this example, the effects of Formula (II) and ibrutinib on NK cell function were evaluated in primary NK cells from healthy volunteers and CLL patients. The activation of NK cells co-cultured with antibody-coated target cells was strongly inhibited by ibrutinib. The secretion of IFN-γ was reduced by 48% (p = 0.018) and 72%> (p = 0.002) in cultures treated with ibrutinib at 0.1 and 1.0 μΜ respectively and NK cell degranulation was significantly (p = 0.002) reduced, compared with control cultures. Formula (II) treatment at 1 μΜ, a clinically relevant concentration, did not inhibit IFN-γ or NK cell degranulation. Rituximab-mediated ADCC was evaluated in NK cells from healthy volunteers as well as assays of NK cells from CLL patients targeting autologous CLL cells. In both cases, ADCC was not inhibited by Formula (II) treatment at 1 μΜ. In contrast, addition of ibrutinib to the ADCC assays strongly inhibited the rituximab-mediated cytotoxicity of target cells, and no increase over natural cytotoxicity was observed at any rituximab concentration. This result indicates that the combination of rituximab and Formula (II) provides an unexpected benefit in the treatment of CLL.
[00332] BTK is a non-receptor enzyme in the Tec kinase family that is expressed among cells of hematopoietic origin, including B cells, myeloid cells, mast cells and platelets, where it regulates multiple cellular processes including proliferation, differentiation, apoptosis, and cell migration. W. N. Khan, Immunol Res. 2001, 23, 147-56; A. J. Mohamed, et al, Immunol Rev. 2009, 228, 58-73; J. M. Bradshaw, Cell Signal. 2010, 22, 1175-84. Functional null mutations of BTK in humans cause the inherited disease, X linked agammaglobulinemia, which is characterized by a lack of mature peripheral B cells. M. Vihinen, et al., Front Biosci. 2000, 5, D917-28.
Conversely, BTK activation is implicated in the pathogenesis of several B-cell malignancies. S.
E. Herman, et al, Blood 2011, 117, 6287-96; L. P. Kil, et al, Am. J. Blood Res. 2013, 3, 71-83; Y. T. Tai, et al, Blood XM, 120, 1877-87; J. J. Buggy, L. Elias, Int. Rev. Immunol. 2012, 31,
119-32 (Erratum in: Int. Rev. Immunol. 2012, 31, 428). In addition, BTK-dependent activation of mast cells and other immunocytes in peritumoral inflammatory stroma has been shown to sustain the complex microenvironment needed for lymphoid and solid tumor maintenance. L. Soucek, et al, Neoplasia 2011, 13, 1093-100; S. Ponader, et al, Blood 2012, 119, 1182-89; M.
F. de Rooij, et al, Blood 2012, 119, 2590-94. Taken together, these findings have suggested that inhibition of BTK may offer an attractive strategy for treating B-cell neoplasms, other hematologic malignancies, and solid tumors.
[00333] Ibrutinib (PCI-32765, IMBRUVICA), is a first-in-class therapeutic BTK inhibitor. This orally delivered, small-molecule drug is being developed by Pharmacyclics, Inc. for the therapy of B-cell malignancies. As described above, in patients with heavily pretreated indolent non- Hodgkin lymphoma (iNHL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), and CLL, ibrutinib showed substantial antitumor activity, inducing durable regressions of lymphadenopathy and splenomegaly in the majority of patients. R. H. Advani, et al, J. Clin. Oncol. 31, 88-94 (2013); J. C. Byrd, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 32-42; M. L. Wang, et al, N. Engl. J. Med. 2013, 369, 507-16. S. O'Brien, et al, Blood 2012, 119, 1182-89. The pattern of changes in CLL was notable. Inhibition of BTK with ibrutinib caused rapid and substantial mobilization of malignant CLL cells from tissues sites into the peripheral blood, as described in J. A. Woyach, et al, Blood 2014, 123, 1810-17; this effect was consistent with decreased adherence of CLL to protective stromal cells. S. Ponader, et al, Blood 2012, 119, 1182-89; M. F. de Rooij, et al, Blood 2012, 119, 2590-94. Ibrutinib has been generally well tolerated. At dose levels associated with total BTK occupancy, not dose-limiting toxicities were identified and subjects found the drug tolerable over periods extending to >2.5 years.
[00334] Given the homology between BTK and interleukin-2 inducible tyrosine kinase (ITK), it has been recently confirmed that ibrutinib irreversibly binds ITK. J. A. Dubovsky, et al, Blood 2013, 122, 2539-2549. ITK expression in Fc receptor (FcR)-stimulated NK cells leads to increased calcium mobilization, granule release, and cytotoxicity. D. Khurana, et al, J.
Immunol. 2007, 178, 3575-3582. As rituximab is a backbone of lymphoma therapy, with mechanisms of action including ADCC, as well as direct induction of apoptosis and
complement-dependent cytotoxicity and FcR stimulation is requisite for ADCC, we investigated if ibrutinib or Formula (II) (lacking ITK inhibition) influenced rituximab 's anti- lymphoma activity in vitro by assessing NK cell IFN-γ secretion, degranulation by CD 107a mobilization, and cytotoxicity by chromium release using CD20+ cell lines and autologous patient samples with chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL).
[00335] Formula (II) is a more selective inhibitor than ibrutinib, as shown previously. Formula (II) is not a potent inhibitor of Itk kinase in contrast to ibrutinib (see Table 1). Itk kinase is required for FcR-stimulated NK cell function including calcium mobilization, granule release, and overall ADCC. As anti-CD20 antibodies like rituximab are standard of care drugs, often as part of combination regimens, for the treatment of CD20+ B-cell malignancies, the potential of ibrutinib or Formula (II) to antagonize ADCC was evaluated in vitro. We hypothesized that Btk inhibitor, Formula (II) which does not have activity against Itk, may preserve NK cell function and therefore synergize rather than antagonize rituximab-mediated ADCC. Rituximab- dependent NK-cell mediated cytotoxicity was assessed using lymphoma cell lines as well as autologous CLL tumor cells.
[00336] Cell culture conditions were as follows. Cell lines Raji and DHL-4 were maintained in RPMI 1630 supplemented with fetal bovine serum, L-glutamine, 2-mercaptoethanol and penicillin-streptomycin at 37 °C in a humidified incubator. The HER18 cells were maintained in DEM supplemented with fetal bovine serum, penicillin-streptomycin and. Prior to assay, HER18 cells were harvested using trypsin-EDTA, washed with phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) containing 5% serum and viable cells were counted. For culture of primary target cells, peripheral blood from CLL patients was subject to density centrifugation to obtain peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC). Cell preparations were washed and then subject to positive selection of CD5+CD19+ CLL cells using magnetic beads (MACS, Miltenyi Biotech). Cell preparations were used fresh after selection. NK cells from CLL patients and healthy volunteers were enriched from peripheral blood collected in sodium citrate anti-coagulant tubes and then subject to density centrifugation. Removal of non NK cells was performed using negative selection by MACS separation. Freshly isolated NK cells were washed three times, enumerated, and then used immediately for ADCC assays.
[00337] Cytokine secretion was determined as follows. Rituximab and trastuzumab-dependent NK-cell mediated degranulation and cytokine release were assessed using lymphoma and HER2+ breast cancer cell lines (DHL-4 and HER18, respectively). Target cells were cultured in flat-bottom plates containing 10 μg/mL of rituximab (DHL-4) or trastuzumab (HER18) and test articles (0.1 or 1 μΜ ibrutinib, 1 μΜ Formula (II), or DMSO vehicle control). NK cells from healthy donors were enriched as described above and then added to the target cells and incubated for 4 hours at 37 °C. Triplicate cultures were performed on NK cells from donors. After incubation, supernatants were harvested, centrifuged briefly, and then analyzed for interferon-γ using an enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) (R&D Systems, Minneapolis, MN, USA).
[00338] Lytic granule release was determined as follows. NK cells from healthy donors were enriched and cultured in the presence of target cells, monoclonal antibodies and test articles as described above. After 4 hours, the cultures were harvested and cells were pelleted, washed, and then stained for flow cytometry evaluation. Degranulation was evaluated via by flow cytometery by externalization of CD 107a, a protein normally present on the inner leaflet of lytic granules, and gating on NK cells (CD3-CD16+ lymphocytes). The percentage of CD 107a positive NK cells was quantified by comparison with a negative control (isotype control, unstained cells/FMO). Control cultures (NK cells cultured without target cells, or NK, target cell co- cultures in the absence of appropriate monoclonal antibody) were also evaluated; all experiments were performed in triplicate.
[00339] ADCC assays were performed as follows. Briefly, target cells (Raji or primary CLL) were labeled by incubation at 37 °C with 100 μθ 51Cr for 4 hours prior to co-culture with NK cells. Cells were washed, enumerated, and then added in triplicate to prepared 96-well plates containing treated NK cells at an effector :target (E:T) ratio of 25 : 1. Rituximab (Genentech) was added to ADCC wells at concentrations of 0.1, 1.0 or 10 μg/mL and the assays were briefly mixed and then centrifuged to collect cells at the bottom of the wells. The effect of NK cell natural cytotoxicity was assessed in wells containing no rituximab. Cultures were incubated at 37 °C for 4 hours, and then centrifuged. Supernatants were harvested and 51Cr release was measured by liquid scintillation counting. All experiments were performed in triplicate.
[00340] Ibrutinib-inhibited rituximab-induced NK cell cytokine secretion in a dose-dependent manner (0.1 and 1 μΜ) (FIG. 21 : 48% p = 0.018; 72% p = 0.002, respectively). At 1 μΜ, Formula (II) did not significantly inhibit cytokine secretion (FIG. 21 : 3.5%). Similarly, Formula (II) had no inhibitory effect on rituximab-stimulated NK cell degranulation (< 2%) while ibrutinib reduced degranulation by -50% (p = 0.24, FIG. 22). Formula (II) had no inhibitory effect while ibrutinib prevented trastuzumab-stimulated NK cell cytokine release and
degranulation by -92% and -84% at ΙμΜ, respectively (FIG. 21 and FIG. 22: ***p = 0.004, **p = 0.002).
[00341] In Raji cells samples, ex vivo NK cell activity against autologous tumor cells was not inhibited by addition of Formula (II) at 1 μΜ, and increased cell lysis was observed with increasing concentrations of rituximab at a constant E:T ratio (FIG. 23). In primary CLL samples, ex vivo NK cell activity against autologous tumor cells was not inhibited by addition of Formula (II) at 1 μΜ, and increased cell lysis was observed with increasing concentrations of rituximab at a constant E:T ratio (FIG. 24). In contrast, addition of 1 μΜ ibrutinib completely inhibited ADCC, with less than 10% cell lysis at any rituximab concentration and no increase in cell lysis in the presence of rituximab, compared with cultures without rituximab. The difference between Formula (II) and ibrutinib was highly significant in this assay (p = 0.001). A plot highlighting the differences between Formula (II) and ibrutinib at 10 μΜ is shown in FIG. 25.
[00342] In ADCC assays using healthy donor NK cells, antibody-dependent lysis of rituximab- coated Raji cells was not inhibited by addition of 1 μΜ Formula (II) (FIG. 26). In these experiments, addition of rituximab stimulated a 5- to 8-fold increase in cell lysis at 0.1 and 1 μg/mL, compared with low (<20%) natural cytotoxicity in the absence of rituximab. As previously reported, addition of 1 μΜ ibrutinib strongly inhibited the antibody-dependent lysis of target cells, with less than 20% cell lysis at all rituximab concentrations and no increase in ADCC with at higher rituximab concentrations. The difference between Formula (II) and ibrutinib was highly significant in this assay (p = 0.001).
[00343] Ibrutinib is clinically effective as monotherapy and in combination with rituximab, despite inhibition of ADCC in vitro and in vivo murine models due to ibrutinib 's secondary irreversible binding to ITK. Preclinically, the efficacy of therapeutics which do not inhibit NK cell function, including Formula (II), is superior to ibrutinib. Clinical investigation is needed to determine the impact of this finding on patients receiving rituximab as these results provide support for the unexpected property of Formula (II) as a better agent than ibrutinib to use in combination with antibodies that have ADCC as a mechanism of action.
Example 5 - Effects of BTK Inhibition on Generalized NK Cell Mediated Cytotoxicity
[00344] An assay was performed to assess the effects of BTK inhibition using Formula (II) on generalized NK killing (non-ADCC killing). The targets (K562 cells) do not express MHC class I, so they do not inactivate NK cells. Target cells were grown to mid-log phase, and 5x 105 cells were labeled in 100 μΐ^ of assay medium (IMDM with 10% FCS and penicillin/streptomycin) with 100 μ Ci 51Cr for 1 hour at 37 °C. Cells were washed twice and resuspended in assay medium. A total of 5000 target cells/well was used in the assay. Effector cells were
resuspended in assay medium, distributed on a V-bottom 96-well plate, and mixed with labeled target cells at 40: 1 E:T ratios. Maximum release was determined by incubating target cells in 1%) Triton X-100. For spontaneous release, targets were incubated without effectors in assay medium alone. After a 1 minute centrifugation at 1000 rpm, plates were incubated for 4 and 16 hours at 37 °C. Supernatant was harvested and 51Cr release was measured in a gamma counter. Percentage of specific release was calculated as (experimental release-spontaneous release)/(maximum release-spontaneous release) x 100. The results are shown in FIG. 26.
Example 6 - Effects of BT Inhibition on T Cells
[00345] An assay was performed to assess the effects of BTK inhibition using Formula (II) on T cells. Enriched CD4+ T cells are plated on 24-well culture dishes that have been precoated 2 hr with 250 μΕ anti-TCRp (0.5 μg/mL) plus anti-CD28 (5 μg/mL) at 37 °C in PBS. The cells are then supplemented with media containing BTK inhibitors along with the skewing cytokines as indicated in the following. The Thl7 and Treg cultures are grown for 4 days before analysis. The cells are maintained for an additional 3 days with skewing cytokines (Thl7; 20 ng/mL IL-6, 0.5 ng/mL TGF-β, 5 μg/mL IL-4, 5 μg/mL IFN-γ and Treg; 0.5 ng/mL TGF-β, 5 μg/mL IL-4, 5 μg/mL IFN-γ) and are supplemented with IL2 as a growth factor.
[00346] The results are shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, and further illustrate the surprising properties of Formula (II) in comparison to ibrutinib. Because of the lack of activity of Formula (II) on Itk and Txk, no adverse effects on Thl7 and Treg development was observed. Since ibrutinib inhibits both Itk and Txk, a profound inhibition of Thl7 cells and an increase in Treg development is observed, which is comparable to the murine Itk/Txk double knock-out cells which were used as a control.

Claims

CLAIMS We claim:
1. A method of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL) or small lymphocytic leukemia (SLL) comprising the step of orally administering, to a human in need thereof, the Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is:
Figure imgf000110_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
2. The method of Claim 1, wherein the BTK inhibitor is administered once daily at a dose selected from the group consisting of 100 mg, 175 mg, 250 mg, and 400 mg.
3. The method of Claim 1, wherein the BTK inhibitor is administered twice daily at a dose of 100 mg.
4. The method of Claim 1, wherein the CLL increases monocytes and NK cells in peripheral blood after treatment with Formula (II) for a period selected from the group consisting of about 14 days, about 28 days, or about 56 days.
5. The method of Claim 1, wherein the CLL is selected from the group consisting of IgVH mutation negative CLL, ZAP-70 positive CLL, ZAP-70 methylated at CpG3 CLL, CD38 positive CLL, CLL with a 17p 13.1 (17p) deletion, CLL with a 1 lq22.3 (1 lq) deletion, CLL in a
131 human sensitive to platelet-mediated thrombosis, CLL in a human presently suffering from platelet-mediated thrombosis, CLL in a human previously suffering from platelet-mediated thrombosis, or combinations thereof.
6. The method of Claim 1, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anti-CD20 antibody selected from the group consisting of rituximab, obinutuzumab, ofatumumab, veltuzumab, tositumomab, ibritumomab, and fragments, derivatives, conjugates, variants, radioisotope-labeled complexes, and biosimilars thereof.
7. The method of Claim 1 or Claim 6, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient.
8. The method of Claim 7, wherein the anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient is selected from the group consisting of acenocoumarol, anagrelide, anagrelide hydrochloride, abciximab, aloxiprin, antithrombin, apixaban, argatroban, aspirin, aspirin with extended-release dipyridamole, beraprost, betrixaban, bivalirudin, carbasalate calcium, cilostazol, clopidogrel, clopidogrel bisulfate, cloricromen, dabigatran etexilate, darexaban, dalteparin, dalteparin sodium, defibrotide, dicumarol, diphenadione, dipyridamole, ditazole, desirudin, edoxaban, enoxaparin, enoxaparin sodium, eptifibatide, fondaparinux, fondaparinux sodium, heparin, heparin sodium, heparin calcium, idraparinux, idraparinux sodium, iloprost, indobufen, lepirudin, low molecular weight heparin, melagatran, nadroparin, otamixaban, parnaparin, phenindione, phenprocoumon, prasugrel, picotamide, prostacyclin, ramatroban, reviparin, rivaroxaban, sulodexide, terutroban, terutroban sodium, ticagrelor, ticlopidine, ticlopidine hydrochloride, tinzaparin, tinzaparin sodium, tirofiban, tirofiban hydrochloride, treprostinil, treprostinil sodium, triflusal, vorapaxar, warfarin, warfarin sodium, ximelagatran, salts thereof, solvates thereof, hydrates thereof, and combinations thereof.
9. A method of treating a hematological malignancy in a human comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of a BTK inhibitor, wherein the BTK inhibitor is:
132
Figure imgf000112_0001
or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate, or solvate thereof, and wherein the hematological malignancy is selected from the group consisting of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), follicular lymphoma (FL), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, B cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (B-ALL), Burkitt's lymphoma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM), Burkitt's lymphoma, multiple myeloma, or myelofibrosis
10. The method of Claim 9, wherein the BTK inhibitor is administered once daily at a dose selected from the group consisting of 100 mg, 175 mg, 250 mg, and 400 mg.
11. The method of Claim 9, wherein the BTK inhibitor is administered twice daily at a dose of 100 mg.
12. The method of Claim 9, wherein the hematological malignancy increases monocytes and NK cells in peripheral blood after treatment with Formula (II) for a period selected from the group consisting of about 14 days, about 28 days, or about 56 days.
13. The method of Claim 9, wherein the NHL is selected from the group consisting of indolent NHL and aggressive NHL.
14. The method of Claim 9, wherein the DLBCL is selected from the group consisting of activated B-cell like diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL- ABC) and germinal center B-cell
133 like diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL-GCB).
15. The method of Claim 9, wherein the MCL is selected from the group consisting of mantle zone MCL, nodular MCL, diffuse MCL, and blastoid MCL.
16. The method of Claim 9, wherein the B-ALL is selected from the group consisting of early pre-B cell B-ALL, pre-B cell B-ALL, and mature B cell B-ALL.
17. The method of Claim 9, wherein the Burkitt's lymphoma is selected from the group consisting of sporadic Burkitt's lymphoma, endemic Burkitt's lymphoma, and human immunodeficiency virus-associated Burkitt's lymphoma.
18. The method of Claim 9, wherein the multiple myeloma is selected from the group consisting of hyperdiploid multiple myeloma and non-hyperdiploid multiple myeloma.
19. The method of Claim 9, wherein the myelofibrosis is selected from the group consisting of primary myelofibrosis, myelofibrosis secondary to polycythemia vera, and myelofibrosis secondary to essential thrombocythaemia.
20. The method of Claim 9, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anti-CD20 antibody selected from the group consisting of rituximab, obinutuzumab, ofatumumab, veltuzumab, tositumomab, ibritumomab, and fragments, derivatives, conjugates, variants, radioisotope-labeled complexes, and biosimilars thereof.
21. The method of Claim 9 or Claim 20, further comprising the step of administering a therapeutically effective dose of an anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient.
22. The method of Claim 21, wherein the anticoagulant or antiplatelet active pharmaceutical ingredient is selected from the group consisting of acenocoumarol, anagrelide, anagrelide hydrochloride, abciximab, aloxiprin, antithrombin, apixaban, argatroban, aspirin, aspirin with extended-release dipyridamole, beraprost, betrixaban, bivalirudin, carbasalate calcium, cilostazol, clopidogrel, clopidogrel bisulfate, cloricromen, dabigatran etexilate, darexaban, dalteparin, dalteparin sodium, defibrotide, dicumarol, diphenadione, dipyridamole, ditazole, desirudin, edoxaban, enoxaparin, enoxaparin sodium, eptifibatide, fondaparinux, fondaparinux sodium, heparin, heparin sodium, heparin calcium, idraparinux, idraparinux sodium, iloprost, indobufen, lepirudin, low molecular weight heparin, melagatran, nadroparin, otamixaban,
134 parnaparin, phenindione, phenprocoumon, prasugrel, picotamide, prostacyclin, ramatroban, reviparin, rivaroxaban, sulodexide, terutroban, terutroban sodium, ticagrelor, ticlopidine, ticlopidine hydrochloride, tinzaparin, tinzaparin sodium, tirofiban, tirofiban hydrochloride, treprostinil, treprostinil sodium, trifiusal, vorapaxar, warfarin, warfarin sodium, ximelagatran, salts thereof, solvates thereof, hydrates thereof, and combinations thereof.
135
PCT/IB2015/000645 2014-01-21 2015-01-21 Methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia usng a btk inhibitor WO2015110923A2 (en)

Priority Applications (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US15/112,968 US10272083B2 (en) 2014-01-21 2015-01-21 Methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia using a BTK inhibitor
TW104115801A TW201609099A (en) 2014-08-11 2015-05-18 Methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia using a BTK inhibitor
PCT/IB2015/002140 WO2016116777A1 (en) 2014-08-11 2015-06-17 Compositions and methods for treatment of chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia using a btk inhibitor
ARP150101938A AR100892A1 (en) 2014-01-21 2015-06-17 COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS FOR THE TREATMENT OF CHRONIC LYMPHOCYTIC LEUKEMIA AND SMALL LYMPHOCYT LEUKEMIA THROUGH THE USE OF A BRUTON TIROSIN QUINASA INHIBITOR
TW104120764A TW201628620A (en) 2014-08-11 2015-06-26 Compositions and methods for treatment of chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia using a BTK inhibitor
US16/298,094 US11090302B2 (en) 2014-01-21 2019-03-11 Methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia using a BTK inhibitor
US17/370,778 US11771696B2 (en) 2014-01-21 2021-07-08 Methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia using a BTK inhibitor

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201461929742P 2014-01-21 2014-01-21
US61/929,742 2014-01-21
US201461974665P 2014-04-03 2014-04-03
US61/974,665 2014-04-03
US201462035777P 2014-08-11 2014-08-11
US62/035,777 2014-08-11
US2014068938 2014-12-05
USPCT/US2014/068938 2014-12-05

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/112,968 A-371-Of-International US10272083B2 (en) 2014-01-21 2015-01-21 Methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia using a BTK inhibitor
US16/298,094 Continuation US11090302B2 (en) 2014-01-21 2019-03-11 Methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia using a BTK inhibitor

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015110923A2 true WO2015110923A2 (en) 2015-07-30
WO2015110923A3 WO2015110923A3 (en) 2015-11-26

Family

ID=53373499

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/IB2015/000645 WO2015110923A2 (en) 2014-01-21 2015-01-21 Methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia usng a btk inhibitor

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2015110923A2 (en)

Cited By (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016020901A1 (en) * 2014-08-07 2016-02-11 Acerta Pharma B.V. Methods of treating cancers, immune and autoimmune diseases, and inflammatory diseases based on btk occupancy and btk resynthesis rate
WO2017046746A1 (en) * 2015-09-15 2017-03-23 Acerta Pharma B.V. Therapeutic combinations of a btk inhibitor and a gitr binding molecule, a 4-1bb agonist, or an ox40 agonist
WO2017077507A1 (en) * 2015-11-06 2017-05-11 Acerta Pharma B.V. Imidazopyrazine inhibitors of bruton's tyrosine kinase
WO2017064652A3 (en) * 2015-10-15 2017-06-29 Moshe Rogosnitzky Low dose oral dipyridamole compositions and uses thereof
WO2017122175A1 (en) * 2016-01-13 2017-07-20 Acerta Pharma B.V. Therapeutic combinations of an antifolate and a btk inhibitor
CN107384932A (en) * 2016-08-31 2017-11-24 北京天广实生物技术股份有限公司 Anti-humen CD 20 Humanized monoclonal antibodies MIL62, preparation method and the usage
WO2018013862A1 (en) 2016-07-14 2018-01-18 Mingsight Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Treatment of cancer
WO2018064797A1 (en) * 2016-10-05 2018-04-12 杭州领业医药科技有限公司 Crystal form of acp-196, preparation method therefor and pharmaceutical composition thereof
WO2018116259A1 (en) * 2016-12-21 2018-06-28 Acerta Pharma B.V. Imidazopyrazine inhibitors of bruton's tyrosine kinase
WO2020021447A1 (en) 2018-07-25 2020-01-30 Novartis Ag Nlrp3 inflammasome inhibitors
WO2020234715A1 (en) 2019-05-17 2020-11-26 Novartis Ag Nlrp3 inflammasome inhibitors
EP3747472A1 (en) * 2015-09-15 2020-12-09 Acerta Pharma B.V. Therapeutic combinations of a cd19 inhibitor and a btk inhibitor
EA037031B1 (en) * 2017-10-06 2021-01-28 Асерта Фарма Б.В. Imidazopyrazine inhibitors of bruton's tyrosine kinase
WO2022034529A1 (en) 2020-08-14 2022-02-17 Novartis Ag Heteroaryl substituted spiropiperidinyl derivatives and pharmaceutical uses thereof
WO2024028782A1 (en) 2022-08-03 2024-02-08 Novartis Ag Nlrp3 inflammasome inhibitors

Citations (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0154316A2 (en) 1984-03-06 1985-09-11 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Chemically modified lymphokine and production thereof
EP0401384A1 (en) 1988-12-22 1990-12-12 Kirin-Amgen, Inc. Chemically modified granulocyte colony stimulating factor
EP0404097A2 (en) 1989-06-22 1990-12-27 BEHRINGWERKE Aktiengesellschaft Bispecific and oligospecific, mono- and oligovalent receptors, production and applications thereof
US4992445A (en) 1987-06-12 1991-02-12 American Cyanamid Co. Transdermal delivery of pharmaceuticals
US5001139A (en) 1987-06-12 1991-03-19 American Cyanamid Company Enchancers for the transdermal flux of nivadipine
US5023252A (en) 1985-12-04 1991-06-11 Conrex Pharmaceutical Corporation Transdermal and trans-membrane delivery of drugs
WO1993011161A1 (en) 1991-11-25 1993-06-10 Enzon, Inc. Multivalent antigen-binding proteins
US5714350A (en) 1992-03-09 1998-02-03 Protein Design Labs, Inc. Increasing antibody affinity by altering glycosylation in the immunoglobulin variable region
WO1999054342A1 (en) 1998-04-20 1999-10-28 Pablo Umana Glycosylation engineering of antibodies for improving antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity
EP1176195A1 (en) 1999-04-09 2002-01-30 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Method for controlling the activity of immunologically functional molecule
WO2003035835A2 (en) 2001-10-25 2003-05-01 Genentech, Inc. Glycoprotein compositions
US20040110704A1 (en) 2002-04-09 2004-06-10 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Cells of which genome is modified
US8529202B2 (en) 2010-10-12 2013-09-10 General Electric Company System and method for turbine compartment ventilation
US20140155385A1 (en) 2011-07-19 2014-06-05 Tjeerd A. Barf 4-imidazopyridazin-1-yl-benzamides and 4-imidazotriazin-1-yl-benzamides as btk inhibitors

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA2800913C (en) * 2010-06-03 2019-07-23 Pharmacyclics, Inc. The use of inhibitors of bruton's tyrosine kinase (btk)
US20140357636A1 (en) * 2013-02-21 2014-12-04 Wayne Rothbaum Treatment of Skeletal-Related Disorders
WO2015057992A1 (en) * 2013-10-16 2015-04-23 Izumi Raquel Btk inhibitors for hematopoietic mobilization
WO2015083008A1 (en) * 2013-12-05 2015-06-11 Acerta Pharma B.V. Therapeutic combination of a pi3k inhibitor and a btk inhibitor

Patent Citations (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0154316A2 (en) 1984-03-06 1985-09-11 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Chemically modified lymphokine and production thereof
US5023252A (en) 1985-12-04 1991-06-11 Conrex Pharmaceutical Corporation Transdermal and trans-membrane delivery of drugs
US4992445A (en) 1987-06-12 1991-02-12 American Cyanamid Co. Transdermal delivery of pharmaceuticals
US5001139A (en) 1987-06-12 1991-03-19 American Cyanamid Company Enchancers for the transdermal flux of nivadipine
EP0401384A1 (en) 1988-12-22 1990-12-12 Kirin-Amgen, Inc. Chemically modified granulocyte colony stimulating factor
EP0404097A2 (en) 1989-06-22 1990-12-27 BEHRINGWERKE Aktiengesellschaft Bispecific and oligospecific, mono- and oligovalent receptors, production and applications thereof
WO1993011161A1 (en) 1991-11-25 1993-06-10 Enzon, Inc. Multivalent antigen-binding proteins
US5714350A (en) 1992-03-09 1998-02-03 Protein Design Labs, Inc. Increasing antibody affinity by altering glycosylation in the immunoglobulin variable region
US6350861B1 (en) 1992-03-09 2002-02-26 Protein Design Labs, Inc. Antibodies with increased binding affinity
WO1999054342A1 (en) 1998-04-20 1999-10-28 Pablo Umana Glycosylation engineering of antibodies for improving antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity
EP1176195A1 (en) 1999-04-09 2002-01-30 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Method for controlling the activity of immunologically functional molecule
WO2003035835A2 (en) 2001-10-25 2003-05-01 Genentech, Inc. Glycoprotein compositions
US20040110704A1 (en) 2002-04-09 2004-06-10 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Cells of which genome is modified
US8529202B2 (en) 2010-10-12 2013-09-10 General Electric Company System and method for turbine compartment ventilation
US20140155385A1 (en) 2011-07-19 2014-06-05 Tjeerd A. Barf 4-imidazopyridazin-1-yl-benzamides and 4-imidazotriazin-1-yl-benzamides as btk inhibitors

Non-Patent Citations (77)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
0. J. D'CRUZ; F. M. UCKUN, ONCOTARGETS AND THERAPY, vol. 6, 2013, pages 161 - 176
A. J. MOHAMED ET AL., IMMUNOL REV., vol. 228, 2009, pages 58 - 73
AALIPOUR; ADVANI, BR. J. HAEMATOL., vol. 163, 2013, pages 436 - 43
ANDERSON, ET AL.: "Handbook of Clinical Drug Data, Tenth Edition,", 2002, MCGRAW-HILL
ATKINSON ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 102, no. 10, 2003, pages 3592 - 99
B. D. CHESON ET AL., J. CLIN. ONCOL., vol. 25, 2007, pages 579 - 586
B. D. CHESON, J. CLIN. ONCOL., vol. 28, 2010, pages 3525 - 30
BIRD ET AL., SCIENCE, vol. 242, 1988, pages 423 - 426
BOLLIGER ET AL., PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA, vol. 90, 1993, pages 6444 - 6448
C. KLEIN ET AL., MABS, vol. 5, 2013, pages 22 - 33
CHEN ET AL., NAT BIOTECHNOL., vol. 26, no. 1, 2008, pages 114 - 19
CHEN ET AL., NAT BIOTECHNOL., vol. 26, no. I, 2008, pages 114 - 19
CHEN ET AL., NAT. BIOTECHNOL., vol. 26, no. J, 2008, pages 114 - 19
D. KHURANA ET AL., J. IMMUNOL., vol. 178, 2007, pages 3575 - 3582
D. M. GOLDENBERG ET AL., LEUK. LYMPHOMA, vol. 51, 2010, pages 747 - 55
D. M. VALI ET AL., VET. COMP. ONCOL., vol. 8, 2010, pages 28 - 37
E. L. ELIEL; S. H. WILEN: "Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds", 1994, WILEY-INTERSCIENCE
FURIE; FURIE, J. CLIN. INVEST., vol. 115, no. 12, 2005, pages 2255 - 62
G. L. PLOSKER; D. P., FIGGETT, DRUGS, vol. 63, 2003, pages 803 - 43
H. BUNDGAARD: "Design of Prodrugs", 1985, ELSEVIER
H. E. KOHRT ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 123, 2014, pages 1957 - 60
HUSTON ET AL., PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA, vol. 85, 1988, pages 5879 - 5883
INT. REV. IMMUNOL., vol. 31, 2012, pages 428
J. A. DUBOVSKY ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 122, 2013, pages 2539 - 2549
J. A. WOYACH ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 123, 2014, pages 1810 - 17
J. C. BYRD ET AL., N. ENGL. J. MED., vol. 369, 2013, pages 32 - 42
J. DU ET AL., MOL. IMMUNOL., vol. 46, 2009, pages 2419 - 2423
J. J. BUGGY; L. ELIAS, INT. REV. IMMUNOL., vol. 31, 2012, pages 119 - 32
J. L. BINET ET AL., CANCER, vol. 40, 1977, pages 855 - 64
J. M. BRADSHAW, CELL SIGNAL., vol. 22, 2010, pages 1175 - 84
J.C. BYRD ET AL., N. ENGL. J. MED., vol. 369, 2013, pages 32 - 42
JACQUES ET AL.: "Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions", 1981, WILEY INTERSCIENCE
JONES ET AL., NATURE, vol. 321, 1986, pages 522 - 525
K. R. RAI; T. HAN, HEMATOL. ONCOL. CLIN. NORTH AM., vol. 4, 1990, pages 447 - 56
L. A. HONIGBERG ET AL., PROC. NAT. ACAD. SCI. USA, vol. 107, 2010, pages 13075 - 13080
L. M. NADLER ET AL., J. CLIN. INVEST., vol. 67, 1981, pages 134 - 40
L. P. KIL ET AL., AM. J. BLOOD RES., vol. 3, 2013, pages 71 - 83
L. SOUCEK ET AL., NEOPLASIA, vol. 13, 2011, pages 1093 - 100
L. Z. RASSENTI ET AL., N. ENGL. J. MED., vol. 351, 2004, pages 893 - 901
LAFFARGUE ET AL., FEBS LETT., vol. 443, no. 1, 1999, pages 66 - 70
LIU ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 108, no. 8, 2006, pages 2596 - 603
M. BUCHNER ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 115, 2010, pages 4497 - 506
M. BURGER ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 106, 2005, pages 1824 - 30
M. F. DE ROOIJ ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 119, 2012, pages 2590 - 94
M. HALLEK ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 111, 2008, pages 5446 - 56
M. HALLEK ET AL., BLOOD, vol. LLL, 2008, pages 5446 - 5456
M. HALLEK ET AL., LANCET, vol. 76, 2010, pages 1164 - 74
M. L. WANG ET AL., N. ENGL. J. MED., vol. 369, 2013, pages 507 - 16
M. M. OKEN ET AL., AM. J. CLIN. ONCOL., vol. 5, 1982, pages 649 - 655
M. VIHINEN ET AL., FRONT BIOSCI., vol. 5, 2000, pages D917 - 28
ODA ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 95, no. 5, 2000, pages 1663 - 70
P. JAIN; S. O'BRIEN, ONCOLOGY, vol. 26, 2012, pages 1146 - 52
P. STASHENKO ET AL., J. IMMUNOL., vol. 139, 1980, pages 3260 - 85
PRESTA, CURR. OP. STRUCT. BIOL., vol. 2, 1992, pages 593 - 596
PRINCIPLES OF DRUG ACTION, 1990
R. CLAU ET AL., J. CLIN. ONCOL., vol. 30, 2012, pages 83 - 91
R. E. MUDRY ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 96, 2000, pages 1926 - 32
R. H. ADVANI ET AL., J. CLIN. ONCOL., vol. 31, 2013, pages 88 - 94
R. N. DAMLE ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 94, 1999, pages 1840 - 47
RIECHMANN ET AL., NATURE, vol. 332, 1988, pages 323 - 329
S. A. BEERS, SEM. HEMATOL., vol. 47, 2010, pages 107 - 14
S. E. HERMAN ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 117, 2011, pages 6287 - 96
S. H. LIM, HAEMATOLOGICA, vol. 95, 2010, pages 135 - 43
S. O'BRIEN ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 119, 2012, pages 1182 - 89
S. PONADER ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 119, 2012, pages 1182 - 89
SHIELDS ET AL., J. BIOL. CHEM., vol. 277, 2002, pages 26733 - 26740
T. F. TEDDER ET AL., PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA, vol. 85, 1988, pages 208 - 12
T. H. GREENE; P. G. M. WUTS: "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd Ed.,", 1999, JOHN WILEY & SONS
T. J. HAMBLIN ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 94, 1999, pages 1848 - 54
T. ROBAK, CURR. OPIN. INVESTIG. DRUGS, vol. 10, 2009, pages 588 - 96
TARENTINO ET AL., BIOCHEM., vol. 14, 1975, pages 5516 - 5523
UMANA ET AL., NAT. BIOTECH., vol. 17, 1999, pages 176 - 180
W. N. KHAN, IMMUNOL RES., vol. 23, 2001, pages 147 - 56
W. RASTETTER ET AL., ANN. REV. MED., vol. 55, 2004, pages 477 - 503
WARD ET AL., NATURE, vol. 341, 1989, pages 544 - 546
Y. T. TAI ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 120, 2012, pages 1877 - 87
YAMANE-OHNUKI ET AL., BIOTECHNOL. BIOENG., vol. 87, 2004, pages 614 - 622

Cited By (35)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016020901A1 (en) * 2014-08-07 2016-02-11 Acerta Pharma B.V. Methods of treating cancers, immune and autoimmune diseases, and inflammatory diseases based on btk occupancy and btk resynthesis rate
WO2017025814A1 (en) 2014-08-07 2017-02-16 Acerta Pharma B.V. Methods of treating cancers, immune and autoimmune diseases, and inflammatory diseases based on btk occupancy and btk resynthesis rate
WO2017046746A1 (en) * 2015-09-15 2017-03-23 Acerta Pharma B.V. Therapeutic combinations of a btk inhibitor and a gitr binding molecule, a 4-1bb agonist, or an ox40 agonist
EP3747472A1 (en) * 2015-09-15 2020-12-09 Acerta Pharma B.V. Therapeutic combinations of a cd19 inhibitor and a btk inhibitor
WO2017064652A3 (en) * 2015-10-15 2017-06-29 Moshe Rogosnitzky Low dose oral dipyridamole compositions and uses thereof
JP2018536705A (en) * 2015-11-06 2018-12-13 アセルタ ファーマ ビー.ブイ. An imidazopyrazine inhibitor of breton-type tyrosine kinase
US11110088B2 (en) 2015-11-06 2021-09-07 Acerta Pharma B.V. Imidazopyrazine inhibitors of Bruton's tyrosine kinase
CN108602827A (en) * 2015-11-06 2018-09-28 安塞塔制药公司 The Imidazopyrazines inhibitor of Bruton tyrosine kinase
US10736893B2 (en) 2015-11-06 2020-08-11 Acerta Pharma B.V. Imidazopyrazine inhibitors of Bruton's tyrosine kinase
WO2017077507A1 (en) * 2015-11-06 2017-05-11 Acerta Pharma B.V. Imidazopyrazine inhibitors of bruton's tyrosine kinase
WO2017122175A1 (en) * 2016-01-13 2017-07-20 Acerta Pharma B.V. Therapeutic combinations of an antifolate and a btk inhibitor
WO2018013862A1 (en) 2016-07-14 2018-01-18 Mingsight Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Treatment of cancer
US11154555B2 (en) 2016-07-14 2021-10-26 Mingsight Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Treatment of cancer
EP3484477A4 (en) * 2016-07-14 2020-03-04 Mingsight Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Treatment of cancer
CN107384932A (en) * 2016-08-31 2017-11-24 北京天广实生物技术股份有限公司 Anti-humen CD 20 Humanized monoclonal antibodies MIL62, preparation method and the usage
US11208492B2 (en) 2016-08-31 2021-12-28 Beijing Mabworks Biotech Co. Ltd. Anti-CD20 antibody
CN107384932B (en) * 2016-08-31 2020-10-20 北京天广实生物技术股份有限公司 Anti-human CD20 humanized monoclonal antibody MIL62, preparation method and application thereof
CN108137605B (en) * 2016-10-05 2021-07-13 杭州领业医药科技有限公司 ACP-196 crystal form, preparation method and pharmaceutical composition thereof
CN113416194A (en) * 2016-10-05 2021-09-21 杭州领业医药科技有限公司 ACP-196 crystal form, preparation method and pharmaceutical composition thereof
US11919906B2 (en) 2016-10-05 2024-03-05 Hangzhou Solipharma Co., Ltd. Crystal form of ACP-196 and method of treatment thereof
WO2018064797A1 (en) * 2016-10-05 2018-04-12 杭州领业医药科技有限公司 Crystal form of acp-196, preparation method therefor and pharmaceutical composition thereof
CN108137605A (en) * 2016-10-05 2018-06-08 杭州领业医药科技有限公司 Crystal form of ACP-196 and preparation method thereof and pharmaceutical composition
US10899767B2 (en) 2016-10-05 2021-01-26 Hangzhou Solipharma Co., Ltd. Crystal form of ACP-196, preparation method therefor and pharmaceutical composition thereof
KR20190095403A (en) * 2016-12-21 2019-08-14 아세르타 파마. 비.브이. Imidazopyrazine Inhibitors of Bruton's Tyrosine Kinase
WO2018116259A1 (en) * 2016-12-21 2018-06-28 Acerta Pharma B.V. Imidazopyrazine inhibitors of bruton's tyrosine kinase
JP2020514264A (en) * 2016-12-21 2020-05-21 アセルタ ファーマ ビー.ブイ. Imidazopyrazine inhibitors of Bruton's tyrosine kinase
US10858364B2 (en) 2016-12-21 2020-12-08 Acerta Pharma B.V. Imidazopyrazine inhibitors of Bruton's tyrosine kinase
AU2017383236B2 (en) * 2016-12-21 2022-02-10 Acerta Pharma B.V. Imidazopyrazine inhibitors of Bruton's tyrosine kinase
JP7022131B2 (en) 2016-12-21 2022-02-17 アセルタ ファーマ ビー.ブイ. Bruton's tyrosine kinase imidazole pyrazine inhibitor
KR102559851B1 (en) 2016-12-21 2023-07-25 아세르타 파마. 비.브이. Imidazopyrazine inhibitors of Bruton's tyrosine kinase
EA037031B1 (en) * 2017-10-06 2021-01-28 Асерта Фарма Б.В. Imidazopyrazine inhibitors of bruton's tyrosine kinase
WO2020021447A1 (en) 2018-07-25 2020-01-30 Novartis Ag Nlrp3 inflammasome inhibitors
WO2020234715A1 (en) 2019-05-17 2020-11-26 Novartis Ag Nlrp3 inflammasome inhibitors
WO2022034529A1 (en) 2020-08-14 2022-02-17 Novartis Ag Heteroaryl substituted spiropiperidinyl derivatives and pharmaceutical uses thereof
WO2024028782A1 (en) 2022-08-03 2024-02-08 Novartis Ag Nlrp3 inflammasome inhibitors

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2015110923A3 (en) 2015-11-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11771696B2 (en) Methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia using a BTK inhibitor
US20210346382A1 (en) BTK Inhibitors to Treat Solid Tumors Through Modulation of the Tumor Microenvironment
US20200069796A1 (en) Therapeutic Combinations of a BTK Inhibitor, a PI3K Inhibitor, a JAK-2 Inhibitor, a PD-1 Inhibitor, and/or a PD-L1 Inhibitor
WO2015110923A2 (en) Methods of treating chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia usng a btk inhibitor
US20180207154A1 (en) Therapeutic Combinations of a BTK Inhibitor, a PI3K Inhibitor and/or a JAK-2 Inhibitor
WO2017046746A1 (en) Therapeutic combinations of a btk inhibitor and a gitr binding molecule, a 4-1bb agonist, or an ox40 agonist
US20180250298A1 (en) Therapeutic Combinations of a BTK Inhibitor, a PI3K Inhibitor, a JAK-2 Inhibitor, and/or a BCL-2 Inhibitor
EP3747472A1 (en) Therapeutic combinations of a cd19 inhibitor and a btk inhibitor
US20200069668A1 (en) Therapeutic Combinations of an IRAK4 Inhibitor and a BTK Inhibitor
WO2016087994A1 (en) Btk inhibitors to treat solid tumors through modulation of the tumor microenvironment
US11154554B2 (en) Therapeutic combinations of a MEK inhibitor and a BTK inhibitor
US20180250400A1 (en) Therapeutic Combinations of a BTK Inhibitor, a PI3K Inhibitor, a JAK-2 Inhibitor, and/or a CDK4/6 Inhibitor
WO2016128912A1 (en) Therapeutic combinations of a btk inhibitor, a pi3k inhibitor, a jak-2 inhibitor, a pd-1 inhibitor, and/or a pd-l1 inhibitor
WO2016116777A1 (en) Compositions and methods for treatment of chronic lymphocytic leukemia and small lymphocytic leukemia using a btk inhibitor
US20190008869A1 (en) Therapeutic Combinations of an Antifolate and a BTK Inhibitor

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15728137

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 15112968

Country of ref document: US

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 15728137

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2